2009 Saturn VUE Owner Manual M - General - Vaden GMPP · 2009 Saturn VUE Owner Manual M. SATURN,...

Seats and RestraintSystem ............................... 1-1

Head Restraints .............. 1-2Front Seats .................... 1-3Rear Seats .................... 1-9Safety Belts .................. 1-10Child Restraints ............. 1-23Airbag System .............. 1-42Restraint System

Check ...................... 1-58

Features and Controls ...... 2-1Keys ............................. 2-2Doors and Locks ............ 2-7Windows ...................... 2-10Theft-Deterrent

Systems ................... 2-12Starting and Operating

Your Vehicle ............. 2-15Mirrors ......................... 2-29Object Detection

Systems ................... 2-31OnStar® System ............ 2-33

Universal Home RemoteSystem ..................... 2-37

Storage Areas ............... 2-41Sunroof ........................ 2-45

Instrument Panel ............... 3-1Instrument Panel

Overview .................... 3-4Climate Controls ............ 3-17Warning Lights, Gages,

and Indicators ............ 3-26Driver Information

Center (DIC) ............. 3-42Audio System(s) ............ 3-64

Driving Your Vehicle ......... 4-1Your Driving, the Road,

and the Vehicle ........... 4-1Towing ........................ 4-32

Service andAppearance Care ............... 5-1

Service .......................... 5-3Fuel .............................. 5-5Checking Things Under

the Hood .................. 5-10

All-Wheel Drive ............. 5-35Headlamp Aiming .......... 5-36Bulb Replacement ......... 5-39Windshield Wiper Blade

Replacement ............. 5-42Tires ........................... 5-43Appearance Care .......... 5-72Vehicle Identification ...... 5-79Electrical System ........... 5-79Capacities and

Specifications ............ 5-86

Maintenance Schedule ...... 6-1Maintenance Schedule ..... 6-1

Customer AssistanceInformation ........................ 7-1

Customer Assistance andInformation ................. 7-1

Reporting SafetyDefects ..................... 7-14

Vehicle Data Recordingand Privacy ................. 16

Index ....................................i-1

2009 Saturn VUE Owner Manual M

SATURN, the SATURN Emblem,and the name VUE are registeredtrademarks of Saturn Corporation.GENERAL MOTORS and GMare registered trademarks ofGeneral Motors Corporation.

This manual includes the latestinformation at the time it wasprinted. Saturn reserves the rightto make changes after that timewithout further notice.

This manual describes featuresthat may or may not be onyour specific vehicle.

Read this manual from beginning toend to learn about the vehicle’sfeatures and controls. Pictures,symbols, and words work togetherto explain vehicle operation.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of thismanual can be obtained from yourdealer/retailer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123www.helminc.com

Propriétaires CanadiensOn peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès deconcessionnaire ou à l’adressesuivante:


1-800-551-4123www.helminc.com

About Driving YourVehicleAs with other vehicles of this type,failure to operate this vehiclecorrectly may result in loss of controlor an accident. Be sure to read the“on-pavement” and “off-road” drivingguidelines which follow in thismanual in the section called “YourDriving, the Road, and Your Vehicle”,and specifically Off-Road Driving onpage 4-13.

ii Preface

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 25812262 B Second Printing ©2008 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

IndexTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the index in the backof the manual. It is an alphabeticallist of what is in the manual and thepage number where it can be found.

Safety Warnings andSymbols

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “Do Not,”“Do not do this” or “Do not let thishappen.”

A box with the word CAUTION isused to tell about things that couldhurt you or others if you were toignore the warning.

{ CAUTION

These mean there is somethingthat could hurt you or other people.

Cautions tell what the hazard is andwhat to do to avoid or reduce thehazard. Read these cautions.

A notice tells about something thatcan damage the vehicle.

Notice: These mean there issomething that could damageyour vehicle.

Many times, this damage would notbe covered by the vehicle’s warranty,and it could be costly. The noticetells what to do to help avoid thedamage.

There are also warning labels onthe vehicle which use the samewords, CAUTION or Notice.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols insteadof text. Symbols are shown alongwith the text describing the operationor information relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gage, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

Preface iii

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

g : Audio Steering WheelControls or OnStar®

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gage

+ : Fuses

i : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System Child Restraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

F : Traction Control

M : Windshield Washer Fluid

iv Preface

Seats andRestraint System

Head RestraintsHead Restraints ....................1-2

Front SeatsManual Seats .......................1-3Seat Height Adjuster ..............1-4Power Seat ..........................1-4Manual Lumbar .....................1-5Heated Seats .......................1-5Reclining Seatbacks ..............1-6Passenger Folding Seatback ....1-8

Rear SeatsSplit Folding Rear Seat ..........1-9

Safety BeltsSafety Belts: They Arefor Everyone .....................1-10

How to Wear SafetyBelts Properly ....................1-14

Lap-Shoulder Belt ................1-19Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy ........................1-23

Safety Belt Extender ............1-23

Child RestraintsOlder Children .....................1-23Infants and Young Children ....1-26Child Restraint Systems ........1-29Where to Put the Restraint .....1-30Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH) ..........1-31

Securing a Child Restraintin a Rear Seat Position ......1-37

Securing a Child Restraintin the Right Front SeatPosition ............................1-39

Airbag SystemAirbag System ....................1-42Where Are the Airbags? .......1-45When Should an AirbagInflate? .............................1-47

What Makes an AirbagInflate? .............................1-49

How Does an AirbagRestrain? ..........................1-49

What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates? .............1-50

Passenger Sensing System ....1-51Servicing YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle .....1-56

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle .....1-57

Restraint System CheckChecking the RestraintSystems ...........................1-58

Replacing Restraint SystemParts After a Crash ............1-59

Seats and Restraint System 1-1

Head RestraintsThe front and rear seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

{ CAUTION

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinalinjury in a crash. Do not driveuntil the head restraints for alloccupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant’shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

Pull the head restraint up to raise it.To lower the head restraint, pressthe button, located on the topof the seatback, and push therestraint down.

1-2 Seats and Restraint System

Push down on the head restraintafter the button is released to makesure that it is locked in place.

The head restraints are notdesigned to be removed.

Active Head Restraint SystemThe vehicle has an active headrestraint system in the front outboardseating positions. The active headrestraints automatically tilt forward toreduce the risk of neck injury ifthe vehicle is hit from behind.

Front Seats

Manual Seats

{ CAUTION

You can lose control of the vehicleif you try to adjust a manualdriver’s seat while the vehicle ismoving. The sudden movementcould startle and confuse you, ormake you push a pedal when youdo not want to. Adjust the driver’sseat only when the vehicle is notmoving.

To move a manual seat forward orrearward:

1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the bar.

Try to move the seat with your bodyto be sure the seat is locked inplace.


Seat Height Adjuster

If the vehicle has a manual driverseat height adjuster, it is locatedon the outboard side of the seatnear the front of the seat cushion.

To raise the seat, move the leverupward repeatedly until the seat isat the desired height. To lowerthe seat, move the lever downwardrepeatedly until the seat is at thedesired height.

Power Seat

a : To adjust the seat:

Move the seat forward or rearward.

Raise or lower the front or rear partof the seat cushion.


Manual Lumbar

If the vehicle has this feature, theknob is located on the inboardside of the driver seatback.

Turn the knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the lumbar support.

Heated SeatsOn vehicles with heated front seatsthe controls are located on the centerconsole. The engine must be runningto operate the heated seats.

M (Heated Seat): Press this buttonto turn on the heated seat.

The indicator light on the buttonshows that the feature is on and thelevel of heat, three being the highest.Press the button to choose the levelof heat.

The passenger seat may takelonger to heat up.


Reclining SeatbacksManual Reclining Seatbacks

{ CAUTION

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver’s seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver’s seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

{ CAUTION

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

On seats with manual recliningseatbacks, the lever used to operatethem is located on the outboardside of the seat.

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the recline lever.

2. Move the seatback to the desiredposition, then release the lever tolock the seatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

To return the seatback to an uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback and the seatbackreturns to the upright position.

2. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.


Power Reclining Seatbacks

If the seats have power recliningseatbacks, the control used torecline them is located on theoutboard side of the seat.

• To recline the seatback, tilt thetop of the control rearward.

• To bring the seatback forward, tiltthe top of the control forward.

{ CAUTION

Sitting in a reclined position whenyour vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even if you buckle up,your safety belts cannot do theirjob when you are reclined like this.

The shoulder belt cannot do its job.In a crash, you could go into it,receiving neck or other injuries.

The lap belt cannot do its jobeither. In a crash the belt could goup over your abdomen. The beltforces would be there, not at yourpelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear yoursafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.


Passenger FoldingSeatbackThe front passenger seatback mayfold flat.

{ CAUTION

If you fold the seatback forward tocarry longer objects, such as skis,be sure any such cargo is notnear an airbag. In a crash, aninflating airbag might force thatobject toward a person. Thiscould cause severe injury or evendeath. Secure objects away fromthe area in which an airbag wouldinflate. For more information,see Where Are the Airbags?on page 1-45 and Loading theVehicle on page 4-28.

{ CAUTION

Things you put on this seatbackcan strike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in a crash.Remove or secure all itemsbefore driving.

To fold the seatback:

1. Lower the head restraint allthe way.

2. Lift the bar under the front of theseat to unlock it. Slide the seatas far back as it will go andrelease the bar. Try to move theseat back and forth to makesure it is locked into place.

3. Lift the recliner lever, located onthe outboard side of the seat,up fully and fold the seatbackforward until it disengages.

4. Continue to fold the seat forwardinto the folded position.

5. Pull up on the seatback to besure it is locked.


To raise the seatback:

1. Lift the recliner lever, located onthe outboard side of the seat,up fully and push up on theseatback.

2. Continue raising the seatbackuntil the seatback re-engages.

{ CAUTION


3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked in place.

The recliner lever is also usedto recline the seatback while apassenger is seated. See RecliningSeatbacks on page 1-6.

Rear Seats

Split Folding Rear SeatThe rear split bench seatbackscan be folded forward, upright,or partially reclined, independentof the other seatback position.

{ CAUTION


{ CAUTION

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. After raisingthe rear seatback, always checkto be sure that the safety beltsare properly routed and attached,and are not twisted.

To fold the seatback down:

Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle thesafety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

1. Unbuckle all three safety beltsand put the front seatback inan upright position.


2. Lift the lever located on the topof the seatback to release theseatback and fold the seatbackforward.

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift and hold the lever located ontop of the seatback.

2. Tilt the seatback rearward, thenrelease the lever.

Safety BeltsSafety Belts: They Arefor EveryoneThis section of the manual describeshow to use safety belts properly.It also describes some things not todo with safety belts.

{ CAUTION

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, the injuries can bemuch worse. You can hit thingsinside the vehicle harder or beejected from the vehicle. You andyour passenger(s) can be seriouslyinjured or killed. In the same crash,you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten yoursafety belt, and check that yourpassenger(s) are restrainedproperly too.

{ CAUTION

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision, peopleriding in these areas are morelikely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ridein any area of your vehicle thatis not equipped with seats andsafety belts. Be sure everyone inyour vehicle is in a seat and usinga safety belt properly.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 3-28 for additional information.

In most states and in all Canadianprovinces, the law requires wearingsafety belts. Here is why:

You never know if you will be in acrash. If you do have a crash,you do not know if it will be aserious one.


A few crashes are mild, and somecrashes can be so serious that evenbuckled up, a person would notsurvive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, peoplewho buckle up can survive andsometimes walk away. Withoutsafety belts they could have beenbadly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safetybelts in vehicles, the facts are clear.In most crashes buckling up doesmatter... a lot!

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything,you go as fast as it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Supposeit is just a seat on wheels.

Put someone on it.


Get it up to speed. Then stop thevehicle. The rider does not stop.

The person keeps going untilstopped by something. In a realvehicle, it could be the windshield...

or the instrument panel...


or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down asthe vehicle does. You get more timeto stop. You stop over more distance,and your strongest bones take theforces. That is why safety belts makesuch good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be — whether you arewearing a safety belt or not. Butyour chance of being consciousduring and after an accident, soyou can unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.And you can unbuckle a safetybelt, even if you are upside down.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts — not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get the mostprotection. That is true not onlyin frontal collisions, but especiallyin side and other collisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and Inever drive far from home,why should I wear safetybelts?

A: You may be an excellent driver,but if you are in a crash — evenone that is not your fault — youand your passenger(s) can behurt. Being a good driver does notprotect you from things beyondyour control, such as bad drivers.

Most accidents occur within25 miles (40 km) of home. Andthe greatest number of seriousinjuries and deaths occur atspeeds of less than 40 mph(65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.


How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

Be aware that there are specialthings to know about safetybelts and children. And there aredifferent rules for smaller childrenand infants. If a child will be riding inthe vehicle, see Older Children onpage 1-23 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 1-26. Follow thoserules for everyone’s protection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

Occupants who are not buckled upcan be thrown out of the vehiclein a crash. And they can strikeothers in the vehicle who arewearing safety belts.

First, before you or yourpassenger(s) wear a safety belt,there is important informationyou should know.

Sit up straight and always keep yourfeet on the floor in front of you.The lap part of the belt should beworn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.

In a crash, this applies force to thestrong pelvic bones and you wouldbe less likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on your abdomen.This could cause serious or evenfatal injuries. The shoulder beltshould go over the shoulder andacross the chest. These parts ofthe body are best able to take beltrestraining forces.

The shoulder belt locks if there is asudden stop or crash.


Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose.It will not give as muchprotection this way.

{ CAUTION

You can be seriously hurt if yourshoulder belt is too loose. In acrash, you would move forwardtoo much, which could increaseinjury. The shoulder belt should fitsnugly against your body.


A: The lap belt is too loose. It willnot give nearly as muchprotection this way.

{ CAUTION

You can be seriously hurt if yourlap belt is too loose. In a crash,you could slide under the lap beltand apply force on your abdomen.This could cause serious or evenfatal injuries. The lap belt shouldbe worn low and snug on thehips, just touching the thighs.



A: The belt is buckled in the wrongbuckle.

{ CAUTION

You can be seriously injured ifyour belt is buckled in the wrongplace like this. In a crash, the beltwould go up over your abdomen.The belt forces would be there,not on the pelvic bones. Thiscould cause serious internalinjuries. Always buckle your beltinto the buckle nearest you.


A: The belt is over an armrest.


{ CAUTION

You can be seriously injured ifyour belt goes over an armrestlike this. The belt would be muchtoo high. In a crash, you can slideunder the belt. The belt forcewould then be applied on theabdomen, not on the pelvicbones, and that could causeserious or fatal injuries. Be surethe belt goes under the armrests.


A: The shoulder belt is worn underthe arm. It should be worn overthe shoulder at all times.

{ CAUTION

You can be seriously injured if youwear the shoulder belt under yourarm. In a crash, your body wouldmove too far forward, which wouldincrease the chance of head andneck injury. Also, the belt wouldapply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong asshoulder bones. You could alsoseverely injure internal organs likeyour liver or spleen. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest.



A: The belt is behind the body.

{ CAUTION

You can be seriously injured bynot wearing the lap-shoulder beltproperly. In a crash, you wouldnot be restrained by the shoulderbelt. Your body could move toofar forward increasing the chanceof head and neck injury. Youmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.


A: The belt is twisted acrossthe body.

{ CAUTION

You can be seriously injured by atwisted belt. In a crash, you wouldnot have the full width of the beltto spread impact forces. If a beltis twisted, make it straight so itcan work properly, or ask yourdealer/retailer to fix it.


Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not letit get twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across youvery quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly tounlock it. Then pull the beltacross you more slowly.If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.Engaging the child restraintlocking feature in the right frontseating position may affectthe passenger sensing system.See Passenger SensingSystem on page 1-51 for moreinformation.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 1-23.Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.


4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you.See “Shoulder Belt HeightAdjustment” later in this sectionfor instructions on use andimportant safety information.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.It may be necessary to pull thestitching on the safety beltthrough the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smalleroccupants.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt should returnto its stowed position. Slide the latchplate up the safety belt webbingwhen the safety belt is not in use.The latch plate should rest on thestitching on the safety belt, near theguide loop on the side wall.

Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height AdjusterThe vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driverand right front passenger seatingpositions.

Adjust the height so that theshoulder portion of the belt iscentered on the shoulder. The beltshould be away from the face andneck, but not falling off of theshoulder. Improper shoulder beltheight adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in acrash.


Squeeze the release buttons (A)together and move the heightadjuster up or down to the desiredposition.

After the adjuster is set to the desiredposition, try to move it up or downwithout squeezing the releasebuttons to make sure it has lockedinto position.

Safety Belt PretensionersThis vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for the front outboardoccupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, they

are part of the safety belt assembly.They can help tighten the safety beltsduring the early stages of a moderateto severe frontal, near frontal, or rearcrash if the threshold conditions forpretensioner activation are met. And,for vehicles with side impact airbags,safety belt pretensioners can helptighten the safety belts in a sidecrash or a rollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,they will need to be replaced, andprobably other new parts for thevehicle’s safety belt system. SeeReplacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash on page 1-59.

Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuidesRear shoulder belt comfort guidesmay provide added safety beltcomfort for older children who haveoutgrown booster seats and forsome adults. When installed on ashoulder belt, the comfort guidepositions the shoulder belt awayfrom the neck and head.

There is one guide for eachoutboard passenger position in therear seat. Here is how to installa comfort guide to the safety belt:

1. Remove the guide from itsstorage location, which is apocket on the side of the seat.

2. Place the guide over the belt andinsert the two edges of the beltinto the slots of the guide.


3. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. The elasticcord must be under the beltand the guide on top.

{ CAUTION

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and releasethe safety belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure that the shoulder beltcrosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety belt canbe removed from the guide. Store thecomfort guide in its storage location,which is a pocket on the side ofthe seat.


Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likelyto be seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lap portionshould be worn as low as possible,below the rounding, throughoutthe pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When asafety belt is worn properly,it is more likely that the fetus will notbe hurt in a crash. For pregnantwomen, as for anyone, the key tomaking safety belts effective iswearing them properly.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer/retailer will orderyou an extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults.Never use it for securing child seats.To wear it, attach it to the regularsafety belt. For more information, seethe instruction sheet that comes withthe extender.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle’s safety belts.


The manufacturer’s instructions thatcome with the booster seat, statethe weight and height limitations forthat booster. Use a booster seatwith a lap-shoulder belt untilthe child passes the below fit test:

• Sit all the way back on theseat. Do the knees bend at theseat edge? If yes, continue.If no, return to the booster seat.

• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest on theshoulder? If yes, continue. If no,try using the rear safety beltcomfort guide. See “Rear SafetyBelt Comfort Guides” underLap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-19for more information. If theshoulder belt still does not reston the shoulder, then return tothe booster seat.

• Does the lap belt fit low and snugon the hips, touching the thighs?If yes, continue. If no, return to thebooster seat.

• Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no, returnto the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the faceor neck. The lap belt shouldfit snugly below the hips,just touching the top of thethighs. This applies belt forceto the child’s pelvic bonesin a crash. It should never beworn over the abdomen,which could cause severe oreven fatal internal injuriesin a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belton page 1-19.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safetybelts properly.


{ CAUTION

Never do this.

Never allow two children to wearthe same safety belt. The safetybelt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the twochildren can be crushed togetherand seriously injured. A safetybelt must be used by only oneperson at a time.

{ CAUTION

Never do this.

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.


Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law inevery state in the United States andin every Canadian province sayschildren up to some age mustbe restrained while in a vehicle.

{ CAUTION

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and neverallow children to play with thesafety belts.

Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offerprotection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither the vehicle’ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Everytime infants and young childrenride in vehicles, they should havethe protection provided byappropriate child restraints.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people, orcan be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ CAUTION

Never do this.

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg)infant will suddenly become a240 lb (110 kg) force on aperson’s arms. An infant shouldbe secured in an appropriaterestraint.


{ CAUTION

Never do this.

Children who are up against, orvery close to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injured orkilled. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. It is alsobetter to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat,always move the front passengerseat as far back as it will go.


Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicle’sowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child’sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint will becompatible with the motor vehiclein which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available.When purchasing a childrestraint, be sure it is designedto be used in a motor vehicle. If itis, the restraint will have a labelsaying that it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’sinstructions that come withthe restraint state the weight and

height limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition,there are many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.

{ CAUTION

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. This isbecause an infant’s neck is notfully developed and its headweighs so much compared withthe rest of its body. In a crash, aninfant in a rear-facing childrestraint settles into the restraint,so the crash forces can bedistributed across the strongestpart of an infant’s body, the backand shoulders. Infants shouldalways be secured in rear-facingchild restraints.

{ CAUTION

A young child’s hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle’s regularsafety belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child’s abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.


Child Restraint Systems

A rear-facing infant seat (A) providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned inthe restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (B)provides restraint for the child’s bodywith the harness.

A booster seat (C) is a childrestraint designed to improve the fitof the vehicle’s safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.

(A) Rear-Facing Infant Seat

(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat (C) Booster Seats


Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ CAUTION

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child restraintis not properly secured in thevehicle. Secure the child restraintproperly in the vehicle using thevehicle’s safety belt or LATCHsystem, following the instructionsthat came with that child restraintand the instructions in this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or bythe LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 1-31 for moreinformation. A child can beendangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly securedin the vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructions thatcome with the restraint which may beon the restraint itself or in a booklet,or both, and to this manual. The childrestraint instructions are important,so if they are not available, obtain areplacement copy from themanufacturer.Keep in mind that an unsecured childrestraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ CAUTION

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the child properlyfollowing the instructions thatcame with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

We recommend that children andchild restraints be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint;a child riding in a forward-facing childseat; an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the front.” This isbecause the risk to the rear-facingchild is so great, if the airbagdeploys.


{ CAUTION

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbag isoff. If you secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passengerseat as far back as it will go. It isbetter to secure the child restraintin a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 1-51 for additionalinformation.

If the vehicle does not have arear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint, arear-facing child restraint shouldnot be installed in the vehicle,even if the airbag is off.

When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with your childrestraint to make sure it is compatiblewith this vehicle.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure thechild restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured childrestraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH)The LATCH system holds a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.This system is designed to makeinstallation of a child restraint easier.The LATCH system uses anchorsin the vehicle and attachmentson the child restraint that are madefor use with the LATCH system.


Make sure that a LATCH-compatiblechild restraint is properly installedusing the anchors, or use thevehicle’s safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also use eitherthe lower anchors or the safety beltsto properly secure the child restraint.A child restraint must never beinstalled using only the top tetherand anchor.

In order to use the LATCHsystem in your vehicle, you needa child restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraintmanufacturer will provide you withinstructions on how to use the childrestraint and its attachments.

The following explains how toattach a child restraint with theseattachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metalbars built into the vehicle. Thereare two lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (B).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors thetop of the child restraint to thevehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tetherattachment (B) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchorin the vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotationof the child restraint during drivingor in a crash.


Your child restraint may have asingle tether (A) or a dual tether (C).Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the toptether to the anchor.

Some child restraints that have toptethers are designed for usewith or without the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached.In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tetherbe attached. Be sure to read andfollow the instructions for yourchild restraint.

If the child restraint does not have atop tether, one can be obtained,in kit form, for many child restraints.Ask the child restraint manufacturerwhether or not a kit is available.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor): Seating positionswith two lower anchors.

To assist you in locating the loweranchors, each seating positionwith lower anchors has two labels,near the crease between theseatback and the seat cushion.

To assist you in locating the toptether anchors, the top tether anchorsymbol is located near the toptether anchors.

The top tether anchors are locatedon the back of the rear seatback.Be sure to use an anchor located onthe same side of the vehicle asthe seating position where the childrestraint will be placed.

Rear Seat


Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tetheranchor if a national or local lawrequires that the top tether beattached, or if the instructions thatcome with the child restraint say thatthe top tether must be attached.

Accident statistics show that childrenare safer if they are restrained inthe rear rather than the front seat.See Where to Put the Restraint onpage 1-30 for additional information.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCH System

{ CAUTION

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle’ssafety belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that camewith the child restraint and theinstructions in this manual.

{ CAUTION

Do not attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachment tocome loose or even break duringa crash. A child or others couldbe injured. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, attach only one childrestraint per anchor.


{ CAUTION

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock, ifyour vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lower attachmentsor the desired seating positiondoes not have lower anchors,secure the child restraint with thetop tether and the safety belts.Refer to your child restraintmanufacturer instructions and theinstructions in this manual.1.1. Find the lower anchors for

the desired seating position.1.2. Put the child restraint on

the seat.1.3. Attach and tighten the lower

attachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if equipped. Refer to thechild restraint instructions and thefollowing steps:2.1. Find the top tether anchor.2.2. Route, attach, and tighten

the top tether according toyour child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrest orhead restraint and you areusing a single tether, routethe tether over the seatback.


If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint andyou are using a dual tether,route the tether over theseatback.

If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint and you areusing a dual tether, route thetether around the headrest orhead restraint.

If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint and you areusing a single tether, raisethe headrest or headrestraint and route the tetherunder the headrest or headrestraint and in between theheadrest or head restraintposts.

3. Push and pull the child restraintin different directions to be sureit is secure.


Securing a ChildRestraint in a Rear SeatPositionWhen securing a child restraint ina rear seating position, studythe instructions that came with thechild restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH)on page 1-31 for how and whereto install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured in the vehicle using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH) on page 1-31for top tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat ina position without a top tetheranchor if a national or locallaw requires that the top tether beanchored, or if the instructions

that come with the child restraintsay that the top strap must beanchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tetherbe attached.

If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will be usingthe safety belt to secure the childrestraint in this position. Be sure tofollow the instructions that camewith the child restraint. Secure thechild in the child restraint whenand as the instructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in therear seat, be sure to read Where toPut the Restraint on page 1-30.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, andrun the lap and shoulder portionsof the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint.The child restraint instructionswill show you how.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.


4. Pull the rest of the shoulder beltall the way out of the retractor toset the lock.

5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the beltand feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer’s instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH)on page 1-31 for moreinformation.


To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.


Securing a ChildRestraint in the RightFront Seat PositionThe vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to securea forward-facing child restraint.See Where to Put the Restrainton page 1-30.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system whichis designed to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. See PassengerSensing System on page 1-51and Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 3-30 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the riskto the rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ CAUTION


Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbag isoff. If you secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passengerseat as far back as it will go. It isbetter to secure the child restraintin a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 1-51 for additionalinformation.

If the vehicle does not have arear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint, arear-facing child restraint should notbe installed in the vehicle, even if theairbag is off.


If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH)on page 1-31 for how and whereto install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured using a safety belt andit uses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 1-31 for top tetheranchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored,or if the instructions that come withthe child restraint say that thetop strap must be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tetherbe attached.

You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off theright front passenger frontalairbag, the off indicator on thepassenger airbag status indicatorshould light and stay lit whenthe vehicle is started. SeePassenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 3-30.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portionsof the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint.The child restraint instructionswill show you how.

4. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.


5. Pull the rest of the shoulder beltall the way out of the retractor toset the lock.

6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the beltand feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

7. If the vehicle does not have arear seat and the child restrainthas a top tether, follow thechild restraint manufacturer’sinstructions regarding the useof the top tether. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 1-31 formore information.


If the airbag is off, the off indicatorin the passenger airbag statusindicator will come on and stayon when the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit, see“If the On Indicator is Lit for a ChildRestraint ” under Passenger SensingSystem on page 1-51 for moreinformation.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.


Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:

• A frontal airbag for the driver.

• A frontal airbag for the right frontpassenger.

• A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the driver.

• A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the right frontpassenger.

• A roof-rail airbag for the driverand the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver.

• A roof-rail airbag for the rightfront passenger and thepassenger seated directly behindthe right front passenger.

All of the airbags in the vehicle willhave the word AIRBAG embossed inthe trim or on an attached label nearthe deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the middlepart of the steering wheel forthe driver and on the instrumentpanel for the right front passenger.

With seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAGwill appear on the side of theseatback closest to the door.

With roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear along theheadliner or trim.

Even if you do not have a right frontpassenger seat in the vehiclethere is still an active frontal airbagin the right side of the instrumentpanel. Do not place cargo in front ofthis airbag.

{ CAUTION

Be sure that cargo is not near anairbag. In a crash, an inflatingairbag might force that objecttoward a person. This couldcause severe injury or evendeath. Secure objects away fromthe area in which an airbag wouldinflate. For more information,see Where Are the Airbags?on page 1-45 and Loading theVehicle on page 4-28.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today’s airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force ofan inflating bag, all airbags mustinflate very quickly to do their job.


Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ CAUTION

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt — even ifyou have airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, but do not replace them.Also, airbags are not designed todeploy in every crash. In somecrashes safety belts are your onlyrestraint. See When Should anAirbag Inflate? on page 1-47.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce your chanceof hitting things inside the vehicleor being ejected from it. Airbagsare “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. Everyone in yourvehicle should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ CAUTION

Airbags inflate with great force,faster than the blink of an eye.Anyone who is up against, orvery close to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injured orkilled. Do not sit unnecessarilyclose to the airbag, as you would

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

be if you were sitting on the edgeof your seat or leaning forward.Safety belts help keep you inposition before and during acrash. Always wear your safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.


{ CAUTION

Children who are up against, orvery close to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injured orkilled. Airbags plus lap-shoulderbelts offer protection for adultsand older children, but not foryoung children and infants.Neither the vehicle’s safety beltsystem nor its airbag system is

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

designed for them. Young childrenand infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system canprovide. Always secure childrenproperly in your vehicle. To readhow, see Older Children onpage 1-23 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 1-26.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel cluster,which shows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 3-29 formore information.


Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in themiddle of the steering wheel.

The right front passenger frontalairbag is in the instrument panel onthe passenger side. The seat-mounted side impact

airbags for the driver and right frontpassenger are in the side of theseatbacks closest to the door.

Driver Side shown, PassengerSide similar


The roof-rail airbags for the driver,right front passenger, and secondrow outboard passengers are in theceiling above the side windows.

{ CAUTION

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properly orit might force the object into thatperson causing severe injury oreven death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.Driver Side shown, Passenger

Side similar


When Should an AirbagInflate?Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries mainly to the driver’s or rightfront passenger’s head and chest.However, they are only designedto inflate if the impact exceeds apredetermined deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholdsare used to predict how severe acrash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrainthe occupants.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based onhow fast your vehicle is traveling.It depends largely on what youhit, the direction of the impact,and how quickly your vehicleslows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds. For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationaryobject, the airbags could inflate ata different crash speed than if thevehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object thatdeforms, the airbags could inflateat a different crash speed than ifthe vehicle hits an object thatdoes not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object(like a pole), the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a wideobject (like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an objectat an angle, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straightinto the object.

Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasdual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.The vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between amoderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, dual-stage airbagsinflate at a level less than fulldeployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.


The vehicle has seat-mountedside impact and roof-rail airbags.See Airbag System on page 1-42.Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags are intendedto inflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes. In addition, these roof-railairbags are intended to inflate duringa rollover or in a severe frontalimpact. Seat-mounted side impactand roof-rail airbags will inflate ifthe crash severity is above thesystem’s designed threshold level.The threshold level can varywith specific vehicle design.

Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare not intended to inflate infrontal impacts, near-frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts. Roof-railairbags are not intended to inflatein rear impacts. A seat-mountedside impact airbag is intendedto deploy on the side of the vehiclethat is struck. Both roof-railairbags will deploy when either sideof the vehicle is struck, or if thesensing system predicts thatthe vehicle is about to roll over,or in a severe frontal impact.

In any particular crash, no onecan say whether an airbag shouldhave inflated simply because of thedamage to a vehicle or becauseof what the repair costs were.For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits,the angle of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.For seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags, deployment isdetermined by the location andseverity of the side impact. In arollover event, roof-rail airbagdeployment is determined by thedirection of the roll.


What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fillsthe airbag causing the bag tobreak out of the cover and deploy.The inflator, the airbag, andrelated hardware are all partof the airbag module.

Frontal airbag modules are locatedinside the steering wheel andinstrument panel. For vehicles withseat-mounted side impact airbags,there are airbag modules in the sideof the front seatbacks closest tothe door. For vehicles with roof-railairbags, there are airbag modulesin the ceiling of the vehicle, near theside windows that have occupantseating positions.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel.In moderate to severe sidecollisions, even belted occupantscan contact the inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Frontalairbags distribute the force ofthe impact more evenly over theoccupant’s upper body, stoppingthe occupant more gradually.Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags distribute the forceof the impact more evenly overthe occupant’s upper body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help contain thehead and chest of occupants in theoutboard seating positions in thefirst and second rows. The rollovercapable roof-rail airbags aredesigned to help reduce the risk offull or partial ejection in rolloverevents, although no system canprevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help inmany types of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant’s motionis not toward those airbags.See When Should an Airbag Inflate?on page 1-47 for more information.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.


What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some timeafter they deploy. Some componentsof the airbag module may be hotfor several minutes. For location ofthe airbag modules, see WhatMakes an Airbag Inflate? onpage 1-49.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ CAUTION

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannot getout of the vehicle after an airbaginflates, then get fresh air byopening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors,turn the interior lamps on, and turnthe hazard warning flashers onwhen the airbags inflate. You canlock the doors, turn the interiorlamps off, and turn the hazardwarning flashers off by using thecontrols for those features. Youmust first, however, turn the ignitionkey to the following ignition switchpositions:

1. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

2. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN.


In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshieldsare broken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakagemay also occur from the right frontpassenger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflateonly once. After an airbag inflates,you will need some new parts forthe airbag system. If you do notget them, the airbag system willnot be there to help protect you inanother crash. A new system willinclude airbag modules andpossibly other parts. The servicemanual for your vehicle coversthe need to replace other parts.

• The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after a crash.See Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy on page 7-16 and EventData Recorders on page 7-16.

• Let only qualified technicians workon the airbag systems. Improperservice can mean that an airbagsystem will not work properly.See your dealer/retailer forservice.

Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the right frontpassenger position. The passengerairbag status indicator will bevisible on the instrument panelwhen the vehicle is started.

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, are visibleduring the system check. If you areusing remote start, if equipped,to start the vehicle from a distance,you may not see the systemcheck. When the system check iscomplete, either the word ONor OFF, or the symbol for on or off,will be visible. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator onpage 3-30.

United States

Canada


The passenger sensing systemturns off the right front passengerfrontal airbag and seat-mountedside impact airbag under certainconditions. The driver airbagsand the roof-rail airbags are notaffected by the passenger sensingsystem.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe right front passenger seat andsafety belt. The sensors aredesigned to detect the presenceof a properly-seated occupant anddetermine if the right front passengerfrontal airbag and seat-mounted sideimpact airbag should be enabled(may inflate) or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in a correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

We recommend that children besecured in a rear seat, including: aninfant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a childriding in a forward-facing child seat;an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who arelarge enough, using safety belts.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the riskto the rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ CAUTION


(Continued)


CAUTION (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag(if equipped), no system isfail-safe. No one can guaranteethat an airbag will not deploy undersome unusual circumstance, eventhough the airbag(s) are off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbag(s)are off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint in theright front seat, always move thefront passenger seat as far back asit will go. It is better to secure thechild restraint in a rear seat.

If the vehicle does not have arear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint, arear-facing child restraint should notbe installed in the vehicle, even if theairbag is off.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the rightfront passenger airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag if:

• The right front passenger seatis unoccupied.

• The system determines that aninfant is present in a rear-facinginfant seat.

• The system determines that asmall child is present in achild restraint.

• The system determines that asmall child is present in abooster seat.

• A right front passenger takeshis/her weight off of the seatfor a period of time.

• The right front passenger seat isoccupied by a smaller person,such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

• Or, if there is a critical problemwith the airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag,the off indicator will light and stay litto remind you that the airbagsare off. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 3-30.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on (may inflate) theright front passenger frontal airbagand seat-mounted side impactairbag anytime the system sensesthat a person of adult size issitting properly in the right frontpassenger seat.

When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbags tobe enabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit to remind you that theairbags are active.


For some children who haveoutgrown child restraints and for verysmall adults, the passenger sensingsystem may or may not turn off theright front passenger frontal airbagand seat-mounted side impactairbag, depending upon the person’sseating posture and body build.Everyone in the vehicle who hasoutgrown child restraints should weara safety belt properly — whether ornot there is an airbag for that person.

{ CAUTION

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrong withthe airbag system. To help avoidinjury to yourself or others, havethe vehicle serviced right away.See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 3-29 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild RestraintIf a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directions providedby the child restraint manufacturerand refer to Securing a ChildRestraint in the Right Front SeatPosition on page 1-39.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit,turn the vehicle off. Thenslightly recline the vehicleseatback and adjust the seatcushion, if adjustable, tomake sure that the vehicleseatback is not pushing the childrestraint into the seat cushion.Also make sure the child restraintis not trapped under the vehiclehead restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.See Head Restraints onpage 1-2.

6. Restart the vehicle.If the on indicator is still lit with aninfant present in a child restraint,secure the child restraint in a rearseat position in the vehicle andsee your dealer/retailer.


If the Off Indicator is Lit for anAdult-Size Occupant

If a person of adult-size is sitting inthe right front passenger seat,but the off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat.

If this happens, use the followingsteps to allow the system to detectthat person and enable the rightfront passenger frontal airbagand seat-mounted side impactairbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after theon indicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem OperationSafety belts help keep the passengerin position on the seat during vehiclemaneuvers and braking, which helpsthe passenger sensing systemmaintain the passenger airbagstatus. See “Safety Belts” and “ChildRestraints” in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.


A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing system operates.We recommend that you not useseat covers or other aftermarketequipment except when approvedby GM for your specific vehicle.See Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 1-57 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.

{ CAUTION

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing YourAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer/retailer and the servicemanual have information aboutservicing the vehicle and the airbagsystem. To purchase a servicemanual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 7-15.

{ CAUTION

For up to 10 seconds after theignition is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.


Adding Equipment toYour Airbag-EquippedVehicleQ: Is there anything I might add

to or change about thevehicle that could keep theairbags from workingproperly?

A: Yes. If you add things thatchange the vehicle’s frame,bumper system, height, front endor side sheet metal, they maykeep the airbag system fromworking properly. Changing ormoving any parts of the frontseats, safety belts, the airbagsensing and diagnostic module,steering wheel, instrumentpanel, roof-rail airbag modules,ceiling headliner or pillargarnish trim, front sensors,side impact sensors, rolloversensor module, or airbag wiringcan affect the operation ofthe airbag system.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for theright front passenger position,which includes sensors thatare part of the passenger seat.The passenger sensing systemmay not operate properly if theoriginal seat trim is replacedwith non-GM covers, upholsteryor trim, or with GM covers,upholstery or trim designed for adifferent vehicle. Any object, suchas an aftermarket seat heater or acomfort enhancing pad or device,installed under or on top of theseat fabric, could also interferewith the operation of thepassenger sensing system.This could either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent thepassenger sensing system fromproperly turning off the passengerairbag(s). See PassengerSensing System on page 1-51.

If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. The phonenumbers and addresses forCustomer Assistance are inStep Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure inthis manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure onpage 7-1.

If the vehicle has rolloverroof-rail airbags, see DifferentSize Tires and Wheels onpage 5-59 for additionalimportant information.


Q: Because I have a disability,I have to get my vehiclemodified. How can I find outwhether this will affect myairbag system?

A: If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. The phonenumbers and addresses forCustomer Assistance are inStep Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure inthis manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure onpage 7-1.

In addition, your dealer/retailer andthe service manual have informationabout the location of the airbagsensors, sensing and diagnosticmodule and airbag wiring.

Restraint SystemCheck

Checking the RestraintSystemsSafety BeltsNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are all working properly.

Look for any other loose or damagedsafety belt system parts that mightkeep a safety belt system from doingits job. See your dealer/retailer tohave it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 3-28 for moreinformation.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Care of Safety Belts onpage 5-74.

AirbagsThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenanceor replacement. Make sure theairbag readiness light is working.See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 3-29 for more information.

Notice: If an airbag coveringis damaged, opened, or broken,the airbag may not work properly.Do not open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are any openedor broken airbag covers, havethe airbag covering and/or airbagmodule replaced. For thelocation of the airbag modules,see What Makes an AirbagInflate? on page 1-49. See yourdealer/retailer for service.


Replacing RestraintSystem Parts After aCrash

{ CAUTION

A crash can damage therestraint systems in your vehicle.A damaged restraint system maynot properly protect the personusing it, resulting in serious injuryor even death in a crash. To helpmake sure your restraint systemsare working properly after a crash,have them inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has been in a crash,do you need new safety beltsor LATCH system (if equipped)parts?

After a very minor crash, nothingmay be necessary. But thesafety belt assemblies that wereused during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer/retailer to have thesafety belt assemblies inspectedor replaced.

If the vehicle has the LATCHsystem and it was being usedduring a crash, you may neednew LATCH system parts.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltor LATCH system (if equipped), wasnot being used at the time of thecrash.

If an airbag inflates, you will needto replace airbag system parts.See the part on the airbag systemearlier in this section.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, if the airbag readiness lightstays on after the vehicle is started,or while you are driving. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 3-29.


✍ NOTES


Features andControlsKeysKeys ...................................2-2Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System .............2-3

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation ................2-4

Remote Vehicle Start .............2-5

Doors and LocksDoor Locks ..........................2-7Power Door Locks .................2-8Delayed Locking ...................2-8Automatic Door Lock .............2-8Automatic Door Unlock ...........2-8Rear Door Security Locks .......2-8Lockout Protection .................2-8Liftgate ................................2-9

WindowsWindows ............................2-10Power Windows ..................2-10Sun Visors .........................2-11

Theft-Deterrent SystemsTheft-Deterrent Systems .......2-12Content Theft-Deterrent ........2-12PASS-Key® III+ ElectronicImmobilizer .......................2-13

PASS-Key® III+ ElectronicImmobilizer Operation .........2-14

Starting and Operating YourVehicleNew Vehicle Break-In ...........2-15Ignition Positions .................2-16Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) .....................2-17

Starting the Engine ..............2-17Engine Coolant Heater .........2-18Automatic TransmissionOperation (Uplevel) ............2-19

Automatic TransmissionOperation (Base) ...............2-22

Parking Brake .....................2-24Shifting Into Park (AutomaticTransmission) ....................2-25

Shifting Out of Park .............2-27Parking Over ThingsThat Burn .........................2-27

Engine Exhaust ...................2-28Running the VehicleWhile Parked ....................2-28

MirrorsManual Rearview Mirror ........2-29Automatic DimmingRearview Mirror .................2-29

Outside Power Mirrors ..........2-29Outside Convex Mirror ..........2-30Outside Heated Mirrors .........2-30

Object Detection SystemsRear VisionCamera (RVC) ...................2-31

OnStar® SystemOnStar® System ..................2-33

Universal Home RemoteSystemUniversal Home RemoteSystem .............................2-37

Universal Home RemoteSystem Operation ..............2-37

Storage AreasGlove Box ..........................2-41Cupholders .........................2-41Instrument Panel Storage ......2-42Sunglasses StorageCompartment .....................2-42

Front Storage Area ..............2-42Center Console Storage .......2-42

Features and Controls 2-1

Luggage Carrier ..................2-43Rear Seat Armrest ...............2-44Convenience Net .................2-44Cargo Cover .......................2-44Cargo Tie Downs ................2-44Cargo ManagementSystem .............................2-44

SunroofSunroof ..............................2-45

Keys

{ CAUTION

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous formany reasons, children or otherscould be badly injured or evenkilled. They could operate thepower windows or other controlsor even make the vehicle move.The windows will function with thekeys in the ignition and childrencould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.

The two keys can be used for theignition and all locks.The key code is stamped on thekey number plate and can be usedto make new keys at any dealer/retailer. Store this information ina safe place outside the vehicle.

Notice: If you ever lock yourkeys in the vehicle, you may haveto damage the vehicle to get in.Be sure you have spare keys.If you are locked out of the vehicle,contact Roadside Assistance.See Roadside Assistance Programon page 7-6 for more information.

2-2 Features and Controls

Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) SystemIf this vehicle has the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) system,it operates on a radio frequencysubject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules andwith Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 ofthe FCC Rules. Operation is subjectto the following two conditions:

1. This device may not causeinterference.

2. This device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

This device complies with RSS-210of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following twoconditions:



Changes or modifications tothis system by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range, try this:

• Check the distance. Thetransmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle. Stand closer duringrainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehiclesor objects may be blocking thesignal. Take a few steps to theleft or right, hold the transmitterhigher, and try again.

• Check the transmitter’s battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

• If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer/retailer or a qualifiedtechnician for service.


Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter functions work up to195 feet (60 m) away from thevehicle.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance of thetransmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2-3.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start):For vehicles with this feature, thisbutton is used to operate the remotestart feature. See Remote VehicleStart on page 2-5 for additionalinformation.

Q (Lock): Press to lock all thedoors, including the liftgate.

K (Unlock): Press once to unlockthe driver door. If K is pressed againwithin five seconds, all remainingdoors unlock. The interior lampscome on and stay on for 20 secondsor until the ignition is turned on.

L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm):Press and release to locate thevehicle. The turn signal lamps flashand the horn sounds three times.Press and hold L to activate thepanic alarm. The turn signal lampsflash and the horn sounds repeatedlyfor 30 seconds. The alarm turns

off when the ignition is turned toON/RUN or when L is pressedagain. The ignition must be inLOCK/OFF for the panic alarmto work.

Programming Transmittersto the VehicleOnly RKE transmittersprogrammed to the vehiclewill work. If a transmitter is lostor stolen, a replacement can bepurchased and programmedthrough your dealer/retailer.When the replacement transmitteris programmed to the vehicle, allremaining transmitters must alsobe programmed. Any lost or stolentransmitters no longer work oncethe new transmitter is programmed.Each vehicle can have up to eighttransmitters programmed to it.See “Relearn Remote Key” underDIC Operation and Displays onpage 3-42.Without Remote Start Shown

(With Remote Start Similar)


Battery ReplacementReplace the battery if theREPLACE REMOTE KEY FOBBATTERY message displays onthe Driver Information Center (DIC).See “REPLACE REMOTE KEY FOBBATTERY” under DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-49.

Notice: When replacing thebattery, do not touch any of thecircuitry on the transmitter. Staticfrom your body could damagethe transmitter. To replace the battery:

1. Separate the transmitter with aflat, thin object inserted into thenotch on the side.

2. Remove the old battery. Do notuse a metal object.

3. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing down. Replace witha CR2032 or equivalent battery.

4. Reassemble the transmitter.

Remote Vehicle StartThis vehicle may have a remotestarting feature that starts the enginefrom outside of the vehicle.

It may also start the vehicle’sheating or air conditioning systemsand rear window defogger. Normaloperation of the climate controlsystem returns after the key isturned to the ON/RUN position.

The climate control system turnson at the setting the vehicle wasset to when the vehicle waslast turned off.

Laws in some communities mayrestrict the use of remote starters.For example, some laws may requirea person using the remote start tohave the vehicle in view when doingso. Check local regulations for anyrequirements on remote starting ofvehicles.

If the vehicle is low on fuel, only one10 minute remote start is allowed tohelp avoid running out of fuel.


If the vehicle has the remote startfeature, the RKE transmitterfunctions have an increased rangeof operation. However, the rangemay be less while the vehicleis running.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance ofthe transmitter, see Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2-3for additional information.

/ (Remote Start): This button islocated on the RKE transmitter if thevehicle has remote start.

To start the vehicle:

1. Aim the transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release Q, thenimmediately press and hold /until the turn signal lamps flash.If the vehicle’s lamps cannot beseen, press and hold / for at

least two seconds. The vehicle’sdoors lock. Pressing / again,after the vehicle has started,shuts the vehicle off.When the vehicle starts, theparking lamps turn on andremain on while the vehicleis running.

3. After entering the vehicle duringa remote start, and the engineis still running, turn the key tothe ON/RUN position to drivethe vehicle.

If the vehicle is left running itautomatically shuts off after10 minutes unless a time extensionhas been done.

If it is the vehicle’s first remote startsince it was last driven, repeat thesesteps while the engine is still runningto give a 10 minute time extension.Remote start can be extendedone time.

To manually shut off a remote start:

• Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle and press / until theparking lamps turn off.

• Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

• Turn the ignition switch on andthen off.

The vehicle can be remote startedtwo separate times between drivingsequences. The engine runs for10 minutes after each remote start.Or, the engine run time can beextended another 10 minutes withinthe first 10 minute remote start timeframe, and before the engine stops.

For example, if Q and then / arepressed again after the vehiclehas been running for five minutes,10 minutes are added, allowingthe engine to run for 15 minutes.

The additional 10 minutes areconsidered a second remotevehicle start.


The vehicle must be started withthe key once two remote starts, or asingle remote start with one timeextension has been done.

The vehicle can be started usingthe remote start feature again afterthe key is removed from the ignition.

The vehicle cannot be started usingthe remote start feature if the key isin the ignition, the hood is open, or ifthere is an emission control systemmalfunction.

The engine turns off during a remotestart if the coolant temperature getstoo high or if the oil pressure gets low.

Remote Start ReadyIf the vehicle does not have theremote vehicle start feature, it mayhave the remote start ready feature.This feature allows your dealer/retailer to add the manufacturer’sremote vehicle start feature.

To add the manufacturer’s remotevehicle start feature to the vehicle,see your dealer/retailer.

Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{ CAUTION

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

• Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily openthe doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When adoor is locked, the handlewill not open it. The chanceof being thrown out of thevehicle in a crash is increasedif the doors are not locked.So, all passengers shouldwear safety belts properlyand the doors should belocked whenever the vehicleis driven.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

• Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

• Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopyour vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent thisfrom happening.

To lock or unlock a door, use thekey from the outside or the door lockfrom the inside.


Power Door Locks

T : The power door lock switchesare located on the driver door.

• Press the right side of the switchto unlock the doors.

• Remove the ignition key andpress the left side of the switchto lock all of the doors.

Delayed LockingA chime will sound to indicate adoor or liftgate is open when you tryto lock the doors with the power doorlock switch. The doors will not lock,and the theft-deterrent system willnot arm until all the doors are closedand five seconds have passed.

Automatic Door LockThe doors are programmed toautomatically lock when the shiftlever is moved into a forward gear.

The automatic door lock featurecannot be disabled.

Automatic Door UnlockThe doors will automaticallyunlock when the shift lever ismoved into (P) Park.

Rear Door SecurityLocksThe vehicle has rear door securitylocks to prevent passengers fromopening the rear doors from theinside.

Open the rear doors to access thesecurity locks on the inside edgeof each door.

To set the locks, insert a key intothe slot and turn it to the horizontalposition. The door can only beopened from the outside with thedoor unlocked. To return the doorto normal operation, turn theslot to the vertical position.

Lockout ProtectionWhen the power door lock switch ispressed with the key in the ignition,and any door is open, all the doorslock and the driver door unlocks.When doors are closed with the keyin the ignition, the horn will sound asa reminder.

If the doors are locked with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter, and the key is in theignition, a chime sounds andall except the driver door lock.

The lockout protection feature canbe overridden by holding the powerdoor lock switch for three seconds.


Liftgate

{ CAUTION

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open, orwith any objects that pass throughthe seal between the body andthe trunk/hatch or liftgate.Engine exhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:

• Close all of the windows.• Fully open the air outlets on or

under the instrument panel.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

• Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside airand set the fan speed to thehighest setting. See ClimateControl System in the Index.

• If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 2-28.

To lock or unlock the liftgate, pressthe button on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter twiceor the power door lock switch.

To open the liftgate, pressthe touchpad on the underside ofthe liftgate handle and pull up.

To close the liftgate, pull down usingthe handle and close until it latches.

Liftgate Operation with Loss ofPower

To open the liftgate if the vehicle’sbattery is disconnected or thevoltage is low, access the releaselever. Remove the interior trim coveron the inside of the liftgate. Use atool to push the lever on the latchuntil the liftgate releases.


Windows

{ CAUTION

Leaving children, helpless adults,or pets in a vehicle with thewindows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome bythe extreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Never leave achild, a helpless adult, or a petalone in a vehicle, especially withthe windows closed in warm orhot weather.

Power Windows

{ CAUTION

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe keys is dangerous for manyreasons, children or others couldbe badly injured or even killed.They could operate the powerwindows or other controls oreven make the vehicle move.The windows will function andthey could be seriously injuredor killed if caught in the path of aclosing window. Do not leave keysin a vehicle with children.

When there are children in the rearseat use the window lockout buttonto prevent unintentional operationof the windows.


The window switches for all doorsare located on the driver door.Each door also has a switch.

To open or close a window, pressor pull up on the switch.

The power windows operatewhen the ignition is in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY, or while inRetained Accessory Power (RAP).See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 2-17.

Express-Down WindowThe driver window switch has anexpress-down feature that lowers thewindow without holding the switch.Press the switch part way and thewindow will open a small amount.Press the switch down all the wayand release it and the windowlowers all the way.

To stop the window while it islowering, press and release theswitch.

Window Lockout

o (Window Lockout): The vehiclehas a lockout feature to prevent rearseat passengers from operating thewindows. Press the lockout button,located with the power windowswitches, to turn the feature onand off.

Sun VisorsTo block out glare, swing the sunvisor down, or detach the driver sunvisor from the center mount and slideit along the rod from side-to-side.

On a visor with a mirror, lift thecover to use it.


Theft-DeterrentSystemsVehicle theft is big business,especially in some cities.This vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures, however, they do notmake it impossible to steal.

Content Theft-DeterrentYour vehicle may have a contenttheft-deterrent alarm system.

The security light is located near thecenter of the instrument panel.

To arm the theft-deterrent system,press Q on the RKE transmitterwhen all doors and the hood(vehicles started with the remotestart feature only) are closed.The security light will come on solidfor approximately 30 seconds andthen flashes slowly. If Q on the RKEtransmitter is pressed a second time,the theft-deterrent system willactivate immediately, bypassing the30 second delay. The content theftdeterrent alarm is not armed untilthe security light flashes slowly.

If any door, liftgate or the hood(vehicles started with the remotestart feature only) are openedwithout using the key or pressing Kon the RKE transmitter, the exteriorlamps flash and the horn will soundfor about 30 seconds. If Q or K on

the RKE transmitter is not pressed,the alarm sounds and periodicallyrepeats. If the system does notoperate as described above, seeyour dealer/retailer for service.

The theft-deterrent system alsoactivates if you lock the doorswith a key.

To avoid setting off the alarm byaccident, always unlock a doorwith the RKE transmitter or a key.Unlocking a door any other waywill set off the alarm if the systemhas been armed.

If you set off the alarm by accident,turn off the alarm by pressing Q or Kon the RKE transmitter or by placingthe key in the ignition and turning it toSTART.United States shown,

Canada similar


Testing the AlarmTo test the alarm:

1. From inside the vehicle, lowerthe driver window and openthe driver door.

2. Get out of the vehicle, close thedoor and activate the system bylocking the doors with the RKEtransmitter.

3. Wait for the security light to flashslowly.

4. Then reach in through thewindow, unlock the door withthe manual door lock and openthe door. This should set off thealarm.

If the alarm does not sound when itshould, but the vehicle’s headlampsflash, check to see if the horn works.The horn fuse may be blown.To replace the fuse, see Fuses andCircuit Breakers on page 5-80.

If the alarm does not sound or thevehicle’s headlamps do not flash,see your dealer/retailer for service.

PASS-Key® III+ ElectronicImmobilizerThe PASS-Key III+ systemoperates on a radio frequencysubject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and withIndustry Canada.


1. This device may not causeharmful interference.

2. This device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation.

This device complies with RSS-210of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following twoconditions:



Changes or modifications to thissystem by other than an authorizedservice facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

PASS-Key III+ uses a radiofrequency transponder in the keythat matches a decoder in thevehicle.


PASS-Key® III+ ElectronicImmobilizer OperationThis vehicle has PASS-Key® III+(Personalized Automotive SecuritySystem) theft-deterrent system.PASS-Key® III+ is a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system is automatically armedwhen the key is removed fromthe ignition.

You do not have to manually arm ordisarm the system.

The security light comes on ifthere is a problem with arming ordisarming the theft-deterrent system.

When the PASS-Key® III+ systemsenses that someone is usingthe wrong key, it prevents thevehicle from starting. Anyone usinga trial-and-error method to startthe vehicle will be discouragedbecause of the high numberof electrical key codes.

When trying to start the vehicleif the engine does not start and thesecurity light on the instrument panelcluster comes on, there may be aproblem with your theft-deterrentsystem. Turn the ignition off andtry again.

If the engine still does not start,and the key appears to be notdamaged, wait about five minutesand try another ignition key andcheck the fuse. See Fuses andCircuit Breakers on page 5-80.If the engine still does not start withthe other key, the vehicle needsservice. If the vehicle does start,the first key may be faulty. See yourdealer/retailer who can service thePASS-Key® III+ to have a new keymade. In an emergency, contactRoadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 7-6.

It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+decoder to “learn” the transpondervalue of a new or replacement key.Up to 10 keys may be programmedfor the vehicle. The followingprocedure is for programmingadditional keys only. If all thecurrently programmed keys arelost or do not operate, you must seeyour dealer/retailer or a locksmithwho can service PASS-Key® III+ tohave keys made and programmedto the system.

See your dealer/retailer ora locksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III+ to get a new keyblank that is cut exactly as theignition key that operates the system.


To program the new key:1. Verify that the new key has

a 1 stamped on it.2. Insert the already programmed

key in the ignition and start theengine. If the engine does notstart, see your dealer/retailer forservice.

3. After the engine has started,turn the key to LOCK/OFF,and remove the key.

4. Insert the key to be programmedand turn it to the ON/RUNposition within five seconds ofthe original key being turnedto the LOCK/OFF position.The security light turns off oncethe key has been programmed.

5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4if additional keys are to beprogrammed.

If the PASS-Key® III+ key is lost ordamaged, see your dealer/retailer ora locksmith to have a new key made.Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates the theftdeterrent system in the vehicle.

Starting andOperating YourVehicle

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: The vehicle doesnot need an elaborate break-in.But it will perform better inthe long run if you follow theseguidelines:

• Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 500 miles (805 km).Do not make full-throttlestarts. Avoid downshiftingto brake or slow the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops forthe first 200 miles (322 km) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yet brokenin. Hard stops with new liningscan mean premature wear andearlier replacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brake linings.

• Do not tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See Towing a Traileron page 4-35 for the trailertowing capabilities of yourvehicle and more information.

Following break-in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.


Ignition Positions

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.

To shift out of P (Park), turn theignition to ON/RUN and applythe regular brake pedal.

Notice: Using a tool to force thekey to turn in the ignition couldcause damage to the switch orbreak the key. Use the correct key,make sure it is all the way in, andturn it only with your hand. If thekey cannot be turned by hand,see your dealer/retailer.

LOCK/OFF: This position locks theignition. It also locks the steeringwheel and the transmission. The keycan only be removed in LOCK/OFF.The shift lever must be in P (Park)to turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF.

The steering can bind with thewheels turned off center. If thishappens, move the steering wheelfrom right to left while turning the keyto ACC/ACCESSORY. If this doesn’twork, the vehicle needs service.

ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This isthe position in which you can operatethe electrical accessories or itemsplugged into the accessory poweroutlets.

Use this position if the vehicle mustbe pushed or towed.

ON/RUN: This position can be usedto operate the electrical accessoriesand to display some instrumentpanel cluster warning and indicatorlights. The switch stays in thisposition when the engine is running.The transmission is also unlocked inthis position. If you leave the key inthe ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUNpositions with the engine off, thebattery could be drained. You maynot be able to start the vehicle if thebattery is allowed to drain for anextended period of time.

START: This is the position thatstarts the engine. When the enginestarts, release the key. The ignitionswitch returns to ON/RUN for driving.

A warning tone will sound when thedriver door is opened, the ignition isin ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFFand the key is in the ignition.


Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories may beused for up to 10 minutes after theignition key is turned to the LOCKposition:

• Outside Mirror

• Power Windows

• Sunroof (if equipped)

• Radio

The outside mirror, power windowsand sunroof will function until adoor is opened.

The radio will function until thedriver door is opened.

Starting the EngineMove the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart theengine when the vehicle is alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift toP (Park) if the vehicle is moving.If you do, you could damagethe transmission. Shift to P (Park)only when the vehicle is stopped.

Starting Procedure1. With your foot off the accelerator

pedal, turn the ignition to START.When the engine starts, let go ofthe key. The idle speed will slowdown as the engine warms. Donot race the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyto allow the oil to warm up andlubricate all moving parts.The vehicle has aComputer-ControlledCranking System. This featureassists in starting the engineand protects components.If the ignition key is turned tothe START position, and thenreleased when the engine begins

cranking, the engine will continuecranking for a few seconds oruntil the vehicle starts. If theengine does not start and the keyis held in START, cranking willbe stopped after 15 seconds toprevent cranking motor damage.To prevent gear damage, thissystem also prevents cranking ifthe engine is already running.Engine cranking can be stoppedby turning the ignition switch tothe ACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF position.

Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by returningthe key to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.


2. If the engine does not startafter 5-10 seconds, especially invery cold weather (below 0°F or−18°C), it could be flooded withtoo much gasoline. Try pushingthe accelerator pedal all the wayto the floor and holding it there asyou hold the key in START for upto a maximum of 15 seconds.Wait at least 15 seconds betweeneach try, to allow the crankingmotor to cool down. When theengine starts, let go of the keyand accelerator. If the vehiclestarts briefly but then stops again,repeat these steps. This clearsthe extra gasoline from theengine. Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently until theoil warms up and lubricatesall moving parts.

Notice: The engine is designedto work with the electronics inthe vehicle. If you add electricalparts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engineoperates. Before adding electricalequipment, check with yourdealer/retailer. If you do not,the engine might not performproperly. Any resulting damagewould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Engine Coolant HeaterThe engine coolant heater canprovide easier starting and better fueleconomy during engine warm-up incold weather conditions at or below0°F (−18°C). Vehicles with an enginecoolant heater should be plugged inat least four hours before starting.Some models may have an internalthermostat in the cord which willprevent engine coolant heateroperation at temperatures above0°F (−18°C).

To Use the Engine CoolantHeater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrapthe electrical cord. The enginecoolant heater cord is locatednear the air cleaner box on thepassenger side of the enginecompartment. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 5-12 for more informationon location.

3. Plug the cord into a normal,grounded 110-volt AC outlet.


{ CAUTION

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could causean electrical shock. Also, thewrong kind of extension cordcould overheat and cause a fire.You could be seriously injured.Plug the cord into a properlygrounded three-prong 110-volt ACoutlet. If the cord will not reach,use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store the cordas it was before to keep it awayfrom moving engine parts. If youdo not, it could be damaged.

The length of time the heatershould remain plugged in dependson several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer in the area where you willbe parking the vehicle for the bestadvice on this.

Automatic TransmissionOperation (Uplevel)The shift lever is located on theconsole between the seats.

There are several different positionsfor the automatic transmission.

P (Park): This position locks thefront wheels. It is the best positionto use when starting the enginebecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily.

{ CAUTION

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle whenthe engine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park (AutomaticTransmission) on page 2-25. Ifyou are pulling a trailer, seeTowing a Trailer on page 4-35.

Make sure the shift lever isfully in P (Park) before startingthe engine. The vehicle hasan automatic transmissionshift lock control system.


The regular brakes must be appliedfirst and then the shift lever buttonpressed before you can shift fromP (Park) when the ignition key is inON/RUN. If you cannot shift out ofP (Park), ease pressure on the shiftlever and push the shift lever all theway into P (Park) as you maintainbrake application. Then press theshift lever button and move the shiftlever into another gear. See ShiftingOut of Park on page 2-27.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse)only after the vehicle is stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see IfYour Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,Ice, or Snow on page 4-27.

N (Neutral): In this position,the engine does not connect withthe wheels. To restart the enginewhen the vehicle is already moving,use N (Neutral) only. Also, useN (Neutral) when the vehicle isbeing towed.

{ CAUTION

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park)or N (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving with the automatictransmission. It provides the bestfuel economy. If you need morepower for passing, and you are:

• Going less than about 35 mph(55 km/h), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h),push the accelerator all theway down.

Downshifting the transmission inslippery road conditions could resultin skidding, see “Skidding” underLoss of Control on page 4-12.

Notice: Spinning the tiresor holding the vehicle in oneplace on a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damagethe transmission. The repair willnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. If you are stuck, do notspin the tires. When stopping ona hill, use the brakes to hold thevehicle in place.


Manual Shift Mode (MSM)(Automatic Transmission)To use this feature, do the following:

1. Move the shift lever fromD (Drive) to the left into themanual gate.While driving in manualshift mode, the transmissionwill remain in the driver gearselected. When coming to astop in the manual position,the vehicle will automaticallyshift to 1 (First) gear.

2. Push the shift lever forwardtoward the plus (+) to upshift orrearward toward the minus (−) todownshift. The instrument panelwill display the actual gearselected.

In manual shift mode all six forwardgears can be selected.

While using the MSM feature thevehicle will have operation similar toa manual transmission. You can usethis for sport driving or when drivinghilly roads to stay in gear longer or todownshift for more power or enginebraking.

The transmission will only allow youto shift into gears appropriate forthe vehicle speed:

• The transmission will notautomatically shift to the nexthigher gear without movingthe shift lever.

• The transmission will not allowshifting to the next lower gearif the vehicle speed is too high.

If the vehicle does not respond to agear change, or detects a problemwith the transmission, the range ofgears may be reduced and theMalfunction Indicator Lamp will comeon. See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 3-35.

2 (Second) and 3 (Third) GearStart FeatureWhen accelerating the vehicle froma stop in snowy and icy conditions,you may want to select 2 (Second)and 3 (Third) gear. A higher gear,and light application of the gas pedal,may allow you to gain more tractionon slippery surfaces.

With the Manual Shift Mode, thevehicle can accelerate from a stopin 2 (Second) or 3 (Third).

1. Move the shift lever fromD (Drive) into the manual gate.

2. With the vehicle stopped,move the shift lever forward toselect 2 (Second) or 3 (Third).The vehicle will start from astop position in 2 (Second)or 3 (Third).

3. Once the vehicle is movingselect the desired drive gearor move the shift lever tothe D (Drive) position.


Automatic TransmissionOperation (Base)The shift lever is located on theconsole between the seats.

There are several different positionsfor the automatic transmission.

P (Park): This position locks thefront wheels. It is the best positionto use when you start the enginebecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily.

{ CAUTION

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless you haveto. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, always set theparking brake and move the shiftlever to P (Park). See Shifting IntoPark (Automatic Transmission) onpage 2-25. If you are pulling atrailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 4-35.

Make sure the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting the engine.The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. You have to fully apply the

regular brakes first and then pressthe shift lever button before you canshift from P (Park) when the ignitionkey is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shiftout of P (Park), ease pressure on theshift lever and push the shift lever allthe way into P (Park) as you maintainbrake application. Then press theshift lever button and move the shiftlever into another gear. See ShiftingOut of Park on page 2-27.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse)only after the vehicle is stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forthto get out of snow, ice or sandwithout damaging the transmission,see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 4-27.


N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect withthe wheels. To restart the enginewhen the vehicle is already moving,use N (Neutral) only. Also, useN (Neutral) when the vehicleis being towed.

{ CAUTION

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shift intoa drive gear while the engine isrunning at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park)or N (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving with the automatictransmission. It provides the bestfuel economy. If you need morepower for passing, and you are:

• Going less than about 35 mph(55 km/h), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h),push the accelerator all theway down.

Downshifting the transmission inslippery road conditions could resultin skidding, see “Skidding” underLoss of Control on page 4-12.

M (Manual): This position allowsyou to change gears similar to amanual transmission. If the vehiclehas this feature, see ManualShift Mode.

Notice: Spinning the tiresor holding the vehicle in oneplace on a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damagethe transmission. The repair willnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. If you are stuck, do notspin the tires. When stopping ona hill, use the brakes to hold thevehicle in place.


Manual Shift Mode (MSM)(Automatic Transmission)To use this feature, do the following:

1. Move the shift lever fromD (Drive) rearward to M (Manual).The six-speed transmission willdownshift to a lower gear and theinstrument panel will display thegear range selected. If equippedwith a 4-speed transmission it willdisplay a 3 for third gear range.When coming to a stop inthe manual position, the vehiclewill automatically shift to1 (First) gear.

2. Press the plus (+) button toupshift or the minus (−) buttonto downshift.

While using the MSM featurethe vehicle will have sportierperformance. You can use thiswhen driving hilly roads to stayin gear longer or to downshift formore power or engine braking.

The transmission will only allow youto shift into a gear range appropriatefor the vehicle speed.

• The transmission will notautomatically shift to the nexthigher gear range withoutpressing the button on theshifter handle.

• The transmission will not allowshifting to the next lower gear ifthe vehicle speed is too high.

If the vehicle does not respondto a gear change, or detects aproblem with the transmission, therange of gears may be reduced andthe Malfunction Indicator Lamp willcome on. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 3-35.

Parking Brake

The parking brake lever is locatedin the center console betweenthe front seats.

To set the parking brake, hold thebrake pedal down and pull up on theparking brake lever. If the ignitionis in ON/RUN, the brake systemwarning light will come on.


To release the parking brake,hold the brake pedal down. Pull theparking brake lever up until you canpress the release button. Hold therelease button in as you move thebrake lever all the way down.

Release the parking brake beforedriving the vehicle.

Notice: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat the brakesystem and cause premature wearor damage to brake system parts.Make sure that the parking brakeis fully released and the brakewarning light is off before driving.

Shifting Into Park(Automatic Transmission)

{ CAUTION

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow. If you are pulling atrailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 4-35.

To shift into P (Park):

1. Hold the brake pedal downand set the parking brake.See Parking Brake on page 2-24for more information.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)by holding in the button on theshift lever and pushing the leverall the way toward the front of thevehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.


Leaving the Vehicle Withthe Engine Running(Automatic Transmission)

{ CAUTION

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, itcould overheat and even catch fire.You or others could be injured.Do not leave the vehicle with theengine running.

If you have to leave an automatictransmission vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure the vehicle is inP (Park) and the parking brake isfirmly set before you leave it. Afteryou have moved the shift lever intoP (Park), hold the brake pedal down.Then, see if you can move the shiftlever away from P (Park) without firstpushing the button. If you can, itmeans that the shift lever was notfully locked into P (Park).

Torque Lock(Automatic Transmission)If you are parking on a hill and youdo not shift into P (Park) properly,the weight of the vehicle may put toomuch force on the parking pawl inthe transmission. You may find itdifficult to pull the shift lever out ofP (Park). This is called “torque lock.”

To prevent torque lock, set theparking brake and then shift intoP (Park) properly before you leavethe driver seat. To find out how,see Shifting Into Park (AutomaticTransmission) on page 2-25.

Move the shift lever out of P (Park)before you release the parkingbrake.

If torque lock does occur, you mayneed to have another vehicle pushyours a little uphill to take some ofthe pressure from the parking pawl inthe transmission, so you can pull theshift lever out of P (Park).


Shifting Out of ParkThe vehicle has an electronic shiftlock release system. The shiftlock release is designed to:

• Prevent ignition key removalunless the shift lever is inP (Park) with the shift leverbutton fully released.

• Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park), unlessthe ignition is in ON/RUN and theregular brake pedal is applied.

The shift lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case ofan uncharged or low voltage(less than 9 volt) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting onpage 5-31 for more information.

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Press the shift lever button.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still are unable to shift out ofP (Park):

1. Fully release the shift leverbutton.

2. Hold the brake pedal down andpress the shift lever button again.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still cannot move the shiftlever from P (Park), consult yourdealer/retailer or a professionaltowing service.

Parking Over ThingsThat Burn

{ CAUTION

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.


Engine Exhaust

{ CAUTION

Engine exhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:• The vehicle idles in areas

with poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

• The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

• The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

• The vehicle’s exhaust systemhas been modified, damagedor improperly repaired.

• There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or after-marketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

• Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

• Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.

Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running. But if you ever haveto, here are some things to know.

{ CAUTION

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains Carbon Monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation.For more information, see EngineExhaust on page 2-28.


{ CAUTION

It can be dangerous to get outof the vehicle if the automatictransmission shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.Do not leave the vehicle whenthe engine is running unless youhave to. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, always set theparking brake and move the shiftlever to P (Park).

Follow the proper steps to besure the vehicle will not move.See Shifting Into Park (AutomaticTransmission) on page 2-25.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Towing a Traileron page 4-35.

MirrorsManual Rearview MirrorIf the vehicle has the manualrearview mirror, it can be adjustedby holding the mirror in the centerto move it for a clearer view behindyour vehicle. Reduce the glare ofheadlamps from behind by pushingthe lever forward or pulling it backfor daytime/nighttime use.

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorThe vehicle may have an automaticdimming inside rearview mirror.

Vehicles with OnStar® have threeadditional control buttons for theOnStar® system. See your dealer/retailer for more information aboutOnStar® and how to subscribe to it.See OnStar® System on page 2-33for more information about theservices OnStar® provides.

O (On/Off): Press to turn thedimming feature on or off.

Your vehicle may also have a RearVision Camera. See Rear VisionCamera (RVC) on page 2-31for more information.

Automatic Dimming MirrorOperationThe automatic dimming mirrorreduces the glare from theheadlamps of the vehicle behind you.The dimming feature comes on andthe indicator light illuminates eachtime the ignition is turned to start.

Outside Power Mirrors

Controls for the outside powermirrors are located on the driver door.


To adjust the power mirrors:

1. Turn the knob to choose theleft (L) or the (R) right mirror.

2. Adjust each mirror so that youcan see the side of your vehicleand the area behind your vehicle.

3. Return the control to the centerposition so the mirror cannot bemoved.

The mirrors can be manually foldedinward toward the vehicle. Return tothe original position to use correctly.

Outside Convex Mirror

{ CAUTION

A convex mirror can make things(like other vehicles) look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror’s surfaceis curved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.

Outside Heated MirrorsFor vehicles with outside heatedmirrors:

= (Rear Window Defogger):Press to heat the outside rearviewmirrors. See “Rear WindowDefogger” under Automatic ClimateControl System on page 3-20 formore information.


Object DetectionSystems

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)The vehicle may have a Rear VisionCamera system. Read this entiresection before using it.

{ CAUTION

The Rear Vision Camera (RVC)system does not replace drivervision. RVC does not:

• Detect objects that areoutside the camera’s fieldof view, below the bumper,or underneath the vehicle.

• Detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or pets.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

Do not back the vehicle by onlylooking at the rear vision camerascreen, or use the screen duringlonger, higher speed backingmaneuvers or where there couldbe cross-traffic. Your judgeddistances using the screen willdiffer from actual distances.So if you do not use proper carebefore backing up, you could hit avehicle, child, pedestrian, bicyclist,or pet, resulting in vehicle damage,injury, or death. Even though thevehicle has the RVC system,always check carefully beforebacking up by checking behindand around the vehicle.

The rear vision camera system isdesigned to help the driver whenbacking up by displaying a view ofthe area behind the vehicle.

When the key is in the ON/RUNposition and the driver shifts thevehicle into R (Reverse), the videoimage automatically appears on theinside rear view mirror. Once thedriver shifts out of R (Reverse),the video image automaticallydisappears from the inside rearview mirror.

Turning the Rear Vision CameraSystem Off or On

To turn off the rear vision camerasystem, press and hold z, locatedon the inside rearview mirror, untilthe left indicator light turns off.The rear vision camera displayis now disabled.

To turn the rear vision camerasystem on again, press andhold z until the left indicator lightilluminates. The rear vision camerasystem display is now enabled andthe display will appear in the mirrornormally.


Rear Vision Camera LocationThe camera is located in therear of the vehicle.

The area displayed by thecamera is limited and does notdisplay objects that are close toeither corner or under the bumper.The area displayed can varydepending on vehicle orientation orroad conditions. The distance of theimage that appears on the screendiffers from the actual distance.

The following illustration showsthe field of view that the cameraprovides.

A. View displayed by the camera.B. Corner of the rear bumper.

When the System Does NotSeem To Work ProperlyThe rear vision camera systemmight not work properly or displaya clear image if:

• The RVC is turned off.See “Turning the RearCamera System On or Off”earlier in this section.

• It is dark.

• The sun or the beam ofheadlights is shining directlyinto the camera lens.

• Ice, snow, mud, or anything elsebuilds up on the camera lens.Clean the lens, rinse it with water,and wipe it with a soft cloth.


• The back of the vehicle is inan accident, the position andmounting angle of the cameracan change or the camera canbe affected. Be sure to have thecamera and its position andmounting angle checked at yourdealer/retailer.

• There are extreme temperaturechanges.

The rear vision camera systemdisplay in the rearview mirror mayturn off or not appear as expecteddue to one of the followingconditions. If this occurs the leftindicator light on the mirror will flash.

• A slow flash may indicate a loss ofvideo signal, or no video signalpresent during the reverse cycle.

• A fast flash may indicate thatthe display has been on for themaximum allowable time during areverse cycle, or the display hasreached an Over Temperaturelimit.The fast flash conditions are usedto protect the video device fromhigh temperature conditions.Once conditions return to normalthe device will reset and the greenindicator will stop flashing.

During any of these fault conditions,the display will be blank and theindicator will continue to flash as longas the vehicle is in R (Reverse) oruntil the conditions return to normal.

Pressing and holding z when theleft indicator light is flashing will turnoff the video display along withthe left indicator light.

OnStar® System

OnStar uses several innovativetechnologies and live advisors toprovide a wide range of safety,security, information, andconvenience services. If the airbagsdeploy, the system is designed tomake an automatic call to OnStarEmergency advisors who canrequest emergency services be sentto your location. If the keys arelocked in the vehicle, call OnStar at1-888-4-ONSTAR to have a signalsent to unlock the doors. OnStarHands-Free Calling, including30 trial minutes good for 60 days, isavailable on most vehicles. OnStarTurn-by-Turn Navigation service,with one trial route, is available onmost vehicles. Press the OnStarbutton to have an OnStar advisorcontact Roadside Service.


OnStar service is provided subjectto the OnStar Terms and Conditionsincluded in the OnStar Subscriberglove box literature.

Some services such as RemoteDoor Unlock or Stolen VehicleLocation Assistance may not beavailable until the owner of thevehicle registers with OnStar.After the first prepaid year, contactOnStar to select a monthly orannual subscription payment plan.If a payment plan is not selected,the OnStar system and all services,including airbag notification andemergency services, may bedeactivated and no longer available.For more information visit onstar.com(U.S.) or onstar.ca (Canada), orpress the OnStar button to speakwith an advisor.

Not all OnStar services areavailable on all vehicles. To checkif this vehicle is able to provide theservices described below, or for a fulldescription of OnStar services andsystem limitations, see the OnStarOwner’s Guide in the glove box orvisit onstar.com (U.S.) or onstar.ca(Canada), contact OnStar at1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827)or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or pressthe OnStar button to speak withan OnStar advisor 24 hours a day,7 days a week.

OnStar Services Availablewith the Safe & Sound Plan• Automatic Notification of

Airbag Deployment

• Advanced Automatic CrashNotification (AACN) (If equipped)

• Link to Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle LocationAssistance

• Remote Door Unlock/VehicleAlert

• OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email

• GM Goodwrench On DemandDiagnostics

• OnStar Hands-Free Calling with30 trial minutes

• OnStar Virtual Advisor(U.S. Only)


OnStar Services Included withDirections & Connections Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan Services

• OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation(If equipped) or DrivingDirections - Advisor delivered

• RideAssist

• Information and ConvenienceServices

OnStar Hands-Free CallingOnStar Hands-Free Calling allowseligible OnStar subscribers tomake and receive calls using voicecommands. Hands-Free Calling isfully integrated into the vehicle, andcan be used with OnStar Pre-PaidMinute Packages. Most vehiclesinclude 30 trial minutes good for60 days. Hands-Free Callingcan also be linked to a VerizonWireless service plan in the U.S. ora Bell Mobility service plan inCanada, depending on eligibility.

To find out more, refer to the OnStarOwner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glovebox, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, orspeak with an OnStar advisor bypressing the OnStar button or calling1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).

OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigationVehicles with the OnStarTurn-by-Turn Navigation systemcan provide voice-guided drivingdirections. Press the OnStar buttonto have an OnStar advisor locate abusiness or address and downloaddriving directions to the vehicle.Voice-guided directions to thedesired destination will play throughthe audio system speakers. See theOnStar Owner’s Guide for moreinformation.

OnStar Virtual AdvisorOnStar Virtual Advisor is a featureof OnStar Hands-Free Callingthat uses minutes to accesslocation-based weather, local trafficreports, and stock quotes. Press thephone button and give a few simplevoice commands to browse throughthe various topics. See the OnStarOwner’s Guide for more information.This feature is only available in thecontinental U.S.

OnStar Steering WheelControlsThis vehicle may have a Talk/Mutebutton that can be used to interactwith OnStar Hands-Free Calling.See Audio Steering Wheel Controlson page 3-92 for more information.

OnStar voice command does notwork unless Personal Calling isactivated. To activate PersonalCalling, see the OnStar Owner’sGuide.


On some vehicles, the mute buttoncan be used to dial numbers intovoice mail systems, or to dial phoneextensions. See the OnStar Owner’sGuide for more information.

How OnStar Service WorksThe OnStar system can recordand transmit vehicle information.This information is automaticallysent to an OnStar Call Center whenthe OnStar button is pressed, theemergency button is pressed, or ifthe airbags or AACN system deploy.This information usually includesthe vehicle’s GPS location and,in the event of a crash, additionalinformation regarding the crash thatthe vehicle was involved in (e.g. thedirection from which the vehicle washit). When the Virtual Advisor featureof OnStar Hands-Free Calling isused, the vehicle also sends OnStarthe vehicle’s GPS location so theycan provide services where it islocated.

OnStar service cannot workunless the vehicle is in a placewhere OnStar has an agreementwith a wireless service provider forservice in that area. OnStar servicealso cannot work unless the vehicleis in a place where the wirelessservice provider OnStar has hiredfor that area has coverage, networkcapacity and reception when theservice is needed, and technologythat is compatible with the OnStarservice. Not all services are availableeverywhere, particularly in remoteor enclosed areas, or at all times.

Location information about thevehicle is only available if the GPSsatellite signals are unobstructedand available.

The vehicle must have a workingelectrical system, including adequatebattery power, for the OnStarequipment to operate. There are

other problems OnStar cannotcontrol that may prevent OnStarfrom providing OnStar service atany particular time or place. Someexamples are damage to importantparts of the vehicle in a crash, hills,tall buildings, tunnels, weather orwireless phone network congestion.

Your Responsibility

Increase the volume of the radio ifthe OnStar advisor cannot be heard.If the light next to the OnStar buttonsis red, the system may not befunctioning properly. Press theOnStar button and request a vehiclediagnostic. If the light appears clear(no light is appearing), your OnStarsubscription has expired and allservices have been deactivated.Press the OnStar button to confirmthat the OnStar equipment is active.


Universal HomeRemote SystemThe Universal Home RemoteSystem provides a way toreplace up to three hand-heldRadio-Frequency (RF) transmittersused to activate devices suchas garage door openers, securitysystems, and home lighting.




This device complies with RSS-210of Industry Canada. Operationis subject to the following twoconditions:




Universal Home RemoteSystem Operation

If there is one triangular LightEmitting Diode (LED) indicator lightabove the Universal Home Remotebuttons, follow the instructionsbelow.

This system provides a way toreplace up to three remote controltransmitters used to activate devicessuch as garage door openers,security systems, and homeautomation devices.


Do not use the Universal HomeRemote with any garage dooropener that does not have the stopand reverse feature. This includesany garage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read the instructions completelybefore attempting to program theUniversal Home Remote. Because ofthe steps involved, it may be helpfulto have another person available toassist you in the programming theUniversal Home Remote.

Keep the original hand-heldtransmitter for use in other vehiclesas well as for future Universal HomeRemote programming. It is alsorecommended that upon the saleof the vehicle, the programmedUniversal Home Remote buttonsshould be erased for securitypurposes. See “Erasing UniversalHome Remote Buttons” later in thissection.

When programming a garagedoor, park outside of the garage.Park directly in line with and facingthe garage door opener motor-heador gate motor-head. Be sure thatpeople and objects are clear of thegarage door or gate that is beingprogrammed.

It is recommended that a newbattery be installed in your hand-heldtransmitter for quicker and moreaccurate transmission of theradio-frequency signal.

Programming the UniversalHome Remote SystemFor questions or help programmingthe Universal Home Remote System,call 1-800-355-3515 or go tohomelink.com.

Programming a garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions, soread the entire procedure beforestarting. Otherwise, the device willtime out and the procedure will haveto be repeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. From inside the vehicle, pressand hold down the two outsidebuttons at the same time,releasing only when the UniversalHome Remote indicator lightbegins to flash, after 20 seconds.This step will erase the factorysettings or all previouslyprogrammed buttons.Do not hold down the buttons forlonger than 30 seconds and donot repeat this step to programthe remaining two UniversalHome Remote buttons.


2. Hold the end of your hand-heldtransmitter about 1 to 3 inches(3 to 8 cm) away from theUniversal Home Remote buttonswhile keeping the indicator light inview. The hand-held transmitterwas supplied by the manufacturerof your garage door openerreceiver (motor head unit).

3. At the same time, press and holdboth the Universal Home Remotebutton to be used to control thegarage door and the hand-heldtransmitter button. Do not releasethe Universal Home Remotebutton or the hand-heldtransmitter button until Step 4has been completed.Some entry gates andgarage door openers mayrequire substitution of Step 3with the procedure noted in“Gate Operator and CanadianProgramming” later in thissection.

4. The indicator light on theUniversal Home Remote willflash slowly at first and thenrapidly after Universal HomeRemote successfully receivesthe frequency signal from thehand-held transmitter. Releaseboth buttons.

5. Press and hold the newly-trainedUniversal Home Remote buttonand observe the indicator light.If the indicator light stays oncontinuously, the programming iscomplete and the garage doorshould move when the UniversalHome Remote button is pressedand released. There is no need tocontinue programming Steps 6through 8.If the Universal Home Remoteindicator light blinks rapidlyfor two seconds and then turnsto a constant light, continuewith the programming Steps 6through 8.

It may be helpful to have anotherperson assist with the remainingsteps.

6. After Steps 1 through 5 havebeen completed, locate insidethe garage the garage dooropener receiver (motor-headunit). Locate the “Learn” or“Smart” button. The name andcolor of the button may varyby manufacturer.


7. Firmly press and release the“Learn” or “Smart” button.After you press this button,you will have 30 secondsto complete Step 8.

8. Immediately return to the vehicle.Firmly press and hold theUniversal Home Remote button,chosen in Step 3 to control thegarage door, for two seconds,and then release it. If the garagedoor does not move, press andhold the same button a secondtime for two seconds, and thenrelease it. Again, if the door doesnot move, press and hold thesame button a third time fortwo seconds, and then release.The Universal Home Remoteshould now activate thegarage door.

To program the remaining twoUniversal Home Remote buttons,begin with Step 2 of “Programmingthe Universal Home RemoteSystem.” Do not repeat Step 1,

as this will erase all previousprogramming from the UniversalHome Remote buttons.

Gate Operator and CanadianProgrammingIf you have questions or needhelp programming the UniversalHome Remote System, call1-800-355-3515 or go tohomelink.com.

Canadian radio-frequency lawsrequire transmitter signals to timeout or quit after several secondsof transmission. This may not belong enough for Universal HomeRemote to pick up the signal duringprogramming. Similarly, some U.S.gate operators are manufactured totime out in the same manner.

If you live in Canada, or you arehaving difficulty programming agate operator or garage door openerby using the “Programming UniversalHome Remote” procedures,

regardless of where you live,replace Step 3 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” with thefollowing:

Continue to press and hold theUniversal Home Remote buttonwhile you press and release everytwo seconds (cycle) the hand-heldtransmitter button until the frequencysignal has been successfullyaccepted by the Universal HomeRemote. The Universal HomeRemote indicator light will flashslowly at first and then rapidly.Proceed with Step 4 under“Programming Universal HomeRemote” to complete.

Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriateUniversal Home Remote button for atleast half of a second. The indicatorlight will come on while the signal isbeing transmitted.


Erasing Universal HomeRemote ButtonsThe programmed buttons shouldbe erased when the vehicle is soldor the lease ends.

To erase all programmed buttons onthe Universal Home Remote device:

1. Press and hold down thetwo outside buttons until theindicator light begins to flash,after 20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

Reprogramming a SingleUniversal Home RemoteButtonTo reprogram any of the threeUniversal Home Remote buttons,repeat the programming instructionsearlier in this section, beginningwith Step 2.

For help or information on theUniversal Home Remote System,call the customer assistance phonenumber under Customer AssistanceOffices on page 7-5.

Storage Areas

Glove BoxTo open the glove box, lift up onthe lever. If the glove box has a lockuse the key to lock and unlock it.The glove box divider can beremoved. The slots on the left sideare for storing the divider.

CupholdersThere are cupholders located in frontof and behind the center console.

To access the cupholders behindthe center console, push the button.


Instrument Panel StorageYour vehicle has a storage arealocated to left of the steering wheel.Pull down on the handle to access.

Sunglasses StorageCompartmentYour vehicle may have asunglasses storage compartmentlocated near the rearview mirror.Push the cover to open.

Front Storage Area

For vehicles with a storage arealocated under the front passengerseat, lift up on the end of thetray and pull it forward to access it.

Center Console Storage

Your vehicle has a center consolewith an upper, lower and rearstorage area. To access the upperstorage area, lift up on the toplever. To access the lower storagearea, lift up on the bottom lever.The top of the center console canextend forward. To adjust, holdthe top of the lever up and pull thetop of the center console forward.


To open the cover of the rearstorage area, push the buttonlocated at the top.

Luggage Carrier

{ CAUTION

If something is carried on topof the vehicle that is longeror wider than the luggagecarrier — like paneling, plywood,or a mattress — the wind cancatch it while the vehicle is beingdriven. This can cause a driver tolose control. The item beingcarried could be violently torn off,and this could cause a collision,and damage the vehicle. Itemsmay be carried inside. Never carrysomething longer or wider thanthe luggage carrier on top of thevehicle.

If your vehicle has a luggage carrier,items can be loaded onto the top ofthe vehicle. Crossrails may bepurchased at your dealer/retailer.

Notice: Loading cargo on theluggage carrier that weighs morethan 200 lbs (91 kg) or hangsover the rear or sides of thevehicle can damage the vehicle.Load cargo so that it rests asfar forward as possible andagainst the side rails, makingsure to fasten it securely.

Do not exceed the maximum vehiclecapacity when loading your vehicle.For more information on vehiclecapacity and loading, see Loadingthe Vehicle on page 4-28.

Check that all cargo is securelyfastened to prevent damage or losswhile driving.


Rear Seat Armrest

To access the rear seat armrest, pullthe handle down. Lift the top of thearmrest to access the storage area.

Convenience NetUse the convenience net, located inthe rear, to store small loads as farforward as possible. The net shouldnot be used to store heavy loads.

Cargo CoverFor vehicles with a cargo cover, useit to cover items in the rear of thevehicle.

To remove the cover and removeit from the vehicle, pull both endstoward each other. To reinstall, placeeach end of the cover in the holesbehind the rear seat.

Cargo Tie DownsFour cargo tie-downs are located inthe rear compartment of the vehicle.The tie-downs can be used to securesmall loads.

Cargo ManagementSystemIf the vehicle has a cargomanagement system in the rear ofthe vehicle, it will have rails withadapters and hooks. These are usedto hold the net and mesh pocket.

The adapters are used to holdthe net. Slide the adapters to thedesired location on the upper andlower rail and turn the handle up tolock it in place. Compress the rodsof the net and insert them into thecorresponding openings of theadapter. The longer rod is for theupper adapter.

The hooks hold the mesh pocket.To insert a hook on the rail, place thehook in the upper groove of the railand press it into the lower groove.


Sunroof

The sunroof switch is locatedbetween the sun visors.

To operate the sunroof, theignition must be in ON/RUN,ACC/ACCESSORY, or in RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 2-17.

Open/Close: Slide and release theswitch rearward to express openthe sunroof. Slide the switch forwardor rearward to stop movement.

The sun shade opens automaticallywith the sunroof or can be manuallyoperated. The sunshade cannot beclosed with the sunroof open.

Slide and hold the switch forward toclose the sunroof. The sunshademust be closed manually.

Vent Open/Close: Press andhold the switch to vent the sunroof.Pull and hold the switch to close it.The sunshade must be manuallyoperated when the sunroof is in thevent position.


✍ NOTES


Instrument Panel

Instrument Panel OverviewInstrument Panel Overview .....3-4Hazard Warning Flashers .......3-5Horn ....................................3-5Tilt Wheel ............................3-6Turn Signal/MultifunctionLever .................................3-6

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals ...............................3-6

Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger .............................3-7

Flash-to-Pass ........................3-7Windshield Wipers .................3-7Rainsense™ II Wipers ...........3-8Windshield Washer ................3-8Rear Window Wiper/Washer ....3-9Cruise Control ......................3-9Exterior Lamps ....................3-12Wiper ActivatedHeadlamps ........................3-12

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) ....................3-13

Automatic HeadlampSystem .............................3-13

Fog Lamps .........................3-14Instrument PanelBrightness .........................3-14

Dome Lamp ........................3-14Entry Lighting ......................3-14Reading Lamps ...................3-15Electric PowerManagement .....................3-15

Battery Run-DownProtection .........................3-16

Accessory Power Outlet(s) ....3-16

Climate ControlsClimate Control System ........3-17Automatic ClimateControl System ..................3-20

Outlet Adjustment ................3-24Passenger CompartmentAir Filter ...........................3-24

Warning Lights, Gages,and IndicatorsWarning Lights, Gages,and Indicators ...................3-26

Instrument Panel Cluster .......3-27Speedometer andOdometer .........................3-28

Trip Odometer .....................3-28Tachometer ........................3-28Safety Belt Reminders ..........3-28Airbag Readiness Light .........3-29Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator .................3-30

Charging System Light .........3-31Brake SystemWarning Light ....................3-31

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light ...........3-32

Power SteeringWarning Lights ..................3-33

Traction Control System(TCS) Warning Light ...........3-33

StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ....3-33

Instrument Panel 3-1

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light ....................3-34

Tire Pressure Light ..............3-34MalfunctionIndicator Lamp ..................3-35

Oil Pressure Light ................3-37Change Engine Oil Light .......3-38Security Light ......................3-38Fog Lamp Light ...................3-38Cruise Control Light .............3-38Reduced EnginePower Light ......................3-39

Highbeam On Light ..............3-39Daytime Running Lamps(DRL) Indicator Light ..........3-39

Low Washer FluidWarning Light ....................3-40

All-Wheel DriveDisabled Light ...................3-40

Gate Ajar Light ....................3-40Door Ajar Light ....................3-40Service Vehicle Soon Light .....3-40Fuel Gage ..........................3-41Low Fuel Warning Light ........3-41

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)Driver InformationCenter (DIC) .....................3-42

DIC Operation and Displays ...3-42DIC Compass .....................3-47DIC Warnings andMessages .........................3-49

DIC Vehicle Customization .....3-57

Audio System(s)Audio System(s) ..................3-64Setting the Clock .................3-65Radio(s) .............................3-67Using an MP3 .....................3-75XM Radio Messages ............3-79Navigation/Radio System ......3-81Bluetooth® ..........................3-81Theft-Deterrent Feature ........3-91Audio Steering WheelControls ............................3-92

Radio Reception ..................3-92Fixed Mast Antenna .............3-93XM™ Satellite RadioAntenna System ................3-93

Chime Level Adjustment .......3-93

3-2 Instrument Panel

✍ NOTES


Instrument Panel Overview


The main components of theinstrument panel are the following:A. Outlet Adjustment on

page 3-24.B. Instrument Panel Brightness on

page 3-14.C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

on page 3-6.D. Instrument Panel Cluster on

page 3-27.E. Windshield Wipers on page 3-7.F. Audio System(s) on page 3-64.G. Auxiliary Input Jack.

See Radio(s) on page 3-67.H. Fog Lamps on page 3-14.

Exterior Lamps on page 3-12.I. Driver Information Center (DIC)

on page 3-42.J. Instrument Panel Storage on

page 2-42.K. Hood Release on page 5-11.L. Cruise Control on page 3-9.M. Tilt Wheel on page 3-6.

N. Horn on page 3-5.O. Audio Steering Wheel Controls

on page 3-92.P. Rear Window Wiper/Washer on

page 3-9.Q. Traction Control System (TCS)

on page 4-8.R. Shift Lever. See Automatic

Transmission Operation(Uplevel) on page 2-19 orAutomatic TransmissionOperation (Base) on page 2-22.

S. Climate Control System onpage 3-17 or Automatic ClimateControl System on page 3-20(If Equipped).

T. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 3-5.

U. Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 3-30.

V. Safety Belt Reminders onpage 3-28.

W. Glove Box on page 2-41.

Hazard Warning Flashers

| (Hazard Warning Flasher):Press this button located on theinstrument panel, to make the frontand rear turn signal lamps flash onand off. This warns others that youare having trouble.

Press | again to turn theflashers off.

HornPress near or on the horn symbolson the steering wheel pad to soundthe horn.


Tilt WheelThe tilt lever lets the steering wheelbe adjusted.

The tilt lever is located on the leftside of the steering column.

To adjust the steering wheel,hold the wheel and push the leverdown. Then move the wheel toa comfortable position and pull thelever up firmly to lock the steeringcolumn in place.

Turn Signal/MultifunctionLever

The lever on the left side of thesteering column includes:

G : Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

Flash-to-Pass Feature.

Information for these features is onthe pages following.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

An arrow on the instrument panelcluster flashes in the direction ofthe turn or lane change.

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever untilthe arrow starts to flash and thenrelease, to signal a lane change.The turn signal flashes automaticallythree times.

The lever returns to its startingposition whenever it is released.

If after signaling a turn or lanechange the arrow flashes rapidly ordoes not come on, a signal bulbmay be burned out.


Have the bulbs replaced. If a bulbis not burned out, check the fuse.See Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 5-80 and for burned-out bulbs.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

23 Headlamp High/Low BeamChanger: Push the turn signal/multifunction lever away from youto turn the high beams on.

Pull the lever towards you to return tolow beams.

This indicator light turns on in theinstrument panel cluster when thehigh beam headlamps are on.

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use yourhigh-beam headlamps to signal adriver in front of you that you wantto pass.

To flash the high beams fromlow beam, pull the turn signal/multifunction lever all the waytowards you. Then release it.

Windshield Wipers

The windshield wiper lever islocated on the right side of thesteering column.

Push up or pull down on the leverto place it in one of the followingpositions.

8 (Mist): For a single wipingcycle. The lever returns to itsstarting position when released.For more cycles, hold the leverdown before releasing it.

9 (Off): Turns the wipers off.

& (Intermittent): Sets a delaybetween wipes. To set for a shorteror longer delay between wipes,move the switch on top of thelever left or right to decreaseor increase wiper movement.

a (Low): For slow, steady wipingcycles.

1 (High): For rapid wiping cycles.

Clear ice and snow from thewiper blades before using them.If the wiper blades are frozento the windshield, gentlyloosen or thaw them.


If they become damaged, installnew blades or blade inserts.See Windshield Wiper BladeReplacement on page 5-42.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor. A circuit breaker willstop the motor until it cools down.

Rainsense™ II WipersFor vehicles with Rainsense™ IIwindshield wipers, the moisturesensor is located next to the insiderearview mirror and is mountedon the windshield. When active,these sensors are able to detectmoisture on the windshield andautomatically turn on the wipers.

To turn on the Rainsense feature,the wipers must be set to oneof the five delay settings on themultifunction lever. Each of thefive settings adjusts the sensitivityof the sensor.

Since different drivers havedifferent setting preferences, it isrecommended that the mid-rangesetting (position 3) be used initially.For more wipes, select the highersettings; for fewer wipes, select thelower settings located closer to theoff position on the multifunction lever.

The sensor will automatically controlthe frequency of the wipes from theoff setting to the high speed settingaccording to the weather conditions.The wipers can be left in a rainsensemode even when it is not raining.

When Rainsense is active, theheadlamps will turn on automaticallyif the exterior lamp control is in theAUTO position and the wipers areactive.

Notice: Going through anautomatic car wash with thewipers on can damage them.Turn the wipers off when goingthrough an automatic car wash.

Windshield Washer

{ CAUTION

In freezing weather, do not useyour washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

Pull the windshield wiper levertoward you to spray washer fluidon the windshield. The wipers willrun for a few cycles to clear thewindshield. For more wash cycles,pull the lever forward and hold.

Heated Windshield WasherNozzles

This feature prevents the windshieldwasher fluid from freezing on thenozzle during cold conditions.The heated nozzles are turned onwhen the rear window defogger isactivated. See Automatic ClimateControl System on page 3-20.


Rear WindowWiper/WasherThe rear wiper and rear washbutton is located on the instrumentpanel above the climate controlsystem.

= (Rear Wiper/Washer): Press towash and wipe the rear window.

The rear window washer uses thesame reservoir as the windshieldwasher. Check the windshieldwasher reservoir level if the frontwindshield can be worked, but nofluid is sprayed when the rear washeris activated. See Windshield WasherFluid on page 5-27.

5 (Delay): Press to turn thedelayed wiping on or off.

Cruise ControlWith cruise control, the vehicle canmaintain a speed of about 25 mph(40 km/h) or more without keepingyour foot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow 25 mph (40 km/h).

On vehicles with the StabiliTrak®

feature, the system may begin to limitwheel spin while you are using cruisecontrol. If this happens, the cruisecontrol will automatically disengage.See StabiliTrak® System onpage 4-7.

{ CAUTION

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. So, do not usethe cruise control on windingroads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.


Setting Cruise Control

{ CAUTION

If you leave your cruise controlon when you are not using cruise,you might hit a button and go intocruise when you do not want to.You could be startled and evenlose control. Keep the cruisecontrol switch off until you wantto use cruise control.

The cruise control buttons arelocated on the left side of thesteering wheel.

E (On/Off): Press to turn thecruise control system on and off.An indicator light comes on.

RES+ (Resume/Accel): Movethe thumbwheel up to resume a setspeed or to accelerate to a higherspeed.

−SET (Set/Coast): Move thethumbwheel down to set a speedor to decrease the speed.

To set a speed:

1. Press E to turn cruise control on.The indicator light on the buttoncomes on.

2. Get to the speed desired.

3. Press the thumbwheel toward−SET and release it.

4. Take your foot off the acceleratorpedal.

When the brakes are applied,the cruise control shuts off.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied, the cruise control isdisengaged. The indicator light onthe instrument panel cluster goesout when the cruise is no longerengaged. To return to the previouslyset speed, press the thumbwheelup toward RES+ briefly when thevehicle has reached a speed ofabout 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.

This accelerates the vehicle to thepreviously selected speed.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

To increase the cruise speed whileusing cruise control:

• Move the thumbwheel up towardRES+ and hold it until the vehicleaccelerates to the desired speed,and then release the switch.


• To increase the speed in smallamounts, move the thumbwheelup toward RES+ briefly and thenrelease it. Each time this is done,the vehicle goes about 1 mph(1.6 km/h) faster.

• Use the accelerator pedal toreach the desired speed andmove the thumbwheel towards−SET. The new desired speedmust be greater than the previousset speed by a least 5 mph.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready engaged,

• Move the thumbwheel toward−SET and hold until the desiredlower speed is reached, thenrelease it.

• To slow down in very smallamounts, move the thumbwheeltoward −SET briefly. Each timethis is done, the vehicle goesabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle’s speed.When you take your foot off thepedal, the vehicle will slow downto the previously set cruise controlspeed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control workson hills depends upon the vehicle’sspeed, load, and the steepness ofthe hills. When going up steep hills,you might have to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintain thevehicle’s speed. When goingdownhill, you might have to brake orshift to a lower gear to maintain thevehicle’s speed. For some vehiclesthe transmission may automaticallydownshift when going down hills tohelp maintain the vehicle’s speed.When the brakes are applied thecruise control shuts off.

Ending Cruise Control

There are three ways to disengagethe cruise control:

• Step lightly on the brake pedalor clutch; when cruise controldisengages, the indicator lighton the instrument panel clustergoes out.

• Press E to turn off the cruisecontrol system.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speedmemory is erased when thecruise control or the ignition isturned off.


Exterior Lamps

The exterior lamp control is locatedon the instrument panel to theleft of the steering wheel.

The exterior lamp control can beturned to the following positions:

9 (Off): Turns off the exteriorlamps. The knob returns to theAUTO position after it is released.

AUTO (Automatic): Automaticallyturns the exterior lamps on andoff, depending on outside lighting.

; (Parking Lamps): Turns onthe parking lamps together with thefollowing:

• Sidemarker Lamps

• Taillamps

• License Plate Lamps

• Instrument Panel Lights

2 (Headlamps): Turns on theheadlamps, together with thepreviously listed lamps and lights.

Lamps On Reminder

A warning chime sounds, if thedriver door is opened while theignition is off and the lamps are on.

Wiper ActivatedHeadlampsThis feature automatically turnson the headlamps and parkinglamps if the exterior lamp control isset in the AUTO position and thewindshield wipers are turned on andhave completed eight wipe cycles.See Exterior Lamps on page 3-12for additional information.

When the ignition is turned off,the wiper-activated headlampsimmediately turn off. They also turnoff if the windshield wiper control isturned off.


Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) canmake it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day.Fully functional daytime runninglamps are required on all vehiclesfirst sold in Canada.

The DRL system makes thelow-beam headlamps come onin daylight when the followingconditions are met:

• The engine is running,

• The exterior lamp band is inAUTO, and

• The light sensor determines it isdaytime.

When the DRL are on, thelow-beam headlamps will be on.The taillamps, sidemarker,instrument panel lights andother lamps will not be on.

When the exterior lamp band isturned to the headlamp position,the regular headlamps will come on.The other lamps that come on withthe headlamps will also come on.

When the headlamps are turned off,the regular lamps also turn off, andthe low-beam headlamps turn on.

The regular headlamp systemshould be used when needed.

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen it is dark enough outside, theheadlamps come on automatically.

There is a light sensor located ontop of the instrument panel. Do notcover the sensor or the headlampswill come on when they are notneeded.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage or tunnel.


Fog LampsFor vehicles with fog lamps, thebutton is located on the instrumentpanel next to the exterior lampsswitch.

# : Press to turn the fog lamps onor off.The fog lamp indicator in theinstrument panel comes on whenthe fog lamps are in use.The parking lamps or low-beamheadlamps must be on, before thefog lamps can be turned on.If the exterior lamp control is setto AUTO mode, the parking lampsand low-beam headlamps come onsimultaneously when the fog lampsare turned on.When the high-beam headlampsare turned on, the fog lamps turn offautomatically. When the high-beamheadlamps are turned off, the foglamps come on again.Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to beon along with the fog lamps.

Instrument PanelBrightnessThis feature controls the brightnessof the instrument panel lights.

The thumbwheel for this featureis located on the left side ofthe steering wheel next to theexterior lamps control.

Turn the thumbwheel to the right orleft to brighten or dim the lights.

Dome Lamp

* (Dome Lamp Override): Pressthis button to keep the dome lampsand other interior lamps turned offwhile any door is open. Press thisbutton again to return it to the outposition and the lamps automaticallycome on when any door is opened.

+ (On/Off): Press this buttonto turn the dome lamps on and offwhile the doors are closed.

Entry LightingIf the dome lamp override button isin the out position, the lamps insidethe vehicle automatically come onwhen any door is opened or whenthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)unlock button is pressed. After thedoor is opened the lights remain onand stay on for 20 seconds after thedoors are closed, or until the key isput into the ignition and turned tothe ACC/ACCESSORY position.The lights will then gradually dimuntil they are no longer lit.


Reading LampsThe reading lamps are located onthe overhead console.

To turn the reading lamps on or off,press the button located next toeach lamp.

Electric PowerManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM) that estimatesthe battery’s temperature and stateof charge. It then adjusts the voltagefor best performance and extendedlife of the battery.

When the battery’s state of charge islow, the voltage is raised slightly toquickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high,the voltage is lowered slightly toprevent overcharging. If the vehiclehas a voltmeter gage or a voltagedisplay on the Driver Information

Center (DIC), you may see thevoltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, an alertwill be displayed.

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles. Thisis because the generator (alternator)may not be spinning fast enough atidle to produce all the power that isneeded for very high electrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on,such as: headlamps, high beams,fog lamps, rear window defogger,climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator’s outputand the vehicle’s electrical needs.

It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power, wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of someaccessories.

Normally, these actions occurin steps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, a Driver InformationCenter (DIC) message might bedisplayed, such as BATTERYSAVER ACTIVE, BATTERYVOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY.If this message is displayed, it isrecommended that the driver reducethe electrical loads as much aspossible. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-49.


Battery Run-DownProtectionThe battery saver feature isdesigned to protect the vehicle’sbattery.

If any interior or exterior lamp is lefton and the ignition is turned off, thebattery rundown protection systemautomatically turns the lamp off after10 minutes.

Accessory PowerOutlet(s)The accessory power outlets can beused to connect electrical equipment,such as a cellular phone.

The accessory power outlets arelocated on the rear of the centerstorage console and in the rear cargocompartment. There may be a poweroutlet located inside the instrumentpanel storage area below the climatecontrols.

To use the outlets, remove thecover. When not in use, always coverthe outlet with the protective cap.

Notice: Leaving electricalequipment on for extendedperiods will drain the battery.Always turn off electricalequipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment thatexceeds the maximum 20 ampererating.

Certain electrical accessoriesmay not be compatible with theaccessory power outlet and couldresult in blown vehicle or adapterfuses. If you experience a problem,see your dealer/retailer for additionalinformation on the accessory poweroutlet.

Notice: Adding any electricalequipment to your vehiclemay damage it or keep othercomponents from working asthey should. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty.Check with your dealer/retailerbefore adding electricalequipment.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the installationinstructions included with theequipment.

Notice: Improper use of thepower outlet can cause damagenot covered by the warranty.Do not hang any type of accessoryor accessory bracket from theplug because the power outletsare designed for accessory powerplugs only.


Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemThe heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with thissystem. For vehicles with the remote start feature, the climate control systemfunctions as part of the remote start feature. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-4.

A. Fan ControlB. Temperature ControlC. Air Delivery Mode ControlD. Air Conditioning

E. Outside AirF. RecirculationG. Rear Window Defogger

A (Fan Control): Turn clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed. To turnthe fan off, turn the left knob allthe way counterclockwise. In anysetting other than off, the fan runscontinuously with the ignition on.There will be some airflow noticeablefrom the various outlets when driving,even with the fan in the off position.To turn off the air completely, turn thefan to 9 and select the recirculationbutton.

Temperature Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease thetemperature inside the vehicle.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwiseto change the current airflow mode.

Select from the following airdelivery modes:

H (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.


) (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument paneland the floor outlets.

6 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets with some air directedto the windshield.

When this mode is selected, thesystem turns the recirculation modeoff. Recirculation mode cannotbe selected while in floor mode.This helps prevent window fogging.

- (Defog): This mode clearsthe windows of fog or moisture.Air is directed to the floor outlets,with some air directed to thewindshield and side window outlets.In this mode, the system turns therecirculation mode off and runs theair conditioning compressor unlessthe outside air is at or below freezing.Recirculation mode cannot beselected while in defog mode.This helps prevent window fogging.

0 (Defrost): This mode removesfog or frost from the windshieldmore quickly. Air is directed to thewindshield and the side windowoutlets. In this mode, the systemturns the recirculation mode offautomatically and runs the airconditioning compressor unless theoutside air is at or below freezing.Recirculation mode cannot beselected while in defrost mode.This helps prevent window fogging.

For best results, clear all snow andice from the windshield beforedefrosting.

# (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning system onor off. An indicator light comes on toshow that the air conditioning is on.The air conditioning can be selectedin any mode as long as the fan is onand the outside temperature is abovefreezing. A flashing indicator lightindicates that the air conditioningcompressor is currently not available.

On hot days, open the windows tolet hot inside air escape; then closethem. This helps reduce the time ittakes for the vehicle to cool downand helps the system to operatemore efficiently.

For quick cool down on hot days,select the following settingstogether:

1. Select H mode.

2. Select ;.

3. Turn the # on.

4. Select the coolest temperatureand highest fan speed.

5. Once the vehicle’s interiortemperature is below the outsidetemperature, select recirculationmode for enhanced cooling.

Using these settings together forlong periods of time may cause theair inside the vehicle to become toodry. To prevent this from happening,after the air inside of the vehiclehas cooled, turn the recirculationmode off.


The air conditioning systemremoves moisture from the air, so asmall amount of water might dripunder the vehicle while idling or afterturning off the engine. This is normal.

; (Outside Air): Press to turn theoutside air mode on. An indicatorlight comes on to show that outsideair is on. Air from outside the vehiclewill circulate throughout the vehicle.The outside air mode can be usedwith all modes, but it cannot beused with the recirculation mode.Pressing this button will cancel therecirculation mode.

@ (Recirculation): Press toturn on the recirculation mode.An indicator light comes on to showthat recirculation is on. This moderecirculates and helps to quicklycool or heat the air inside the vehicle.It can be used to prevent outside airand odors from entering the vehicle.Avoid using the recirculation modeduring high periods of humidityand cool outside temperaturessince this may result in increasedwindow fogging. If window foggingis experienced, select thedefrost mode.

Recirculation mode is not available infloor, defog or defrost modes and willshut off automatically and change tooutside air. The indicator will flash ifthe button is selected in any of thesemodes. This helps prevent windowfogging and moisture building upinside the vehicle.

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog from therear window.

The rear window defogger onlyworks when the ignition is inON/RUN.

< (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. An indicator lighton the button comes on to showthat the rear window is activated.

The rear window defogger stayson for approximately 10 minutesafter the button is pressed, unlessthe ignition is turned to ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.If turned on again, the defogger onlyruns for approximately five minutesbefore turning off again. At highervehicle speeds, the defogger maystay on continuously. The defoggercan also be turned off by turning offthe engine.


For vehicles with the remote startfeature, the rear defogger willautomatically turn on.

Notice: Do not use anythingsharp on the inside of the rearwindow. If you do, you could cutor damage the warming grid, andthe repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do notattach a temporary vehiclelicense, tape, a decal or anythingsimilar to the defogger grid.

Remote Start Climate ControlOperation

For vehicles with the remote startfeature and if it is activated, theclimate control system heats andcools the inside of the vehicle usingthe modes that were set before thevehicle was turned off and the reardefogger automatically turns on.

Automatic Climate Control System

The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled withthis system. For vehicles with the remote start feature, the climate controlsystem functions as part of the remote start feature. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-4.

A. Fan ControlB. Temperature ControlC. Air Delivery Mode ControlD. Air Conditioning

E. Outside AirF. RecirculationG. Rear Window Defogger

United States version shown, Canada version similar.


Automatic OperationThis climate control systemautomatically maintains the desiredtemperature inside the vehicle.Do not cover the sensor located onthe top of the instrument panel nearthe windshield or the sensor grillebelow the climate control faceplate.These two sensors help regulate theinside air temperature.

AUTO (Automatic Fan): Turn thefan knob to AUTO for the systemto automatically adjust the fanspeed to reach the desired insidetemperature.

Temperature Control: Selectthe desired cabin air temperaturebetween 60-90°F (16-32°C).Choosing the coldest or warmesttemperature setting does not causethe system to heat or cool any faster.

AUTO (Automatic Air DeliveryMode): Turn the air delivery modeknob to AUTO for the system toautomatically control the directionof the airflow to help reach thedesired inside temperature.

The system automatically controlsthe air inlet to supply the outsideair or recirculated inside air neededto heat or cool the vehicle faster.The recirculation button indicatorlight is lit whenever the recirculationmode is on.

Press the outside air button tochange to outside air. However,the recirculation mode mayturn back on automatically.

In cold weather, if the fan and airdelivery modes are in automatic,the system starts at lower fan speedsto avoid directing cold air into thevehicle until warmer air is available.The climate control system directsair to the floor, but may automatically

change modes as the vehiclewarms up to maintain the chosentemperature setting. The length oftime needed to warm the interiordepends on the outside temperatureand inside temperature of thevehicle.

Manual Operation

A (Fan Control): Turn clockwiseor counterclockwise to increaseor decrease the fan speed. To turnthe fan off, turn the left knob tothe 9 position. In any setting otherthan off, the fan runs continuouslywith the ignition on. The fan must beturned on to run the air conditioningcompressor. There will be someairflow noticeable from the variousoutlets when driving, even with thefan in the off position. To turn off theair completely, turn the fan to 9 andselect the recirculation button.


Temperature Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease thetemperature. Select the desiredcabin air temperature between60-90°F (16-32°C). Typically, thebest setting is near 75°F (23°C).Choosing the coldest or warmesttemperature setting does not causethe system to heat or cool anyfaster.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwiseto change the current airflow mode.

Select from the following airdelivery modes:

H (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument paneloutlets and the floor outlets.

6 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets with some air directedto the windshield.

When this mode is selected, thesystem turns the recirculation modeoff. Recirculation mode cannot beselected while in floor mode. This isto help prevent window fogging.

- (Defog): This mode clearsthe windows of fog or moisture.Air is directed to the floor outlets,with some air directed to thewindshield and side window outlets.In this mode, the system turns therecirculation mode off and runs theair conditioning compressor unlessthe outside air is at or below freezing.Recirculation mode cannot beselected while in defog mode.This helps prevent window fogging.

0 (Defrost): This mode removesfog or frost from the windshieldmore quickly. Air is directed to thewindshield and the side windowoutlets. In this mode, the systemturns the recirculation mode offautomatically and runs the airconditioning compressor unless theoutside air is at or below freezing.Recirculation mode cannot beselected while in defrost mode.This helps prevent window fogging.

For best results, clear all snow andice from the windshield beforedefrosting.

# (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning system onor off. An indicator light comes on toshow that the air conditioning is on.The air conditioning can be selectedin any mode as long as the fan is onand the outside temperature is abovefreezing. A flashing indicator lightindicates that the air conditioningcompressor is currently not available.


On hot days, use the automatic fanand automatic air delivery modesettings and the vehicle will reach thedesired temperature more quickly.The desired fan and air deliverymode settings can still be adjustedmanually. Open the windows to letthe hot inside air escape, then closethem. This helps reduce the time ittakes for the vehicle to cool downand helps the system to operatemore efficiently.

The air conditioning system removesmoisture from the air, so a smallamount of water might drip under thevehicle while idling or after turning offthe engine.

; (Outside Air): Press to turnthe outside air mode on. An indicatorlight comes on to show that outsideair is on. Air from outside the vehiclewill circulate throughout the vehicle.The outside air mode can be usedwith all modes, but it cannot beused with the recirculation mode.Pressing this button will cancel therecirculation mode.

@ (Recirculation): Press toturn on the recirculation mode.An indicator light comes on to showthat recirculation is on. This moderecirculates and helps to quickly coolor heat the air inside the vehicle.It can be used to prevent outside airand odors from entering the vehicle.Avoid using the recirculation modeduring high periods of humidityand cool outside temperaturessince this may result in increasedwindow fogging. If window foggingis experienced, select thedefrost mode.

Recirculation mode is not available infloor, defog or defrost modes and willshut off automatically and change tooutside air. If the button is selectedin any of these modes, the indicatorwill flash. This helps prevent windowfogging and moisture building upinside the vehicle.

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog from therear window.

The rear window defogger onlyworks when the ignition is inON/RUN.

< (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. An indicator lighton the button comes on to showthat it is activated.

The rear window defogger stayson for approximately 10 minutesafter the button is pressed, unlessthe ignition is turned to ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.If turned on again, the defogger onlyruns for approximately five minutesbefore turning off. At higher vehiclespeeds, the defogger may stay oncontinuously. The defogger canalso be turned off by turning offthe engine.


For vehicles with the remote startfeature, the rear defogger willautomatically turn on when remotestart is activated.

Notice: Do not use anythingsharp on the inside of the rearwindow. If you do, you could cutor damage the warming grid, andthe repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do notattach a temporary vehiclelicense, tape, a decal or anythingsimilar to the defogger grid.

Remote Start Climate ControlOperation

For vehicles with the remote startfeature and if it is activated, theclimate control system heats andcools the inside of the vehicle usingthe modes that were set before thevehicle was turned off.

Outlet AdjustmentUse the louvers located on the airoutlets to change the direction of theairflow.

Operation Tips

• Clear away any ice, snow,or leaves from the air inletsat the base of the vehicle thatmay block the flow of air intothe vehicle.

• Do not use any non-GMapproved hood deflectorsthat could adversely affect theperformance of the system.

• Keep the path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside ofthe vehicle more effectively.

Passenger CompartmentAir FilterThe filter removes dust, pollen, andother airborne irritants from outsideair that is pulled into the vehicle.

The filter should be replaced as partof routine scheduled maintenance.See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 6-3 for replacement intervals.To find out what type of filter to use,see Maintenance Replacement Partson page 6-15.

The passenger compartment airfilter can be accessed by removingthe entire glove box.

1. Remove the six screws fromaround the glove box anddetach the three inner clipsfrom the glove box.


2. Lower the loosened glove boxhousing.

3. Unplug both wire cables andremove the glove box.

4. Remove the air filter coverscrew.


5. Remove the filter cover and pullout the old air filter.

6. Install the new air filter.

7. Reinstall the air filter cover.Reconnect the wire cablingand re-install the glove box.

See your dealer/retailer if additionalassistance is needed.

Warning Lights,Gages, and IndicatorsWarning lights and gages cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention tothe warning lights and gages couldprevent injury.

Warning lights come on whenthere may be or is a problem withone of the vehicle’s functions. Somewarning lights come on briefly whenthe engine is started to indicate theyare working.

Gages can indicate when there maybe or is a problem with one of thevehicle’s functions. Often gages andwarning lights work together toindicate a problem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on while driving,or when one of the gages showsthere may be a problem, check thesection that explains what to do.Follow this manual’s advice. Waitingto do repairs can be costly and evendangerous.


Instrument Panel ClusterThe instrument cluster is designed to indicate how the vehicle is running. It shows how fast the vehicle is going,about how much fuel the vehicle has left, and many other things needed to drive safely and economically.

United States Base version shown, Canada and Uplevel similar


Speedometer andOdometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle’s speed in both miles perhour (mph) and kilometers perhour (km/h).

The odometer shows how farthe vehicle has been driven, ineither miles or kilometers.

If the vehicle needs a new odometerinstalled, the new one is set to themileage total of the old odometer.If it cannot, it will be set at zero anda label must be put on the driver’sdoor to show the old mileage readingwhen the new odometer wasinstalled. If the mileage is unknown,the label should then indicate that theprevious mileage is unknown.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer can recordthe number of miles, used in theUnited States, or kilometers, used inCanada, traveled for up to two trips.

Cycle between the odometer andtrip odometers A and B by pressingthe reset button located in thelower right area of the speedometer.Press the reset button to tell howmany miles or kilometers have beenrecorded on either Trip A or Trip Bsince the trip odometer was lastset back to zero.

To reset each trip odometer to zero,press and hold the reset button.The reset button resets only the tripodometer that is being displayed.Each trip odometer must be resetindividually.

TachometerThe tachometer displays theengine speed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

Safety Belt RemindersDriver Safety Belt ReminderLightWhen the engine is started,a chime sounds for several secondsto remind the driver to fasten theirsafety belt, unless it is alreadybuckled.

The safety belt light comes onand stays on for several seconds,then flashes for several more.

This chime and light are repeatedif the driver safety belt remainsunbuckled and the vehicle isin motion. If the driver safety beltis already buckled, neither thechime nor the light comes on.


Passenger Safety BeltReminder LightSeveral seconds after the engineis started, a chime sounds forseveral seconds to remind the frontpassenger to buckle their safety belt.This only occurs if the passengerairbag is enabled. See PassengerSensing System on page 1-51 formore information. The passengersafety belt light, located on theinstrument panel, comes on andstays on for several seconds andthen flashes for several more.

This chime and light are repeated ifthe passenger remains unbuckledand the vehicle is in motion.

If the passenger safety belt isbuckled before the engine is started,neither the chime nor the lightcomes on.

The front passenger safety beltwarning light and chime may turn onif an object is put on the seat such asa briefcase, handbag, grocery bag,laptop or other electronic device.To turn off the warning light and orchime, remove the object from theseat or buckle the safety belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel cluster,which shows the airbag symbol.The system checks the airbag’selectrical system for malfunctions.The light indicates if there is anelectrical problem. The systemcheck includes the airbag sensor,the pretensioners, the airbagmodules, the wiring and the crashsensing and diagnostic module.For more information on the airbagsystem, see Airbag System onpage 1-42.

{ CAUTION

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

The airbag readiness light comeson when the vehicle is started, andflashes for a few seconds. The lightgoes out when the system is ready.


If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson while driving, the airbag systemmay not work properly. Have thevehicle serviced right away.

The airbag readiness light shouldflash for a few seconds when theengine is started. If the light doesnot come on then, have it fixedimmediately. If there is a problemwith the airbag system, an airbagDriver Information Center (DIC)message may also come on. SeeDIC Warnings and Messages onpage 3-49 for more information.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has the passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 1-51for important safety information.The instrument panel has apassenger airbag status indicator.

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicator willlight ON and OFF, or the symbol foron and off, for several seconds as asystem check. Then, after severalmore seconds, the status indicatorwill light either ON or OFF, or eitherthe on or off symbol to let you knowthe status of the right front passengerfrontal and seat-mounted side impactairbags.

If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the rightfront passenger frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbagare enabled (may inflate).

If the word OFF or the off symbolis lit on the airbag status indicator,it means that the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag.

United States

Canada


If, after several seconds, bothstatus indicator lights remain on,or if there are no lights at all, theremay be a problem with the lightsor the passenger sensing system.See your dealer/retailer for service.

{ CAUTION

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrong withthe airbag system. To help avoidinjury to yourself or others, havethe vehicle serviced right away.See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 3-29 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

Charging System Light

The charging system light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turned on,but the engine is not running, as acheck to show the light is working.It should go out when the engine isstarted.

If the light stays on, or comeson while driving, there could be aproblem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by yourdealer/retailer. Driving while this lightis on could drain the battery.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turnoff all accessories, such as theradio and air conditioner.

Brake System WarningLight

The brake indicator light shouldcome on briefly as the engineis started. If it does not comeon have the vehicle servicedby your dealer/retailer.

When the ignition is on, thebrake system warning light comeson when the parking brake is set.The light stays on if the parkingbrake does not fully release.

United States Canada


If it stays on after the parking brakeis fully released, there is a brakeproblem. Have the brake systeminspected immediately.

{ CAUTION

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on. Drivingwith the brake system warninglight on can lead to a crash. If thelight is still on after the vehiclehas been pulled off the road andcarefully stopped, have thevehicle towed for service.

If the light comes on while driving,a chime sounds. Pull off the road andstop. The pedal might be harder topush or go closer to the floor. It mightalso take longer to stop. If the light isstill on, have the vehicle towed forservice. See Towing Your Vehicleon page 4-32.

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

For vehicles with the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), this light should comeon briefly as the engine is started. If itdoes not come on have the vehicleserviced by your dealer/retailer.

If the ABS light stays on longer thana few seconds after engine is started,or comes on and stays on whiledriving, try resetting the system.To reset the system:

1. While driving, pull over when it issafe to do so.

2. Place the vehicle in P (PARK).

3. Turn off the ignition.

4. Then restart the engine.

If the ABS light remains on afterresetting the system or comes onagain while driving, the vehicleneeds service. If the ABS light is on,but the regular brake system warninglight is not on, the antilock brakes arenot working properly, but the regularbrakes are still functioning. Have thevehicle serviced right away. If bothbrake lights are on, the vehicle doesnot have antilock brakes, and thereis a problem with the regular brakesas well. Have the vehicle towed forservice. See Towing Your Vehicleon page 4-32.


Power Steering WarningLightsFor 4-cylinder vehicles with ElectricPower Steering (EPS), this lightcomes on briefly when the ignitionis turned to ON/RUN as a checkto show it is working.

If it does not come on have thevehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.

If the EPS light stays on, or comeson while driving, the EPS systemmay not be working. If this happens,see your dealer/retailer for service.

Traction Control System(TCS) Warning Light

The Traction Control System (TCS)Warning Light shows one of thesetwo symbols.

This light comes on briefly as theengine is started. If it does not comeon have the vehicle serviced byyour dealer/retailer.

It also comes on when the TractionControl System (TCS) has beenturned off or when the ElectronicStability Program (ESP) is not ready.If there is a problem with the TCSor the ESP, this light and the TCSwarning light comes on at thesame time. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 4-8 andStabiliTrak® System on page 4-7for more information.

StabiliTrak® IndicatorLight

The StabiliTrak® light comes onbriefly as the engine is started.If it does not come on havethe vehicle serviced by yourdealer/retailer.

This light flashes while theStabiliTrack or the Traction ControlSystem (TCS) is working. The lightcomes on when the ESP has beenturned off and if there is a problemwith the StabiliTrak or the TCS.See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 4-8 and StabiliTrak® Systemon page 4-7 for more information.


Engine CoolantTemperature WarningLightThe engine coolant temperaturelight should come on briefly asthe engine is started. If it does notcome on have the vehicle servicedby your dealer/retailer.

Notice: Driving with the enginecoolant temperature warning lighton could cause the vehicle tooverheat. See Engine Overheatingon page 5-25. The vehicle’s enginecould be damaged, and it mightnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Never drive with theengine coolant temperaturewarning light on.

If this light comes on and stays on,the engine has overheated. Pull overand see Engine Overheating onpage 5-25 for more information.

Tire Pressure Light

If the vehicle has a tire pressuremonitoring system, the tire pressurelight provides information about tirepressures and the Tire PressureMonitoring System. The light shouldcome on briefly as the engine isstarted. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.

When the Light is On Steady

This indicates that one ormore of the tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A tire pressure message in theDriver Information Center (DIC),can accompany the light. See DICWarnings and Messages onpage 3-49 for more information.Stop and check the tires as soonas it is safe to do so. If underinflated,inflate to the proper pressure.See Tires on page 5-43 for moreinformation.

When the Light Flashes First andThen is On Steady

This indicates that there could bea problem with the Tire PressureMonitor System. The light flashesfor about a minute and stays onsteady for the remainder of theignition cycle. This sequencerepeats with every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 5-51 for more information.


MalfunctionIndicator LampCheck Engine LightA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors operation ofthe fuel, ignition, and emissioncontrol systems. It ensuresthat emissions are at acceptablelevels for the life of the vehicle,helping to produce a cleanerenvironment.

This light comes on when theignition is on, but the engine is notrunning, as a check to show it isworking. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.

If the check engine light comeson and stays on, while the engineis running, this indicates that thereis an OBD II problem and serviceis required.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system assiststhe service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle iscontinually driven with this lighton, after a while, the emissioncontrols might not work as well,the vehicle’s fuel economy mightnot be as good, and the enginemight not run as smoothly.This could lead to costly repairsthat might not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Notice: Modifications madeto the engine, transmission,exhaust, intake, or fuel systemof the vehicle or the replacementof the original tires with otherthan those of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) canaffect the vehicle’s emissioncontrols and can cause this lightto come on. Modifications to thesesystems could lead to costlyrepairs not covered by the vehiclewarranty. This could also resultin a failure to pass a requiredEmission Inspection/Maintenancetest. See Accessories andModifications on page 5-3.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.


The following can prevent moreserious damage to the vehicle:

• Reduce vehicle speed.

• Avoid hard accelerations.

• Avoid steep uphill grades.

• If towing a trailer, reduce theamount of cargo being hauledas soon as it is possible.

If the light continues to flash,when it is safe to do so, stopthe vehicle. Find a safe place topark the vehicle. Turn the keyoff, wait at least 10 seconds, andrestart the engine. If the light isstill flashing, follow the previoussteps and see your dealer/retailerfor service as soon as possible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction has beendetected on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

An emission system malfunctionmight be corrected by checking thefollowing items:

• Make sure the fuel cap is fullyinstalled. See Filling the Tankon page 5-8. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuelcap has been left off or improperlyinstalled. A loose or missing fuelcap allows fuel to evaporate intothe atmosphere. A few drivingtrips with the cap properlyinstalled should turn the light off.

• If the vehicle has been driventhrough a deep puddle of water,the vehicle’s electrical systemmight be wet. The condition isusually corrected when theelectrical system dries out.A few driving trips should turnthe light off.

• Make sure to fuel the vehiclewith quality fuel. Poor fuel qualitycauses the engine not to run asefficiently as designed and maycause: stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.If one or more of these conditionsoccurs, change the fuel brandused. It will require at least onefull tank of the proper fuel to turnthe light off.See Gasoline Octane onpage 5-5.

If none of the above have made thelight turn off, your dealer/retailer cancheck the vehicle. The dealer/retailerhas the proper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix any mechanicalor electrical problems that mighthave developed.


Emissions Inspection andMaintenance ProgramsSome state/provincial and localgovernments have or might beginprograms to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on the vehicle.Failure to pass this inspectioncould prevent getting a vehicleregistration.

Here are some things to know tohelp the vehicle pass an inspection:

• The vehicle will not pass thisinspection if the check enginelight is on with the enginerunning, or if the key is inON/RUN and the light is not on.

• The vehicle will not passthis inspection if the OBD II(on-board diagnostic) systemdetermines that critical emissioncontrol systems have notbeen completely diagnosedby the system. The vehiclewould be considered not ready

for inspection. This can happenif the battery has recently beenreplaced or if the battery has rundown. The diagnostic system isdesigned to evaluate criticalemission control systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection for lack of OBD IIsystem readiness, your dealer/retailer can prepare the vehiclefor inspection.

Oil Pressure Light

{ CAUTION

Do not keep driving if the oilpressure is low. The engine canbecome so hot that it catches fire.Someone could be burned. Checkthe oil as soon as possible andhave the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always follow the maintenanceschedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

The oil pressure light should comeon briefly as the engine is started. If itdoes not come on have the vehicleserviced by your dealer/retailer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and might havesome other system problem.


Change Engine Oil Light

When the change engine oil lightcomes on, it means that service isrequired on the vehicle.

See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 6-3 and Engine Oil onpage 5-14 for more information.

After the engine oil is changed theengine oil life system needs to bereset in order to turn off this light.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 5-16 for more information.

Security Light

For information regarding this lightand the vehicle’s security system,see PASS-Key® III+ ElectronicImmobilizer on page 2-13.

Fog Lamp Light

The fog lamp light comes on whenthe fog lamps are in use.

The light goes out when the foglamps are turned off. See FogLamps on page 3-14 for moreinformation.

Cruise Control Light

The cruise control light comes onwhenever the cruise control is set.

The light goes out when thecruise control is turned off.See Cruise Control on page 3-9for more information.


Reduced Engine PowerLight

The reduced engine power lightshould come on briefly as the engineis started. If it does not come on havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.

This light, along with the serviceengine soon light displays when anoticeable reduction in the vehicle’sperformance occurs. Stop the vehicleand turn off the ignition. Wait for10 seconds and restart the vehicle.This might correct the condition.

The vehicle can be driven at areduced speed when the reducedengine power light is on butacceleration and speed might bereduced. The performance couldbe reduced until the next time thevehicle is driven. If this light stays on,see your dealer/retailer as soon aspossible for diagnosis and repair.

Highbeam On Light

The highbeam on light comes onwhen the high-beam headlamps arein use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 3-7 for moreinformation.

Daytime Running Lamps(DRL) Indicator Light

This light turns on whenever theDaytime Running Lamps are on.

See Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)on page 3-13 for more information.


Low Washer FluidWarning Light

The low washer fluid warning lightcomes on when the windshieldwasher fluid is low. See WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 5-27 formore information.

All-Wheel Drive DisabledLight

This light comes on when thereis a malfunction in the All-WheelDrive (AWD) system.

This light flashes when the AWDsystem is temporarily disabled.

For more information see All-WheelDrive (AWD) System on page 4-9.

Gate Ajar Light

If the gate ajar light comes on,the liftgate is not completely closed.Driving with the liftgate open cancause carbon monoxide (CO) toenter the vehicle.

See Engine Exhaust on page 2-28for more information.

Door Ajar Light

The door ajar light comes on when adoor is open. Before driving, checkthat all doors are properly closed.

Service Vehicle SoonLight

The service vehicle soon lightcomes on if a condition existsthat may require the vehicle tobe taken in for service.

If the light comes on, take thevehicle to your dealer/retailer forservice as soon as possible.


Fuel Gage

When the ignition is on, the fuelgage indicates how much fuel isleft in the tank.

When the indicator nears empty,the low fuel light comes on. There isstill a little fuel left, but the fuel tankshould be refilled soon. See LowFuel Warning Light on page 3-41for more information.

An arrow on the fuel gage indicatesthe side of the vehicle the fueldoor is on.

Here are four things that someowners ask about. None of thesemeans the fuel gage is not workingproperly:

• At the service station, the fuelpump shuts off before thegage reads full.

• It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the gage indicated.For example, the gage may haveindicated the tank was half full,but it actually took a little more orless than half the tank’s capacityto fill the tank.

• The gage moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.

• The gage takes a few seconds tostabilize after the ignition is turnedon, but it goes back to emptywhen the ignition is turned off.

For fuel tank capacity, seeCapacities and Specificationson page 5-86.

Low Fuel Warning Light

The low fuel warning light, belowthe fuel gage, comes on briefly whenthe engine is started.

This light also comes on when thefuel tank is low on fuel. When fuel isadded, the light should go off. If itdoes not, have the vehicle serviced.

United States Canada


Driver InformationCenter (DIC)Your vehicle has a DriverInformation Center (DIC).

All information appears in the DICdisplay located in the instrumentpanel cluster.

The DIC comes on when theignition is on. After a short delay,the DIC displays the informationthat was last displayed beforethe engine was turned off.

The DIC displays trip, fuel, andvehicle system information, andwarning messages if a systemproblem is detected.

The DIC also displays the compassdirection, outside air temperature,and shift position indicator at the

top of the DIC display. If there isa problem with the system thatcontrols the temperature display,the numbers will be replaced withdashes. If this occurs, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer. If an abnormal temperaturereading is displayed for an extendedperiod of time, consult yourdealer/retailer. Under certaincircumstances, especially whenthe engine is idling, a delay updatingthe temperature display is normal.

See DIC Compass on page 3-47and Automatic TransmissionOperation (Uplevel) on page 2-19 orAutomatic Transmission Operation(Base) on page 2-22 for moreinformation.

DIC Operation andDisplaysThe DIC has different displays whichcan be accessed by pressing the DICbuttons located on the instrumentpanel, below the headlamp switch.

The DIC displays trip, fuel, andvehicle system information, andwarning messages if a systemproblem is detected.

The DIC also allows some featuresto be customized. See DIC VehicleCustomization on page 3-57 for moreinformation.


DIC Buttons

The buttons are the trip/fuel,vehicle information, customization,and set/reset buttons. The buttonfunctions are detailed in thefollowing pages.

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press thisbutton to display the odometer,trip odometer, fuel range, averageeconomy, fuel used, and elapsedtime. Some vehicles also displayinstantaneous economy. Thecompass and outside temperaturewill also be shown in the display.The temperature will be shownin °F or °C depending on the unitsselected.

T (Vehicle Information): Pressthis button to display the oil life,units, tire pressure readingsfor vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitterprogramming, compass zonesetting, compass recalibration onvehicles with this feature, coolanttemperature, and battery voltage.

U (Customization): Press thisbutton to customize the featuresettings on your vehicle. See DICVehicle Customization on page 3-57for more information.

V (Set/Reset): Press this buttonto set or reset certain functionsand to turn off or acknowledgemessages on the DIC.

Trip/Fuel Menu Items

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this buttonto scroll through the followingmenu items:

Odometer

Press the trip/fuel button untilODOMETER displays. This displayshows the distance the vehiclehas been driven in either miles (mi)or kilometers (km). Pressing thetrip odometer reset stem willalso display the odometer.

To switch between English andmetric measurements, see “Units”later in this section.


Trip Odometer

Press the trip/fuel button untilTRIP A or TRIP B displays.This display shows the currentdistance traveled in either miles (mi)or kilometers (km) since the lastreset for the trip odometer. Pressingthe trip odometer reset stem willalso display the trip odometer.

Each trip odometer can be resetto zero separately by pressingthe set/reset button while the tripodometer is displayed. You canalso reset the trip odometer whileit is displayed by pressing andholding the trip odometer reset stem.

Fuel Range

Press the trip/fuel button untilFUEL RANGE displays. Thisdisplay shows the approximatenumber of remaining miles (mi)or kilometers (km) the vehiclecan be driven without refueling.The display will show LOW ifthe fuel level is low.

The fuel range estimate is basedon an average of the vehicle’s fueleconomy over recent driving historyand the amount of fuel remainingin the fuel tank. This estimate willchange if driving conditions change.For example, if driving in traffic andmaking frequent stops, this displaymay read one number, but if thevehicle is driven on a freeway, thenumber may change even thoughthe same amount of fuel is in the fueltank. This is because different drivingconditions produce different fueleconomies. Generally, freewaydriving produces better fuel economythan city driving. Fuel range cannotbe reset.

If the vehicle is low on fuel, theFUEL LEVEL LOW message will bedisplayed. See “FUEL LEVEL LOW”under DIC Warnings and Messageson page 3-49.

Average Fuel Economy

Press the trip/fuel button untilAVERAGE FUEL ECONOMYdisplays. This display showsthe approximate average milesper gallon (mpg) or liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km). Thisnumber is calculated based on thenumber of mpg (L/100 km) recordedsince the last time this menu itemwas reset. To reset the AVERAGEFUEL ECONOMY, press and holdthe set/reset button. The display willshow zero.

Fuel Used

Press the trip/fuel button untilFUEL USED displays. This displayshows the number of gallons (gal) orliters (L) of fuel used since the lastreset of this menu item. To resetthe fuel used information, pressand hold the set/reset button whileFUEL USED is displayed.


Elapsed Time

Press the trip/fuel button untilELAPSED TIME displays. Thisdisplay can be used as a timer.

To start the timer, press the set/reset button while ELAPSED TIME isdisplayed. The display will show theamount of time that has passed sincethe timer was last reset, not includingtime the ignition is off. Time willcontinue to be counted as long asthe ignition is on, even if anotherdisplay is being shown on the DIC.The timer will record up to 99 hours,59 minutes and 59 seconds(99:59:59) after which the displaywill return to zero.

To stop the timer, press the set/reset button briefly while ELAPSEDTIME is displayed.

To reset the timer to zero, pressand hold the set/reset button whileELAPSED TIME is displayed.

Instantaneous Fuel Economy

If the vehicle has this display,press the trip/fuel button untilINSTANT FUEL ECONOMYdisplays. This display shows thecurrent fuel economy at a particularmoment and will change frequentlyas driving conditions change. Thisdisplay shows the instantaneous fueleconomy in miles per gallon (mpg) orliters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km).Unlike average fuel economy, thisdisplay cannot be reset.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Vehicle Information MenuItems

T (Vehicle Information): Pressthis button to scroll through thefollowing menu items:

Oil Life

Press the vehicle information buttonuntil OIL LIFE REMAINING displays.This display shows an estimate ofthe oil’s remaining useful life. If yousee 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING onthe display, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains. The engineoil life system will alert you to changethe oil on a schedule consistent withyour driving conditions.


When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON”under DIC Warnings and Messageson page 3-49. You should changethe oil as soon as you can. SeeEngine Oil on page 5-14. In additionto the engine oil life systemmonitoring the oil life, additionalmaintenance is recommended inthe Maintenance Schedule inthis manual. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 6-3 formore information.

Units

Press the vehicle information buttonuntil UNITS displays. This displayallows you to select between Englishor Metric units of measurement.Once in this display, press theset/reset button to select betweenENGLISH or METRIC units. All ofthe vehicle information will then bedisplayed in the unit of measurementselected.

Tire Pressure

If your vehicle has the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thepressure for each tire can be viewedin the DIC. The tire pressure will beshown in either pounds per squareinch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).Press the vehicle information buttonuntil the DIC displays FRONT TIRESPSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. Pressthe vehicle information button againuntil the DIC displays REAR TIRESPSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.

If a low or high tire pressurecondition is detected by the systemwhile driving, a message advisingyou to check the pressure in aspecific tire will appear in the display.See Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-49 and DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-49 for moreinformation.

If the tire pressure display showsdashes instead of a value, theremay be a problem with your vehicle.If this consistently occurs, seeyour dealer/retailer for service.

Relearn Remote Key

This display allows you to matchRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitters to your vehicle.This procedure will erase allpreviously learned transmitters.Therefore, they must be relearnedas additional transmitters.

To match an RKE transmitter toyour vehicle:

1. Press the vehicle informationbutton until PRESS V TORELEARN REMOTE KEYdisplays.

2. Press the set/reset button untilREMOTE KEY LEARNINGACTIVE is displayed.

3. Press and hold the lock andunlock buttons on the firsttransmitter at the same timefor about 15 seconds.A chime will sound indicatingthat the transmitter is matchedand REMOTE KEY LEARNINGCOMPLETE will be shownon the display.


4. To match additional transmittersat this time, repeat Step 3.Each vehicle can have amaximum of eight transmittersmatched to it.

5. To exit the programming mode,you must cycle the key toLOCK/OFF.

Compass Zone Setting

This display allows for setting thecompass zone. See DIC Compasson page 3-47 for more information.

Compass Recalibration

This display allows for calibratingthe compass. See DIC Compass onpage 3-47 for more information.

Coolant Temperature

Press the vehicle info buttonuntil the coolant temperature isdisplayed. The temperature willbe shown in °F or °C dependingon the units selected.

If the coolant temperature displayshows dashes instead of a value,there may be a problem with thevehicle. If this happens often, seeyour dealer/retailer for service.

Battery Voltage

Press the vehicle info button untilthe battery voltage is displayed.

If the battery voltage display showsdashes instead of a value, theremay be a problem with the vehicle.If this happens often, see yourdealer/retailer for service.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

DIC CompassYour vehicle may have acompass in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

Compass Zone

The zone is set to zone eightupon leaving the factory. Yourdealer/retailer will set the correctzone for your location.

Under certain circumstances,such as during a long distancecross-country trip or moving to a newstate or province, it will be necessaryto compensate for compass varianceby resetting the zone through theDIC if the zone is not set correctly.

Compass variance is the differencebetween the earth’s magnetic northand true geographic north. If thecompass is not set to the zone whereyou live, the compass may give falsereadings. The compass must be setto the variance zone in which thevehicle is traveling.


To adjust for compass variance, usethe following procedure:

Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure

1. Do not set the compass zonewhen the vehicle is moving.Only set it when the vehicleis in P (Park).Press the vehicle informationbutton until PRESS V TO SETCOMPASS ZONE: ## displays.

2. Find the vehicle’s currentlocation and variance zonenumber on the map.Zones 1 through 15 areavailable.

3. Press and hold the set/resetbutton to scroll through and selectthe appropriate variance zone.

4. Press the trip/fuel button untilthe vehicle heading, forexample, N for North, isdisplayed in the DIC.

5. If calibration is necessary,calibrate the compass.See “Compass CalibrationProcedure” following.

Compass Calibration

The compass can be manuallycalibrated. Only calibrate thecompass in a magnetically cleanand safe location, such as an openparking lot, where driving the vehiclein circles is not a danger. It issuggested to calibrate away fromtall buildings, utility wires, manholecovers, or other industrial structures,if possible.

If CAL should ever appear in theDIC display, the compass should becalibrated.


If the DIC display does not show aheading, for example, N for North,or the heading does not change aftermaking turns, there may be a strongmagnetic field interfering with thecompass. Such interference maybe caused by a magnetic CB or cellphone antenna mount, a magneticemergency light, magnetic note padholder, or any other magnetic item.Turn off the vehicle, move themagnetic item, then turn on thevehicle and calibrate the compass.

To calibrate the compass, use thefollowing procedure:

Compass Calibration Procedure

1. Before calibrating the compass,make sure the compass is set tothe variance zone in which thevehicle is located. See “CompassVariance (Zone) Procedure”earlier in this section.

Do not operate any switchessuch as window, sunroof, climatecontrols, seats, etc. during thecalibration procedure.

2. Press the vehicle informationbutton until PRESS V TOCALIBRATE COMPASSdisplays.

3. Press the set/reset button to startthe compass calibration.

4. The DIC will displayCALIBRATING COMPASS:TURN IN CIRCLES. Drive thevehicle in tight circles at less than5 mph (8 km/h) to complete thecalibration. The DIC will displayCOMPASS CALIBRATIONCOMPLETE for a few secondswhen the calibration is complete.The DIC display will then return tothe previous menu.

DIC Warnings andMessagesMessages are displayed on the DICto notify the driver that the statusof the vehicle has changed and thatsome action may be needed bythe driver to correct the condition.Multiple messages may appearone after another.

Some messages may not requireimmediate action, but you canpress any of the DIC buttons,or the trip odometer reset stemon the instrument panel cluster toacknowledge that you received themessages and to clear them fromthe display.

Some messages cannot be clearedfrom the DIC display because theyare more urgent. These messagesrequire action before they can becleared. Take any messages thatappear on the display seriouslyand remember that clearing themessages will only make themessages disappear, not correctthe problem.


The following are the possiblemessages that can be displayedand some information about them.

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVEThis message displays when thecharging system detects that thebattery is being drained. You maynotice that the vehicle attempts toreduce the drain for you by turningoff accessories, such as interior fans,rear defogger, and heated seats.Turn off all accessories. If the vehicleis not running, start and run theengine for at least 10 minutes toallow the battery to recharge. If theengine is running and the conditionpersists, see your dealer/retailerimmediately.

CALIBRATING COMPASS:TURN IN CIRCLESThis message displays whencalibrating the compass. Drivethe vehicle in circles at less than5 mph (8 km/h) to complete thecalibration. See DIC Compass onpage 3-47.

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONThis message displays when serviceis required for the vehicle. See yourdealer/retailer. See Engine Oilon page 5-14 and ScheduledMaintenance on page 6-3 formore information.

Acknowledging this message willnot reset the OIL LIFE REMAININGdisplay. That must be done at theOIL LIFE screen. See “OIL LIFE”under DIC Operation and Displayson page 3-42 and Engine Oil LifeSystem on page 5-16 for moreinformation.

CHANGE TRANSMISSIONFLUID

Notice: Use of the incorrectautomatic transmission fluidmay damage the vehicle, and thedamages may not be coveredby the vehicle’s warranty. Alwaysuse the automatic transmissionfluid listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants onpage 6-13.

This message displays when the lifeof the transmission fluid has expiredand it should be changed. SeeScheduled Maintenance on page 6-3and Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-13 for theproper fluid and change intervals.


CHECK TIRE PRESSUREOn vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when the pressurein one or more of the vehicle’s tiresneeds to be checked. This messagealso displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHTFRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHTREAR to indicate which tire needs tobe checked. You can receive morethan one tire pressure message at atime. To read the other messagesthat may have been sent at the sametime, press the set/reset button. If atire pressure message appears onthe DIC, stop as soon as you can.Have the tire pressures checkedand set to those shown on the TireLoading Information label. See Tireson page 5-43, Loading the Vehicleon page 4-28, and Inflation - TirePressure on page 5-49. The DICalso shows the tire pressure values.See DIC Operation and Displays onpage 3-42. If the tire pressure is low,the low tire pressure warning lightcomes on. See Tire Pressure Lighton page 3-34.

COMPASS CALIBRATIONCOMPLETEThis message displays when thecompass calibration is complete.See DIC Compass on page 3-47.

CRUISE CONTROL SETTO XXXThis message displays wheneverthe cruise control is set. See CruiseControl on page 3-9 for moreinformation.

DRIVER DOOR OPENThis message displays when thedriver door is not closed properly.Close the door completely.

ENGINE HOT A/C(Air Conditioning) OFFThis message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature.To avoid added strain on a hot

engine, the air conditioningcompressor is automatically turnedoff. When the coolant temperaturereturns to normal, the A/C operationautomatically resumes. You cancontinue to drive your vehicle.

ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLEENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehiclewhile the engine is overheating,severe engine damage may occur.If an overheat warning appearson the instrument panel clusterand/or DIC, stop the vehicle assoon as possible. Do not increasethe engine speed above normalidling speed. See EngineOverheating on page 5-25 formore information.

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature istoo hot. Stop and allow the vehicleto idle until it cools down.


ENGINE OVERHEATEDSTOP ENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehiclewhile the engine is overheating,severe engine damage may occur.If an overheat warning appearson the instrument panel clusterand/or DIC, stop the vehicleas soon as possible. See EngineOverheating on page 5-25 formore information.

This message displays along with acontinuous chime when the enginehas overheated. Stop and turn theengine off immediately to avoidsevere engine damage. See EngineOverheating on page 5-25.

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCEDThis message displays when thevehicle’s engine power is reduced.Reduced engine power can affectthe vehicle’s ability to accelerate.If this message is on, but there is noreduction in performance, proceed toyour destination. The performancemay be reduced the next time thevehicle is driven. The vehicle maybe driven at a reduced speed whilethis message is on, but accelerationand speed may be reduced. Anytimethis message stays on, the vehicleshould be taken to your dealer/retailer for service as soon aspossible.

FUEL LEVEL LOWThis message displays when yourvehicle is low on fuel. Refill thefuel tank as soon as possible.See Fuel Gage on page 3-41 andFilling the Tank on page 5-8 formore information.

HOOD OPENIf your vehicle has the remote startfeature, this message displays alongwith a chime when the hood is notclosed properly. Make sure thatthe hood is closed completely.See Hood Release on page 5-11.This message displays while theignition is in ON/RUN. Press anyof the DIC buttons to acknowledgethis message and to clear it fromthe screen.

This message continues to displayfor two seconds if it has not beenacknowledged when the engine isturned off. The message comes backon for two seconds if it has beenacknowledged, but the conditionstill exists when the engine is turnedoff. If the condition still exists, themessage reappears when the engineis turned on.


ICE POSSIBLE DRIVEWITH CAREThis message displays when theoutside air temperature is coldenough to create icy roadconditions. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.

LIFTGATE OPENThis message displays when theliftgate is not closed completely.Close the liftgate completely.See Liftgate on page 2-9.

OIL PRESSURE LOW STOPENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehiclewhile the engine oil pressureis low, severe engine damagemay occur. If a low oil pressurewarning appears on the DriverInformation Center (DIC), stopthe vehicle as soon as possible.

Do not drive the vehicle until thecause of the low oil pressureis corrected. See Engine Oil onpage 5-14 for more information.

This message displays when thevehicle’s engine oil pressure is low.The oil pressure light also appearson the instrument panel cluster.See Oil Pressure Light on page 3-37.

Stop the vehicle immediately,as engine damage can resultfrom driving a vehicle with low oilpressure. Have the vehicle servicedby your dealer/retailer as soon aspossible when this message isdisplayed.

PASSENGER DOOR OPENThis message displays when oneor more of the passenger doorsare not closed properly. Close thedoors completely.

REMOTE KEY LEARNINGACTIVEThis message displays whilematching a Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter to yourvehicle. See “MATCHINGTRANSMITTERS TO YOURVEHICLE” under Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2-4 and DIC Operation andDisplays on page 3-42 for moreinformation.

REMOTE KEY LEARNINGCOMPLETEThis message displays whilematching a Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter to your vehicle.See “MATCHING TRANSMITTERSTO YOUR VEHICLE” under RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2-4 and DICOperation and Displays onpage 3-42 for more information.


REPLACE REMOTE KEY FOBBATTERYThis message displays if a RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitterbattery is low. The battery needsto be replaced in the transmitter.See “Battery Replacement” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-4.

SERVICE A/C(Air Conditioning) SYSTEMThis message displays when thereis a problem detected in the airconditioning system. Have thevehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.

SERVICE AIR BAGThis message displays whenthere is a problem with the airbagsystem. Have your vehicle servicedby your dealer/retailer immediately.See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 3-29 for more information.

SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEMThis message displays along withthe brake system warning light ifthere is a problem with the brakesystem or when the brake fluid levelis low. See Brake System WarningLight on page 3-31. Have the brakesystem serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.

SERVICE POWER STEERINGIf the vehicle has electric powersteering, this message displays ifa problem has been detected withthe power steering. See Steeringon page 4-9 for more information.

SERVICE STABILITRAKThis message displays if therehas been a problem detected withStabiliTrak®. A warning light alsoappears on the instrument panelcluster. See StabiliTrak® IndicatorLight on page 3-33. See StabiliTrak®

System on page 4-7 for moreinformation.

If this message turns on while youare driving, pull off the road as soonas possible and stop carefully. Tryresetting the system by turning theignition off and then back on. If thismessage still stays on or turns backon again while you are driving, yourvehicle needs service. Have thesystem inspected by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.

SERVICE TIRE MONITORINGSYSTEMOn vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays if a part on theTPMS is not working properly.The tire pressure light also flashesand then remains on during thesame ignition cycle. See TirePressure Light on page 3-34.Several conditions may causethis message to appear. See TirePressure Monitor Operation onpage 5-53 for more information.If the warning comes on and stayson, there may be a problem with theTPMS. See your dealer/retailer.


SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROLThis message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS) is notfunctioning properly. A warning lightalso appears on the instrument panelcluster. See Traction Control System(TCS) Warning Light on page 3-33and Traction Control System (TCS)on page 4-8 for more information.Have the TCS serviced by yourdealer/retailer as soon as possible.

SERVICE TRANSMISSIONThis message displays when thereis a problem with the transmission.See your dealer/retailer for service.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOONThis message displays whena non-emissions related malfunctionoccurs. Have the vehicle servicedby your dealer/retailer as soonas possible.

STABILITRAK NOT READYIf your vehicle has StabiliTrak,this message may display and theStabiliTrak indicator light on theinstrument panel cluster may be onafter first driving the vehicle andexceeding 20 mph (32 km/h) for30 seconds. The StabiliTrak systemis not functional until the light hasturned off. See StabiliTrak® Systemon page 4-7 for more information.

STABILITRAK OFFIf your vehicle has StabiliTrak, thismessage displays when you turn offthe StabiliTrak, or when the stabilitycontrol has been automaticallydisabled. To limit wheel spin andrealize the full benefits of the stabilityenhancement system, you shouldnormally leave StabiliTrak on.However, you should turn StabiliTrakoff if your vehicle gets stuck in sand,mud, ice, or snow and you want torock your vehicle to attempt to free it,

or if you are driving in extremeoff-road conditions and require morewheel spin. See If Your Vehicle isStuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow onpage 4-27. To turn the StabiliTraksystem on or off, see StabiliTrak®

System on page 4-7.

TIGHTEN GAS CAPThis message may display alongwith the check engine light on theinstrument panel cluster if thevehicle’s fuel cap is not tightenedproperly. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 3-35. Reinstall thefuel cap fully. See Filling the Tankon page 5-8. The diagnostic systemcan determine if the fuel cap hasbeen left off or improperly installed.A loose or missing fuel cap allowsfuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. A few driving tripswith the cap properly installed shouldturn this light and message off.


TIRE LEARNING ACTIVEOn vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when the TPMSis re-learning the tire positions onyour vehicle. The tire positions mustbe re-learned after rotating the tiresor after replacing a tire or sensor.See Tire Inspection and Rotationon page 5-56, Tire PressureMonitor System on page 5-51,and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-49 for more information.

TRACTION CONTROL OFFThis message displays whenthe Traction Control System (TCS)turns off. See StabiliTrak® Systemon page 4-7 for more information.

This message only displayswhile the ignition is in ON/RUNand disappears after 10 seconds,unless it is acknowledged or anurgent warning appears.

Any of the following conditions maycause the TCS to turn off:

• The TCS is turned off by pressingthe TCS/StabiliTrak button.See StabiliTrak® System onpage 4-7 for more information.

• The battery is low.

• There is a TCS failure. See yourdealer/retailer for service.

TRACTION CONTROL ONThis message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS) turnson. See StabiliTrak® System onpage 4-7 for more information.

TRANSMISSION HOT IDLEENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehiclewhile the transmission fluid isoverheating and the transmissiontemperature warning is displayedon the instrument panel clusterand/or DIC, you can damage thetransmission. This could lead tocostly repairs that would not becovered by your warranty. Do notdrive your vehicle with overheatedtransmission fluid or while thetransmission temperature warningis displayed.

This message displays along with achime if the transmission fluid in thevehicle gets hot. Driving with thetransmission fluid temperature highcan cause damage to the vehicle.Stop the vehicle and let it idle toallow the transmission to cool.This message clears and the chimestops when the fluid temperaturereaches a safe level.


TURN SIGNAL ONThis message displays and a chimesounds as a reminder to turn off theturn signal if you drive your vehiclefor more than about 3/4 mile (1.2 km)with a turn signal on. See Turn andLane-Change Signals on page 3-6for more information.

DIC VehicleCustomizationYour vehicle may havecustomization capabilities thatallow you to program certainfeatures to one preferred setting.Customization features can only beprogrammed to one setting on thevehicle and cannot be programmedto a preferred setting for two differentdrivers.

All of the customization options maynot be available on your vehicle.Only the options available willbe displayed on the DIC.

The default settings for thecustomization features were setwhen your vehicle left the factory,but may have been changedfrom their default state since then.

The customization preferencesare automatically recalled.

To change customizationpreferences, use the followingprocedure.

Entering the FeatureSettings Menu1. Turn the ignition on and place

the vehicle in P (Park).To avoid excessive drain on thebattery, it is recommended thatthe headlamps are turned off.

2. Press the customization buttonto scroll through the availablecustomizable options.

Feature Settings Menu ItemsThe following are customizationfeatures that allow you to programsettings to the vehicle:

DISPLAY IN ENGLISH

This feature will only display if alanguage other than English hasbeen set. This feature allows you tochange the language in which theDIC messages appear to English.

Press the customization buttonuntil the PRESS V TO DISPLAY INENGLISH screen appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to display all DICmessages in English.


DISPLAY LANGUAGE

This feature allows you to select thelanguage in which the DIC messageswill appear.

Press the customization button untilthe PRESS V TO SET DISPLAYLANGUAGE screen appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

ENGLISH (default): All messageswill appear in English.

FRANCAIS: All messages willappear in French.

ESPANOL: All messages willappear in Spanish.

PORTUGUESE: All messages willappear in Portuguese.

NO CHANGE: No change will bemade to this feature. The currentsetting will remain.

To select a setting, press theset/reset button while the desiredsetting is displayed on the DIC.

AUTO DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhen the vehicle’s doors willautomatically lock. See AutomaticDoor Lock on page 2-8 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilPRESS V TO SET AUTO DOORLOCK appears on the DIC display.Press the set/reset button once

to access the settings forthis feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default):The doors will automatically lockwhen the vehicle is shifted out ofP (Park).

AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doorswill automatically lock when thevehicle speed is above 8 mph(13 km/h) for three seconds.




AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not to turn off theautomatic door unlocking feature.It also allows you to select whichdoors and when the doors willautomatically unlock. See AutomaticDoor Unlock on page 2-8 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilPRESS V TO SET AUTO DOORUNLOCK appears on the DICdisplay. Press the set/reset buttononce to access the settings forthis feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: None of the doors willautomatically unlock.

DRIVER DOOR AT KEY OUT: Onlythe driver’s door will unlock whenthe key is taken out of the ignition.

DRIVER DOOR IN PARK: Only thedriver’s door will unlock when thevehicle is shifted into P (Park).

ALL DOORS AT KEY OUT: All ofthe doors will unlock when the key istaken out of the ignition.

ALL DOORS IN PARK (default):All of the doors will unlock when thevehicle is shifted into P (Park).



REMOTE DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to selectthe type of feedback you will receivewhen locking the vehicle with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receivefeedback when locking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter if the doorsare open. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operationon page 2-4 for more information.

Press the customization button untilPRESS V TO SET REMOTE DOORLOCK appears on the DIC display.Press the set/reset button once toaccess the settings for this feature.Then press the customization buttonto scroll through the followingsettings:

VERIFICATION OFF: There will beno feedback when you press thelock button on the RKE transmitter.


VERIFICATION LIGHTS ONLY: Theexterior lamps will flash when youpress the lock button on the RKEtransmitter.

VERIFICATION HORN ONLY:The horn will sound on the secondpress of the lock button on theRKE transmitter.

VERIFICATION HORN & LIGHTS(default): The exterior lamps willflash when you press the lock buttonon the RKE transmitter, and the hornwill sound when the lock button ispressed again within five secondsof the previous command.

VERIFICATION NO CHANGE: Nochange will be made to this feature.The current setting will remain.


REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to selectthe type of feedback you will receivewhen unlocking the vehicle withthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receivefeedback when unlocking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter if the doorsare open. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2-4 for more information.

Press the customization buttonuntil PRESS V TO SET REMOTEDOOR UNLOCK appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settings

for this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

VERIF LIGHTS OFF: The exteriorlamps will not flash when you pressthe unlock button on the RKEtransmitter.

VERIF LIGHTS ON (default):The exterior lamps will flash whenyou press the unlock button onthe RKE transmitter.

VERIF NO CHANGE: No changewill be made to this feature.The current setting will remain.



DELAY DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not the locking of thevehicle’s doors will be delayed.When locking the doors with thepower door lock switch and a dooris open, this feature will delay lockingthe doors until five seconds afterthe last door is closed. You willhear three chimes to signal that thedelayed locking feature is in use.The key must be out of the ignitionfor this feature to work. You cantemporarily override delayed lockingby pressing the power door lockswitch twice or the lock button on theRKE transmitter twice. See DelayedLocking on page 2-8 for moreinformation.

Press the customization buttonuntil PRESS V TO SET DELAYDOOR LOCK appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: There will be no delayedlocking of the vehicle’s doors.

ON (default): The doors will notlock until five seconds after the lastdoor is closed.



EXIT LIGHTING

This feature allows you to select theamount of time you want the exteriorlamps to remain on when it is darkenough outside. This happens afterthe key is turned from ON/RUN toLOCK/OFF.

Press the customization button untilPRESS V TO SET EXIT LIGHTINGappears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to accessthe settings for this feature. Thenpress the customization button toscroll through the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lamps will notturn on.

10 SECONDS (default): Theexterior lamps will stay on for10 seconds.


30 SECONDS: The exterior lampswill stay on for 30 seconds.

2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps willstay on for two minutes.



APPROACH LIGHTING

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not to have the exteriorlights turn on briefly during lowlight periods after unlockingthe vehicle using the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

Press the customization button untilPRESS V TO SET APPROACHLIGHTING appears on the DICdisplay. Press the set/reset buttononce to access the settings for

this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lights will notturn on when you unlock the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.

ON (default): If it is dark enoughoutside, the exterior lights willturn on briefly when you unlock thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.

The lights will remain on for20 seconds or until the lock buttonon the RKE transmitter is pressed,or the vehicle is no longer off.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-4for more information.



CHIME VOLUME

This feature allows you to select thevolume level of the chime.

Press the customization button untilPRESS V TO SET CHIME VOLUMEappears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to accessthe settings for this feature. Thenpress the customization button toscroll through the following settings:

NORMAL: The chime volume willbe set to a normal level.

LOUD: The chime volume will beset to a loud level.


There is no default for chimevolume. The volume will stay atthe last known setting.



REMOTE START

If your vehicle has this feature,it allows you to turn the remote startoff or on. The remote start featureallows you to start the engine fromoutside of the vehicle using theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. See Remote VehicleStart on page 2-5 for moreinformation.

Press the customization buttonuntil PRESS V TO SET REMOTESTART appears on the DIC display.Press the set/reset button once toaccess the settings for this feature.Then press the customization buttonto scroll through the followingsettings:

OFF: The remote start feature willbe disabled.

ON (default): The remote startfeature will be enabled.



FACTORY SETTINGS

This feature allows you to set all ofthe customization features backto their factory default settings.

Press the customization buttonuntil PRESS V TO RESTOREDEFAULTS appears on the DICdisplay. Press the set/reset buttononce to access the settings forthis feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

RESTORE (default): Thecustomization features will be setto their factory default settings.

NO CHANGE: The customizationfeatures will not be set to theirfactory default settings.


EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS

This feature allows you to exit thefeature settings menu.

Press the customization buttonuntil PRESS V TO EXIT FEATURESETTINGS appears in the DICdisplay. Press the set/reset buttononce to exit the menu.

If you do not exit, pressingthe customization button againwill return you to the beginningof the feature settings menu.


Exiting the FeatureSettings MenuThe feature settings menu will beexited when any of the followingoccurs:

• The vehicle is no longer inON/RUN.

• The trip/fuel or vehicleinformation DIC buttonsare pressed.

• The end of the feature settingsmenu is reached and exited.

• A 40 second time period haselapsed with no selection made.

Audio System(s)Determine which radio the vehiclehas and read the following pages tobecome familiar with its features.

{ CAUTION

Taking your eyes off the roadfor extended periods could causea crash resulting in injury ordeath to you or others. Do notgive extended attention toentertainment tasks while driving.

This system provides access tomany audio and non audio listings.

To minimize taking your eyesoff the road while driving, do thefollowing while the vehicle is parked:

• Become familiar with theoperation and controls ofthe audio system.

• Set up the tone, speakeradjustments, and preset radiostations.

For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 4-3.

Notice: Contact your dealer/retailer before adding anyequipment.

Adding audio or communicationequipment could interfere with theoperation of the vehicle’s engine,radio, or other systems, and coulddamage them. Follow federalrules covering mobile radioand telephone equipment.

Notice: The chime signalsrelated to safety belts, parkingbrake, and other functions ofyour vehicle operate throughthe radio/entertainment system.If that equipment is replaced oradditional equipment is addedto your vehicle, the chimesmay not work. Make sure thatreplacement or additionalequipment is compatible withyour vehicle before installing it.See Accessories andModifications on page 5-3.


The vehicle has Retained AccessoryPower (RAP). With RAP, the audiosystem can be played even after theignition is turned off. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 2-17 for more information.

Setting the ClockRadio with Single CD (MP3)PlayerTo set the time and date:

1. Turn the ignition key toACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.Press O to turn the radio on.

2. Press H and the HR, MIN, MM,DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month,day, and year) displays.

3. Press the softkey located belowany one of the tabs that youwant to change.

4. To increase the time or date doone of the following:

• Press the softkey locatedbelow the selected tab.

• Press ¨SEEK, or \ FWD.

• Turn f clockwise.

5. To decrease the time or date doone of the following:

• Press ©SEEK or s REV.

• Turn f counterclockwise.

The date does not automaticallydisplay. To see the date press Hwhile the radio is on. The date withdisplay times out after a few secondsand goes back to the normal radioand time display.

To change the time default settingfrom 12 hour to 24 hour or tochange the date default setting frommonth/day/year to day/month/year:

1. Press H and then the softkeylocated below the forward arrowlabel. Once the time 12H and24H, and the date MM/DD/YYYY(month, day, and year) andDD/MM/YYYY (day, month,and year) displays.

2. Press the softkey located belowthe desired option.

3. Press H again to apply theselected default, or let thescreen time out.


Six-Disc CD (MP3) PlayerTo set the time and date:

1. Turn the ignition key toACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.Press O to turn the radio on.

2. Press MENU.

3. Press the softkey belowthe H tab. The HR, MIN, MM,DD, YYYY displays.

4. Press the softkey below any oneof the tabs you want to change.

5. To increase the time or datedo one of the following:

• Press the softkey locatedbelow the selected tab.

• Press ¨SEEK, or \ FWD.

• Turn f clockwise.

6. To decrease the time or datedo one of the following:

• Press ©SEEK or s REV.

• Turn f counterclockwise.

The date does not automaticallydisplay. To see the date press MENUand then softkey below the H tabwhile the radio is on. The date withdisplay times out after a few secondsand goes back to the normal radioand time display.

To change the time default settingfrom 12 hour to 24 hour or tochange the date default setting frommonth/day/year to day/month/year:

1. Press MENU, and then thesoftkey below the H tab.The HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYYdisplays.

2. Press the softkey below theforward arrow tab. The time12H and 24H, and the dateMM/DD/YYYY (month, day,and year) and DD/MM/YYYY(day, month, and year) displays.

3. Press the softkey located belowthe desired option.

4. Press MENU again to applythe selected default, or letthe screen time out.


Radio(s)

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio DataSystem (RDS). The RDS feature isavailable for use only on FM stationsthat broadcast RDS information.This system relies upon receivingspecific information from these

stations and only works when theinformation is available. While theradio is tuned to an FM-RDS station,the station name or call lettersdisplays. In rare cases, a radiostation can broadcast incorrect

information that causes the radiofeatures to work improperly. If thishappens, contact the radio station.

Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press to turnthe system on and off.

Turn to increase or decrease thevolume.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press to switch betweenAM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped).

f (Tune): Turn to select radiostations.

©SEEK ¨: Press to go to theprevious or to the next station.

To scan stations, press and holdeither arrow for a few seconds untila beep sounds. The radio goesto a station, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station.Press either arrow again to stopscanning.

Radio with CD shown, Radio with Six-Disc CD similar


The radio only seeks and scansstations with a strong signal thatare in the selected band.

4 (Information) (XM™ SatelliteRadio Service, MP3, and RDSFeatures): Press to displayadditional text information relatedto the current FM-RDS station, XMstation, or MP3 song. If information isavailable, the song title informationdisplays on the top line of the displayand artist information displays on thebottom line. When information is notavailable, “NO INFO” displays.

Storing a Radio Station as aFavoriteDrivers are encouraged to set uptheir radio station favorites while thevehicle is parked. Tune to favoritestations using the presets, favoritesbutton, and steering wheel controls,if the vehicle has them. SeeDefensive Driving on page 4-3.

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of36 stations can be programmed asfavorites using the six pushbuttonspositioned below the radio stationfrequency labels and by using theFAV button (radio favorites page).Press the FAV button to go throughup to six pages of favorites, eachhaving six favorite stations availableper page. Each page of favorites cancontain any combination of AM, FM,or XM stations. To store a station asa favorite:

1. Tune to the desired radio station.

2. Press the FAV button todisplay the page wherethe station is to be stored.

3. Press and hold one of thesix pushbuttons until a beepsounds. When that pushbuttonis pressed and released, thestation that was set, returns.

4. Repeat the steps for eachpushbutton radio station tobe stored as a favorite.

The number of favorites pages canbe setup using the MENU button.To setup the number of favoritespages:

1. Press the MENU button todisplay the radio setup menu.

2. Press the pushbutton locatedbelow the FAV 1-6 label.

3. Select the desired number offavorites pages by pressingthe pushbutton located belowthe displayed page numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or letthe menu time out, to return tothe original main radio screenshowing the radio stationfrequency tabs and to beginthe process of programmingfavorites for the chosen amountof numbered pages.


Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)

BASS/MID/TREB (Bass,Midrange, or Treble): To adjustbass, midrange, or treble, pressthe f knob until the tone controltabs display. Continue pressing tohighlight the desired tab, or pressthe pushbutton positioned underthe desired tab. Turn the f knobto adjust the highlighted setting.Bass, midrange, or treble can alsobe adjusted by pressing eitherSEEK arrow, \ FWD, or s REVwhen the setting is highlighted untilthe desired level is obtained. If astation’s frequency is weak, or hasstatic, decrease the treble.

To quickly adjust bass, midrange, ortreble to the middle position, pressthe pushbutton positioned under theBASS, MID, or TREB tab for morethan two seconds. A beep soundsand the level adjusts to the middleposition.

To quickly adjust all tone andspeaker controls to the middleposition, press the f knob formore than two seconds until abeep sounds.

EQ (Equalization): Press to selectpreset equalization settings.

To return to the manual mode,press the EQ button until Manualdisplays or manually adjust thebass, midrange, or treble bypressing the f knob.

Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade)

BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade):To adjust balance or fade, press thetune knob until the speaker controllabels display. Continue pressing tohighlight the desired tab, or pressthe pushbutton positioned underthe desired label. Turn the f knobclockwise or counterclockwise toadjust the highlighted setting.The highlighted setting can alsobe adjusted by pressing eitherSEEK arrow, \ FWD, or s REVuntil the desired levels are obtained.

To quickly adjust balance or fadeto the middle position, press thepushbutton positioned under theBAL or FADE label for more thantwo seconds. A beep sounds and thelevel adjusts to the middle position.

To quickly adjust all speaker andtone controls to the middle position,press the f knob for more thantwo seconds until a beep sounds.


Finding a Category (CAT)Station

CAT (Category): The CAT buttonis used to find XM stations whenthe radio is in the XM mode. To findXM channels within a desiredcategory, perform the following:

1. Press the BAND button until theXM frequency displays. Pressthe CAT button to display thecategory tabs on the radiodisplay. Continue pressing theCAT button until the desiredcategory name displays.

2. Press either of the two buttonsbelow the desired categorytab to immediately tune to thefirst XM station associatedwith that category.

3. Turn the f knob, press thebuttons below the right or leftarrows displayed, or press eitherSEEK arrow to go to the previousor to the next XM station withinthe selected category.

4. To exit the category searchmode, press the FAV buttonor BAND button to displayfavorites again.

Undesired XM categories can beremoved through the setup menu.To remove an undesired category:

1. Press the MENU button todisplay the radio setup menu.

2. Press the pushbutton locatedbelow the XM CAT tab.

3. Turn the f knob to display thecategory to be removed.

4. Press the pushbutton locatedunder the Remove tab untilthe category name along withthe word Removed displays.

5. Repeat the steps to removemore categories.

Removed categories can berestored by pressing the pushbuttonunder the Add tab when a removedcategory is displayed or by pressingthe pushbutton under the RestoreAll tab.

The radio does not allow categoriesto be removed or added while thevehicle is moving faster than 5 mph(8 km/h).

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM is a satellite radio servicethat is based in the 48 contiguousUnited States and 10 Canadianprovinces. XM Satellite Radiohas a wide variety of programmingand commercial-free music,coast-to-coast, and in digital-qualitysound. During your trial or whenyou subscribe, you will get unlimitedaccess to XM Radio Online for whenyou are not in the vehicle. A servicefee is required to receive the XMservice. For more information,contact XM at xmradio.com or call1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. andxmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 inCanada.


Radio Messages for XM Only

See XM Radio Messages onpage 3-79 later in this sectionfor further detail.

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audiosystem has been calibrated for thevehicle from the factory. If CalibrationError displays, it means that the radiohas not been configured properly forthe vehicle and it must be returnedto your dealer/retailer for service.

Locked: This message displayswhen the THEFTLOCK® system haslocked up the radio. Take the vehicleto your dealer/retailer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if anerror cannot be corrected, contactyour dealer/retailer.

Playing a CD(Single CD Player)Insert a CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pullsit in and the CD should beginplaying.

Playing a CD(s)(Six-Disc CD Player)

LOAD ^ : Press to load CDs intothe CD player. This CD playerholds up to six CDs.

To insert one CD:

1. Press and release the ^ button.

2. Wait for the message to insertthe disc.

3. Load a CD. Insert the CDpartway into the slot, label sideup. The player pulls the CD in.

To insert multiple CDs:

1. Press and hold the ^ button fortwo seconds. A beep sounds andLoad All Discs displays.

2. Follow the displayed instructionon when to insert the discs. TheCD player takes up to six CDs.

3. Press the ^ button againto cancel loading more CDs.

If the ignition or radio is turned off,with a CD in the player, it stays in theplayer. When the ignition or radio isturned on, the CD starts playingwhere it stopped, if it was the lastselected audio source.

When a CD is inserted, the CDsymbol displays on the CD. As eachnew track starts to play, the tracknumber displays.

The CD player can play the smaller3 inch (8 cm) single CDs with anadapter ring. Full-size CDs andthe smaller CDs are loaded inthe same manner.


Care of CDs

If playing a CD-R, the sound qualitycan be reduced due to CD-R quality,the method of recording, the qualityof the music that has been recorded,and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. Handle them carefully.Store CD-R(s) in their original casesor other protective cases and awayfrom direct sunlight and dust. The CDplayer scans the bottom surface ofthe disc. If the surface of a CD isdamaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD does not playproperly or not at all. Do not touchthe bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage thesurface. Pick up CDs by graspingthe outer edges or the edge of thehole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a CD is soiled, takea soft, lint free cloth or dampen aclean, soft cloth in a mild, neutraldetergent solution mixed with water,and clean it. Make sure the wipingprocess starts from the center tothe edge.

Care of the CD Player

Do not add any label to a CD, itcould get caught in the CD player.If a CD is recorded on a personalcomputer and a description labelis needed, try labeling the top of therecorded CD with a marking pen.

To prevent contaminating the lens ofthe disc optics with lubricants internalto the player mechanism the use ofdisc lens cleaners is not advised.

Notice: If a label is added toa CD, or more than one CD isinserted into the slot at a time,or an attempt is made to playscratched or damaged CDs, theCD player could be damaged.While using the CD player, useonly CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD at atime, and keep the CD player andthe loading slot free of foreignmaterials, liquids, and debris.

If an error displays, see “CDMessages” later in this section.

Z EJECT: To eject the CD that iscurrently playing, press and releasethis button. A beep sounds andEjecting Disc displays. Once the discis ejected, Remove Disc displays.The CD can be removed. If the CD isnot removed, after several seconds,the CD automatically pulls back intothe player and begins playing.

For the Six-Disc CD player, pressand hold Z for two seconds to ejectall discs.

f (Tune): Turn to select tracks onthe CD currently playing.

©SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow togo to the start of the current track, ifmore than ten seconds have played.Press the right arrow to go to thenext track. If either the left or rightarrow is held, or pressed multipletimes, the player continues movingbackward or forward through thetracks on the CD.


s REV (Fast Reverse): Pressand hold to reverse playback quicklywithin a track. Sound is heard at areduced volume. Release to resumeplaying the track. The elapsed timeof the track displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly within a track. Sound isheard at a reduced volume. Releaseto resume playing the track. Theelapsed time of the track displays.

RDM (Random): With the randomsetting, the tracks can be listenedto in random, rather than sequentialorder, on one CD or all CDs in asix-disc CD player.

To use random:

• Press the pushbutton positionedunder the RDM tab until RandomCurrent Disc displays to playthe tracks from a CD in randomorder. Press again to turn offrandom play.

• Press the pushbutton positionedunder the RDM tab untilRandomize All Discs displaysto play tracks from all CDs loadedin a six-disc CD player in randomorder. Press again to turn offrandom play.

BAND: Press to listen to theradio when a CD is playing. The CDremains inside the radio for futurelistening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press toplay a CD when listening to the radio.The CD icon and track numberdisplays when a CD is in the player.

The radio system has an auxiliaryinput jack located on the lower rightside of the faceplate. An externalaudio device such as a portableaudio player can be connected tothe auxiliary input jack for use asanother source for playing CDs.

Press the CD/AUX button again andthe system begins playing audio fromthe connected portable audio player.If a portable audio player is notconnected, “No Input Device Found”displays.

Playing an MP3 CD-R orCD-RW DiscThe vehicle’s radio system mayhave the MP3 feature. If it has thisfeature, it is capable of playing anMP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc. For moreinformation on how to play an MP3CD-R or CD-RW disc, see Using anMP3 on page 3-75 later in thissection.


CD Messages

CHECK DISC: If this messagedisplays and/or the CD comes out,it could be:

• It is very hot. When thetemperature returns to normal,the CD should play.

• The road is very rough. Whenthe road becomes smoother,the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, waitabout an hour and try again.

• There could have been a problemwhile burning the CD.

• The label could be caught in theCD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly,for any other reason, try a knowngood CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or ifan error cannot be corrected, contactyour dealer/retailer. If the radio

displays an error message, write itdown and provide it to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.

Using the Auxiliary Input JackThe radio system has an auxiliaryinput jack located on the lower rightside of the faceplate. This is notan audio output; do not plug theheadphone set into the front auxiliaryinput jack. An external audio devicesuch as an iPod™, laptop computer,MP3 player, CD changer, etc. can beconnected to the auxiliary input jackfor use as another audio source.

Drivers are encouraged to set upany auxiliary device while the vehicleis in P (Park). See Defensive Drivingon page 4-3 for more information ondriver distraction.To use a portable audio player,connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 inch) cableto the radio’s front auxiliary inputjack. When a device is connected,press the radio CD/AUX button tobegin playing audio from the deviceover the vehicle speakers.

O (Power/Volume): Turn toincrease or decrease the volumeof the portable player. Additionalvolume adjustments might have tobe made from the portable deviceif the volume is not loud or softenough.

BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhen a portable audio device isplaying. The portable audio devicecontinues playing.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press toplay a CD when a portable audiodevice is playing. Press again andthe system begins playing audio fromthe connected portable audio player.If a portable audio player is notconnected, “No Input Device Found”displays.


Using an MP3MP3 CD-R or CD-RW DiscThe radio plays MP3 files that wererecorded on a CD-R or CD-RW disc.The files can be recorded with thefollowing fixed bit rates: 32 kbps,40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps,96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps,160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps,256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variablebit rate. Song title, artist name, andalbum are available for display by theradio when recorded using ID3 tagsversion 1 and 2.

Compressed Audio

The radio also plays discs thatcontain both uncompressed CDaudio (.CDA files) and MP3 files.By default the radio reads only theuncompressed audio and ignorethe MP3 files. Pressing the CAT(category) button toggles betweencompressed and uncompressedaudio format.

MP3 Format

To burn an MP3 disc on a personalcomputer:

• Make sure the MP3 filesare recorded on a CD-Ror CD-RW disc.

• Do not mix standard audio andMP3 files on one disc.

• The CD player is able toread and play a maximum of50 folders, 50 playlists, and255 files.

• Create a folder structure thatmakes it easy to find songs whiledriving. Organize songs byalbums using one folder for eachalbum. Each folder or albumshould contain 18 songs or less.

• Avoid subfolders. The systemcan support up to eight subfoldersdeep, however, keep the totalnumber of folders to a minimumin order to reduce the complexityand confusion in trying to locate aparticular folder during playback.

• Make sure playlists have a .mp3or .wpl extension, other fileextensions may not work.

• Minimize the length of the file,folder or playlist names. Long file,folder, or playlist names, or acombination of a large number offiles and folders, or playlists cancause the player to be unable toplay up to the maximum numberof files, folders, playlists, orsessions. To play a large numberof files, folders, playlists orsessions, minimize the length ofthe file, folder, or playlist name.Long names also take up morespace on the display, potentiallygetting cut off.

• Finalize the audio disc beforeburning it. Trying to add music toan existing disc can cause thedisc not to function in the player.


Playlists can be changed by usingthe previous and next folder buttons,the tune knob, or the SEEK arrows.An MP3 CD-R or CD-RW that wasrecorded using no file folders canalso be played. If a CD-R or CD-RWcontains more than the maximum of50 folders, 50 playlists, and 255 files,the player can access and navigateup to the maximum, but all items overthe maximum are not accessible.

Root Directory

The root directory of the CD-Ror CD-RW is treated as a folder.If the root directory has compressedaudio files, the directory displaysas F1 ROOT. All files containeddirectly under the root directory areaccessed prior to any root directoryfolders. However, playlists (Px) arealways accessed before root foldersor files.

Empty Directory or Folder

If a root directory or a folder existssomewhere in the file structure thatcontains only folders/subfolders and

no compressed files directly beneaththem, the player advances to thenext folder in the file structure thatcontains compressed audio files.The empty folder does not display.

No Folder

When the CD contains onlycompressed files, the files arelocated under the root folder.The next and previous folderfunctions do not display on a CDthat was recorded without foldersor playlists. When displayingthe name of the folder the radiodisplays ROOT.

When the CD contains only playlistsand compressed audio files, but nofolders, all files are located under theroot folder. The folder down and upbuttons searches playlists (Px) firstand then go to the root folder. Whenthe radio displays the name of thefolder the radio displays ROOT.

Order of Play

Tracks recorded to the CD-R orCD-RW are played in the followingorder:

• Play begins from the first trackin the first playlist and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach playlist. When the last trackof the last playlist has played, playcontinues from the first track ofthe first playlist.

• Play begins from the first trackin the first folder and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach folder. When the last track ofthe last folder has been played,play continues from the first trackof the first folder.

When play enters a new folder,the display does not automaticallyshow the new folder name unlessthe folder mode is chosen as thedefault display. The new trackname displays.


File System and Naming

The song name that is displayed isthe song name that is contained inthe ID3 tag. If the song name is notpresent in the ID3 tag, then the radiodisplays the file name without theextension (such as .mp3) as thetrack name.

Track names longer than32 characters or four pages areshortened. Parts of words on thelast page of text and the extensionof the filename does not display.

Preprogrammed Playlists

Preprogrammed playlists thatwere created by WinAmp™,MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed, however,they cannot be edited using theradio. These playlists are treatedas special folders containingcompressed audio song files.

Playing an MP3

Insert a CD-R or CD-RW partwayinto the slot (Single CD Player), orpress the ^ button and wait for themessage to insert disc (Six-Disc CDPlayer), label side up. The playerpulls it in, and the CD-R or CD-RWshould begin playing.

If the ignition or radio is turned offwith a CD-R or CD-RW in the player,it stays in the player. When theignition or radio is turned on, theCD-R or CD-RW starts to play whereit stopped, if it was the last selectedaudio source.

As each new track starts to play,the track number and song titledisplays.

Z EJECT: Press and releaseto eject the CD-R or CD-RW that isplaying. A beep sounds and EjectingDisc displays. Once the disc isejected, Remove Disc displays.The CD-R or CD-RW can beremoved. If the CD-R or CD-RW isnot removed, after several seconds,the CD-R or CD-RW automaticallypulls back into the player and beginsplaying.

For the Six-Disc CD player, pressand hold this button for two secondsto eject all discs.

f (Tune): Turn to select MP3 fileson the CD-R or CD-RW currentlyplaying.

©SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow togo to the start of the current MP3 file,if more than ten seconds haveplayed. Press the right arrow to go tothe next MP3 file. If either arrow isheld or pressed multiple times, theplayer continues moving backward orforward through MP3 files on the CD.


Sc (Previous Folder): Pressthe pushbutton positioned underthe Folder label to go to thefirst track in the previous folder.

c T (Next Folder): Pressthe pushbutton positioned underthe Folder label to go to thefirst track in the next folder.

s REV (Reverse): Press and holdto reverse playback quickly withinan MP3 file. Sound is heard ata reduced volume. Releaseto resume playing the file. Theelapsed time of the file displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly within an MP3 file. Soundis heard at a reduced volume.Release to resume playing the file.The elapsed time of the file displays.

RDM (Random): With the randomsetting, the MP3 files on the CD-R orCD-RW can be listened to in random,rather than sequential order, onone CD-R/CD-RW or all discs in asix-disc CD player. To use random,do one of the following:

1. To play MP3 files from the CD-Ror CD-RW in random order,press the pushbutton positionedunder the RDM label untilRandom Current Disc displays.Press the same pushbuttonagain to turn off random play.

2. To play songs from all CDsloaded in a six-disc CD playerin random order, press thepushbutton positioned underthe RDM label until RandomizeAll Discs displays. Press thesame pushbutton again to turnoff random play.

h (Music Navigator): Usethe music navigator feature to playMP3 files on the CD-R or CD-RW inorder by artist or album. Press thepushbutton located below the musicnavigator label. The player scans thedisc to sort the files by artist andalbum ID3 tag information. It cantake several minutes to scan thedisc depending on the number ofMP3 files recorded to the CD-R orCD-RW. The radio can begin playingwhile it is scanning the disc in thebackground. When the scan isfinished, the CD-R or CD-RWbegins playing again.


Once the disc has been scanned, theplayer defaults to playing MP3 files inorder by artist. The current artistplaying is shown on the second lineof the display between the arrows.Once all songs by that artist areplayed, the player moves to the nextartist in alphabetical order on theCD-R/CD-RW and begins playingMP3 files by that artist. To listen toMP3 files by another artist, pressthe pushbutton located below eitherarrow button. The disc goes to thenext or previous artist in alphabeticalorder. Continue pressing eitherbutton until the desired artist isdisplayed.

To change from playback by artistto playback by album, press thepushbutton located below the SortBy label. From the sort screen, pushone of the buttons below the albumbutton. Press the pushbutton belowthe back label to return to the mainmusic navigator screen. Now thealbum name is displayed on thesecond line between the arrows andsongs from the current album begins

to play. Once all songs from thatalbum are played, the player movesto the next album in alphabeticalorder on the CD-R/CD-RW andbegins playing MP3 files fromthat album.

To exit music navigator mode, pressthe pushbutton below the Back labelto return to normal MP3 playback.

BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhile a CD is playing. The inactiveCD remains inside the radio forfuture listening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Pressto play a CD while listening to theradio. The CD icon and a messageshowing disc and/or track numberdisplays while a CD is in the player.Press this button again and thesystem automatically searches foran auxiliary input device such as aportable audio player. If a portableaudio player is not connected,“No Aux Input Device” displays.

XM Radio MessagesXL (Explicit Language Channels):These channels, or any others, canbe blocked at a customer’s request,by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

XM Updating: The encryption codein the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This processshould take no longer than30 seconds.

No XM Signal: The system isfunctioning correctly, but the vehicleis in a location that is blocking theXM™ signal. When the vehicle ismoved into an open area, the signalshould return.

Loading XM: The audio systemis acquiring and processing audioand text data. No action is needed.This message should disappearshortly.


Channel Off Air: This channel isnot currently in service. Tune into another channel.

Channel Unauth: This channelis blocked or cannot be receivedwith your XM Subscription package.

Channel Unavail: This previouslyassigned channel is no longerassigned. Tune to another station.If this station was one of the presets,choose another station for thatpreset button.

No Artist Info: No artist informationis available at this time on thischannel. The system is workingproperly.

No Title Info: No song titleinformation is available at thistime on this channel. The systemis working properly.

No CAT Info: No categoryinformation is available at thistime on this channel. The systemis working properly.

No Information: No text orinformational messages areavailable at this time on thischannel. The system is workingproperly.

CAT Not Found: There are nochannels available for the selectedcategory. The system is workingproperly.

XM Theftlocked: The XM receiverin the vehicle could have previouslybeen in another vehicle. For securitypurposes, XM receivers cannot beswapped between vehicles. If thismessage is received after having thevehicle serviced, check with yourdealer/retailer.

XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,this message alternates with theXM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.This label is needed to activate theservice.

Unknown: If this message isreceived when tuned to channel 0,there could be a receiver fault.Consult with your dealer/retailer.

Check XM Receivr: If thismessage does not clear within ashort period of time, the receivercould have a fault. Consult withyour dealer/retailer.

XM Not Available: If this messagedoes not clear within a shortperiod of time, the receiver couldhave a fault. Consult with yourdealer/retailer.


Navigation/Radio SystemFor vehicles with a navigationradio system, see the separateNavigation System manual.

Bluetooth®

Vehicles with a Bluetooth systemcan use a Bluetooth capable cellphone with a Hands Free Profileto make and receive phone calls.The system can be used whilethe key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY position. The rangeof the Bluetooth system can beup to 30 ft. (9.1 m). Not all phonessupport all functions, and not allphones are guaranteed to workwith the in-vehicle Bluetooth system.See gm.com/bluetooth for moreinformation on compatible phones.

Voice RecognitionThe Bluetooth system uses voicerecognition to interpret voicecommands to dial phone numbersand name tags.

Noise: Keep interior noise levels toa minimum. The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.

When to Speak: A short tonesounds after the system respondsindicating when it is waiting fora voice command. Wait untilthe tone and then speak.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio SystemWhen using the in-vehicle Bluetoothsystem, sound comes throughthe vehicle’s front audio systemspeakers and overrides the audio

system. Use the audio systemvolume knob, during a call,to change the volume level.The adjusted volume levelremains in memory for later calls.To prevent missed calls, a minimumvolume level is used if the volumeis turned down too low.

Bluetooth ControlsUse the buttons located on thesteering wheel to operate thein-vehicle Bluetooth system.See Audio Steering Wheel Controlson page 3-92 for more information.

J / 0 (Push To Talk): Press toanswer incoming calls, confirmsystem information, and to startspeech recognition.

− / K (Phone On Hook): Pressto end a call and to cancel anoperation.


PairingA Bluetooth enabled cell phone mustbe paired to the in-vehicle Bluetoothsystem first and then connected tothe vehicle before it can be used.See the cell phone manufacturersuser guide for Bluetooth functionsbefore pairing the cell phone. If aBluetooth phone is not connected,calls will be made using OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling, if available.Refer to the OnStar owner’s guidefor more information.

Pairing Information:

• Up to five cell phones canbe paired to the in-vehicleBluetooth system.

• The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

• The in-vehicle Bluetooth systemautomatically links with the firstavailable paired cell phone inthe order the phone was paired.

• Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the in-vehicleBluetooth system at a time.

• Pairing should only need to becompleted once, unless changesto the pairing information havebeen made or the phone isdeleted.

To link to a different paired phone,see Linking to a Different Phonelater in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press and hold J / 0 fortwo seconds. The systemresponds with “Ready”followed by a tone.

2. Say “Bluetooth”. The systemresponds with “Bluetoothready” followed by a tone.

3. Say “Pair”. The system respondswith instructions and a four digitPIN number. The PIN numberwill be used in Step 4.

4. Start the Pairing process on thecell phone that will be paired tothe vehicle. Reference thecell phone manufacturers userguide for information on thisprocess.Locate the device named“General Motors” in the list onthe cellular phone and follow theinstructions on the cell phoneto enter the four digit PIN numberthat was provided in Step 3.

5. The system prompts for aname for the phone. Use a namethat best describes the phone.This name will be used to indicatewhich phone is connected.The system then confirmsthe name provided.

6. The system responds with“<Phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.

7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 foradditional phones to be paired.


Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones



3. Say “List”. The system lists allthe paired Bluetooth devices.If a phone is connected tothe vehicle, the system willsay “Is connected” after theconnected phone.

Deleting a Paired Phone



3. Say “Delete”. The system askswhich phone to delete followedby a tone.

4. Say the name of the phone tobe deleted. If the phone name isunknown, use the “List” commandfor a list of all paired phones. Thesystem responds with “Would youlike to delete <phone name>?Yes or No” followed by a tone.

5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone.The system responds with“OK, deleting <phone name>”.

Linking to a Different Phone



3. Say “Change phone”.The system responds with“Please wait while I searchfor other phones”.

• If another phone is found,the response will be “<Phonename> is now connected”.

• If another phone is not found,the original phone remainsconnected.

Storing Name TagsThe system can store up to thirtyphone numbers as name tagsthat are shared between theBluetooth and OnStar systems.

The system uses the followingcommands to store and retrievephone numbers:

• Store

• Digit Store

• Directory


Using the Store Command

The store command allows aphone number to be stored withoutentering the digits individually.


2. Say “Store”. The systemresponds with “Store, numberplease” followed by a tone.

3. Say the complete phone numberto be stored at once with nopauses.

• If the system recognizesthe number it responds with“OK, Storing” and repeats thephone number.

• If the system is unsure itrecognizes the phone number,it responds with “Store” andrepeats the number followedby “Please say yes or no”.

If the number is correct, say“Yes”. If the number is notcorrect, say “No”. The systemwill ask for the number to bere-entered.

4. After the system stores thephone number, it respondswith “Please say the name tag”followed by a tone.

5. Say a name tag for thephone number. The nametag is recorded and the systemresponds with “About to store<name tag>. Does thatsound OK?”.

• If the name tag does not soundcorrect, say “No” and repeatStep 5.

• If the name tag soundscorrect, say “Yes” and thename tag is stored. After thenumber is stored the systemreturns to the main menu.

Using the Digit Store Command

The digit store command allowsa phone number to be storedby entering the digits individually.

1. Press and hold J / 0 fortwo seconds. The systemresponds with “Ready” followedby a tone.

2. Say “Digit Store”. The systemresponds with “Please say thefirst digit to store” followedby a tone.

3. Say the first digit to be stored.The system will repeat backthe digit it heard followed by atone. Continue entering digitsuntil the number to be storedis complete.

• If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system,say “Clear” at any timeto clear the last number.

• To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time and thesystem will repeat them.


4. After the complete numberhas been entered, say “Store”.The system responds with“Please say the name tag”followed by a tone.

5. Say a name tag for thephone number. The nametag is recorded and the systemresponds with “About to store<name tag>. Does thatsound OK?”.

• If the name tag does not soundcorrect, say “No” and repeatStep 5.

• If the name tag soundscorrect, say “Yes” and thename tag is stored. After thenumber is stored the systemreturns to the main menu.

Using the Directory Command

The directory command listsall of the name tags stored bythe system. To use the directorycommand:


2. Say “Directory”. The systemresponds with “Directory”and then plays back all of thestored name tags. When thelist is complete, the systemreturns to the main menu.

Deleting Name TagsThe system uses the followingcommands to delete name tags:

• Delete

• Delete all name tags

Using the Delete Command

The delete command allows specificname tags to be deleted.

To use the delete command:


2. Say “Delete”. The systemresponds with “Delete, please saythe name tag” followed by a tone.

3. Say the name tag to be deleted.The system responds with “Wouldyou like to delete, <name tag>?Please say yes or no”.

• If the name tag is correct, say“Yes” to delete the name tag.The system responds with“OK, deleting <name tag>,returning to the main menu.”

• If the name tag is incorrect,say “No”. The systemresponds with “No. OK,let’s try again, please saythe name tag.”


Using the Delete All Name TagsCommand

The delete all name tags commanddeletes all stored phone book nametags and route name tags for OnStar(if present).

To use the delete all name tagscommand:


2. Say “Delete all name tags”.The system responds with“You are about to delete allname tags stored in yourphone directory and your routedestination directory. Are yousure you want to do this? Pleasesay yes or no.”

• Say “Yes” to delete allname tags.

• Say “No” to cancel the functionand return to the main menu.

Making a CallCalls can be made using thefollowing commands:

• Dial

• Digit Dial

• Call

• Re-dial

Using the Dial Command


2. Say “Dial”. The system respondswith “Dial using <phone name>.“Number please” followed bya tone.

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing.

• If the system recognizes thenumber, it responds with “OK,Dialing” and dials the number.

• If the system does notrecognize the number, itconfirms the numbers followedby a tone. If the number iscorrect, say “Yes”. The systemresponds with “OK, Dialing”and dials the number. If thenumber is not correct, say“No”. The system will ask forthe number to be re-entered.

Using the Digit Dial Command


2. Say “Digit Dial”. The systemresponds with “Digit dial using<phone name>, please say thefirst digit to dial” followed bya tone.

3. Say the digits to be dialed one ata time. Following each digit, thesystem will repeat back the digit itheard followed by a tone.


4. Continue entering digits until thenumber to be dialed is complete.After the whole number has beenentered, say “Dial”. The systemresponds with “OK, Dialing” anddials the number.

• If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system,say “Clear” at any time toclear the last number.

• To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time and thesystem will repeat them.

Using the Call Command


2. Say “Call”. The system respondswith “Call using <phone name>.Please say the name tag”followed by a tone.

3. Say the name tag of the personto call.

• If the system clearlyrecognizes the name tag itresponds with “OK, calling,<name tag>” and dials thenumber.

• If the system is unsure itrecognizes the right nametag, it confirms the name tagfollowed by a tone. If the nametag is correct, say “Yes”.The system responds with“OK, calling, <name tag>” anddials the number. If the nametag is not correct, say “No”.The system will ask for thename tag to be re-entered.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Using the Re-dial Command


2. After the tone, say “Re-dial”.The system responds with“Re-dial using <phone name>”and dials the last numbercalled from the connectedBluetooth phone.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Receiving a CallWhen an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and aring tone is heard in the vehicle.

• Press J / 0 and begin speakingto answer the call.

• Press − / K to ignore a call.


Call WaitingCall waiting must be supported onthe Bluetooth phone and enabledby the wireless service carrierto work.

• Press J / 0 to answer anincoming call when another callis active. The original call isplaced on hold.

• Press J / 0 again to return to theoriginal call.

• To ignore the incoming call,continue with the original callwith no action.

• Press − / K to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to thecall on hold.

Three-Way CallingThree-Way Calling must besupported on the Bluetooth phoneand enabled by the wireless servicecarrier to work.

1. While on a call press J / 0.The system responds with“Ready” followed by a tone.

2. Say “Three-way call”. The systemresponds with “Three-way call,please say dial or call”.

3. Use the dial or call command todial the number of the third partyto be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press J / 0 to link all the callerstogether.

Ending a Call

Press − / K to end a call.

Muting a CallDuring a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so thatthe person on the other end ofthe call cannot hear them.

To Mute a call

1. Press J / 0. The systemresponds with “Ready” followedby a tone.

2. Say “Mute Call”. The systemresponds with “Call muted”.

To Cancel Mute


2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”.The system responds with“Resuming call”.


Transferring a CallAudio can be transferred betweenthe in-vehicle Bluetooth systemand the cell phone.

To Transfer Audio to the CellPhone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:


2. Say “Transfer Call.” The systemresponds with “Transferring call”and the audio will switch fromthe vehicle to the cell phone.

To Transfer Audio to theIn-Vehicle Bluetooth System

The cellular phone must be pairedand connected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes after thekey is turned to the ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY position.

During a call with the audio on thecell phone, press J / 0 for more thantwo seconds. The audio switchesfrom the cell phone to the vehicle.

Voice Pass-ThruVoice Pass-Thru allows access tothe voice recognition commands onthe cell phone. See the cell phonemanufacturers user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.

This feature can be used to verballyaccess contacts stored in the cellphone.



3. Say “Voice”. The systemresponds with “OK, accessing<phone name>”.

• The cell phone’s normalprompt messages will gothrough its cycle accordingto the phone’s operatinginstructions.


Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) TonesThe in-vehicle Bluetooth system cansend numbers and numbers storedas name tags during a call. This isused when calling a menu drivenphone system. Account numbers canbe programmed into the phonebookfor retrieval during menu driven calls.

Sending a Number During a Call


2. Say “Dial”. The system respondswith “Say a number to sendtones” followed by a tone.

3. Say the number to send.

• If the system clearlyrecognizes the numberit responds with “OK, SendingNumber” and the dial tonesare sent and the callcontinues.

• If the system is not sureit recognized the numberproperly, it responds “DialNumber, Please say yes orno?” followed by a tone. If thenumber is correct, say “Yes”.The system responds with“OK, Sending Number” andthe dial tones are sent and thecall continues.

Sending a Stored Name TagDuring a Call


2. Say “Send name tag.”The system responds with“Say a name tag to send tones”followed by a tone.

3. Say the name tag to send.

• If the system clearlyrecognizes the name tag itresponds with “OK, Sending<name tag>” and the dialtones are sent and thecall continues.

• If the system is not sure itrecognized the name tagproperly, it responds “Dial<name tag>, Please say yesor no?” followed by a tone.If the name tag is correct, say“Yes”. The system respondswith “OK, Sending <nametag>” and the dial tones aresent and the call continues.


Clearing the SystemUnless information is deleted outof the in-vehicle Bluetooth system,it will be retained indefinitely.This includes all saved name tagsin the phonebook and phone pairinginformation. For information on howto delete this information, see theabove sections on Deleting a PairedPhone and Deleting Name Tags.

Other InformationThe Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of suchmarks by General Motors is underlicense. Other trademarks andtrade names are those of theirrespective owners.




This device complies with RSS-210of Industry Canada. Operationis subject to the following twoconditions:


2. This device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of the device.


Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed todiscourage theft of the vehicle’sradio by learning a portion ofthe Vehicle Identification Number(VIN). The radio does not operateif it is stolen or moved to a differentvehicle.


Audio Steering WheelControls

Some audio controls can beadjusted at the steering wheel.They include the following:

+ / − (Next/Previous): Press andrelease to go to the next or theprevious preset radio station orCD track.

K (End Call): For vehicles withthe OnStar® system, press to end aHands-Free call, an OnStar® call,cancel an incoming call, or endthe Advisor Playback.

For vehicles with Bluetooth®,press to end a call, or cancel anincoming call.

v+v − (Volume): Move thethumbwheel up or down to increaseor to decrease the volume.

J 0 (Call/Mute): Press andrelease to mute the system. Pressit again to turn the sound back on.

For vehicles with OnStar® orBluetooth systems, press andhold for longer than two secondsto interact with those systems.See OnStar® System on page 2-33and Bluetooth® on page 3-81 in thismanual for more information.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as cellphone chargers, vehicleconvenience accessories, andexternal electronic devices areplugged into the accessory poweroutlet. If there is interference orstatic, unplug the item from theaccessory power outlet.

AMThe range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interferewith each other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stationsboost the power levels during theday, and then reduce these levelsduring the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms andpower lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, tryreducing the treble on the radio.


FM StereoFM signals only reach about10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).Although the radio has a built-inelectronic circuit that automaticallyworks to reduce interference,some static can occur, especiallyaround tall buildings or hills, causingthe sound to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM Satellite Radio Servicegives digital radio reception fromcoast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada.Just as with FM, tall buildings orhills can interfere with satellite radiosignals, causing the sound to fadein and out. In addition, travelingor standing under heavy foliage,bridges, garages, or tunnels maycause loss of the XM signal for aperiod of time.

Cellular Phone UsageCellular phone usage may causeinterference with the vehicle’s radio.This interference may occur whenmaking or receiving phone calls,charging the phone’s battery, orsimply having the phone on. Thisinterference causes an increasedlevel of static while listening to theradio. If static is received whilelistening to the radio, unplug thecellular phone and turn it off.

Fixed Mast AntennaThe fixed mast antenna canwithstand most car washes withoutbeing damaged as long as it issecurely attached to the base.If the mast becomes slightly bent,straighten it out by hand. If themast is badly bent, replace it.

Occasionally check to make surethe antenna is tightened to its base.If tightening is required, tightenby hand.

XM™ Satellite RadioAntenna SystemThe XM Satellite Radio antenna islocated on the roof of the vehicle.Keep the antenna clear ofobstructions for clear radio reception.

If the vehicle has a sunroof, theperformance of the XM system maybe affected if the sunroof is open.

Chime Level AdjustmentThe radio may be used to adjust thevehicle’s chime level. If the radio canbe used to change the volume levelof the chime, press and hold the sixthFAV softkey with the ignition on andthe radio power off. The volume levelchanges between Normal and Loud.The selected volume level appearson the radio display.

Removing the radio and notreplacing it with a factory radio orchime module will disable vehiclechimes.


✍ NOTES


Driving YourVehicle

Your Driving, the Road,and the VehicleDriving Your Vehicle ..............4-1Driver Behavior .....................4-2Driving Environment ...............4-2Vehicle Design ......................4-2Driving for Better FuelEconomy ............................4-3

Defensive Driving ..................4-3Drunk Driving .......................4-4Control of a Vehicle ...............4-4Braking ................................4-5Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) .....................4-6

Braking in Emergencies ..........4-6StabiliTrak® System ...............4-7Traction ControlSystem (TCS) .....................4-8

All-Wheel Drive (AWD)System ..............................4-9

Steering ...............................4-9

Off-Road Recovery ..............4-11Passing ..............................4-11Loss of Control ...................4-12Off-Road Driving ..................4-13Driving at Night ...................4-22Driving in Rain andon Wet Roads ...................4-23

Before Leaving ona Long Trip .......................4-24

Highway Hypnosis ...............4-24Hill and Mountain Roads ......4-24Winter Driving .....................4-25If Your Vehicle is Stuck inSand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ......4-27

Rocking Your Vehicleto Get It Out .....................4-27

Loading the Vehicle .............4-28

TowingTowing Your Vehicle ............4-32Recreational Vehicle Towing ...4-32Towing a Trailer ..................4-35

Your Driving, theRoad, and the Vehicle

Driving Your VehicleWhenever we drive, we are takingon an important responsibility.This is true for any motorvehicle — passenger car, van,truck, sport utility. Driver behavior,the driving environment, and thevehicle’s design all affect how well avehicle performs. But statistics showthat the most important factor, by far,is how we drive.

Knowing how these three factorswork together can help youunderstand how your vehiclehandles and what you can do toavoid many types of crashes,including a rollover crash.

Driving Your Vehicle 4-1

Driver BehaviorThe single most important thing isthis: everyone in the vehicle,including the driver, should buckleup. See Safety Belts: They Are forEveryone on page 1-10. In fact, mostserious injuries and fatalities tounbelted occupants can be reducedor prevented by the use of safetybelts. In a rollover crash, an unbeltedperson is significantly more likely todie than a person wearing a seatbelt. In addition, avoiding excessivespeed, sudden or abrupt turns, anddrunken or aggressive driving canhelp make trips safer and avoid thepossibility of a crash, especially arollover crash. This section providesmany useful tips to help you drivemore safely.

Driving EnvironmentYou can also help avoid a rolloveror other type of crash by beingprepared for driving in inclementweather, at night, or during othertimes where visibility or tractionmay be limited, such as on curves,slippery roads, or hilly terrain.Unfamiliar surroundings can alsohave hidden hazards.

To help you learn more about drivingin different conditions, this sectioncontains information about city,freeway, and off-road driving, as wellas other hints for driving in variousweather conditions.

Vehicle DesignAccording to the U.S. Departmentof Transportation, utility vehicleshave a significantly higher rolloverrate than other types of vehicles.

Utility vehicles do have higherground clearance and a narrowertrack or shorter wheelbase thanpassenger cars, to make them morecapable for off-road driving. Specificdesign characteristics like these givethe driver a better view of the road,but also give utility vehicles a highercenter of gravity than other types ofvehicles. This means that you shouldnot expect a utility vehicle to handlethe same way a vehicle with a lowercenter of gravity, like a car, would insimilar situations.

But driver behavior factors arefar more often the cause of autility vehicle rollover thanare environmental or vehiclefactors. Safe driver behavior andunderstanding the environment inwhich you will be driving can helpavoid a rollover crash in any type ofvehicle, including utility vehicles.

4-2 Driving Your Vehicle

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some drivingtips to get the best fuel economypossible.

• Avoid fast starts and acceleratesmoothly.

• Brake gradually and avoid abruptstops.

• Avoid idling the engine for longperiods of time.

• When road and weatherconditions are appropriate, usecruise control, if equipped.

• Always follow posted speed limitsor drive more slowly whenconditions require.

• Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

• Combine several trips into asingle trip.

• Replace the vehicle’s tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire’s sidewallnear the size.

• Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearyour safety belt — See Safety Belts:They Are for Everyone on page 1-10.

{ CAUTION

Assume that other road users(pedestrians, bicyclists, and otherdrivers) are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipatewhat they might do and be ready.In addition:

• Allow enough followingdistance between you andthe driver in front of you.

• Focus on the task of driving.

Driver distraction can causecollisions resulting in injury orpossible death. These simpledefensive driving techniques couldsave your life.


Drunk Driving

{ CAUTION

Drinking and then driving isvery dangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking. Do not drink and drive orride with a driver who has beendrinking. Ride home in a cab; or ifyou are with a group, designate adriver who will not drink.

Death and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

Alcohol affects four things thatanyone needs to drive a vehicle:judgment, muscular coordination,vision, and attentiveness.

Police records show thatalmost 40 percent of all motorvehicle-related deaths involvealcohol. In most cases, these deathsare the result of someone who wasdrinking and driving. In recent years,more than 17,000 annual motorvehicle-related deaths have beenassociated with the use of alcohol,with about 250,000 people injured.

For persons under 21, it is againstthe law in every U.S. state to drinkalcohol. There are good medical,psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate theleading highway safety problemis for people never to drink alcoholand then drive.

Medical research shows that alcoholin a person’s system can make crashinjuries worse, especially injuriesto the brain, spinal cord, or heart.

This means that when anyone whohas been drinking — driver orpassenger — is in a crash, thatperson’s chance of being killed orpermanently disabled is higher thanif the person had not been drinking.

Control of a VehicleThe following three systemshelp to control the vehicle whiledriving —brakes, steering, andaccelerator. At times, as whendriving on snow or ice, it is easy toask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide.Meaning, you can lose control ofthe vehicle. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 4-8.

Adding non-dealer/non-retaileraccessories can affect vehicleperformance. See Accessories andModifications on page 5-3.


BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light onpage 3-31.

Braking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Decidingto push the brake pedal isperception time. Actually doingit is reaction time.

Average reaction time is aboutthree-fourths of a second. But thatis only an average. It might beless with one driver and as long astwo or three seconds or more withanother. Age, physical condition,alertness, coordination, and eyesightall play a part. So do alcohol, drugs,and frustration. But even inthree-fourths of a second, a vehiclemoving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels66 feet (20 m). That could be a lotof distance in an emergency, sokeeping enough space between thevehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stoppingdistances vary greatly with thesurface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition ofthe road, whether it is wet, dry, or icy;tire tread; the condition of the brakes;the weight of the vehicle; and theamount of brake force applied.

Avoid needless heavy braking. Somepeople drive in spurts — heavyacceleration followed by heavybraking — rather than keeping pacewith traffic. This is a mistake. Thebrakes might not have time to coolbetween hard stops. The brakes willwear out much faster with a lot ofheavy braking. Keeping pace withthe traffic and allowing realisticfollowing distances eliminates a lot ofunnecessary braking. That meansbetter braking and longer brake life.

If the engine ever stops whilethe vehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump the brakes.If the brakes are pumped, the pedalcould get harder to push down. If theengine stops, there will still be somepower brake assist but it will be usedwhen the brake is applied. Once thepower assist is used up, it can takelonger to stop and the brake pedalwill be harder to push.

Adding non-dealer/non-retaileraccessories can affect vehicleperformance. See Accessories andModifications on page 5-3.


Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has the AntilockBrake System (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system thathelps prevent a braking skid.

When the engine is started and thevehicle begins to drive away, ABSchecks itself. A momentary motor orclicking noise might be heard whilethis test is going on, and it mighteven be noticed that the brake pedalmoves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS,this warning light stays on.See Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light on page 3-32.

Let us say the road is wet and youare driving safely. Suddenly, ananimal jumps out in front of you.You slam on the brakes and continuebraking. Here is what happenswith ABS:

A computer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately workthe brakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This canhelp the driver steer aroundthe obstacle while braking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time to applythe brakes if that vehicle suddenlyslows or stops. Always leave enoughroom up ahead to stop, evenwith ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly andlet antilock work. The antilockpump or motor operating might beheard and the brake pedal might befelt to pulsate, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesABS allows the driver to steer andbrake at the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can help morethan even the very best braking.


StabiliTrak® SystemThe vehicle has a vehicle stabilityenhancement system calledStabiliTrak which combines antilockbrake, traction and stability controlsystems and helps the drivermaintain directional control of thevehicle in most driving conditions.

StabiliTrak activates when thecomputer senses a discrepancybetween the intended path and thedirection the vehicle is actuallytraveling. StabiliTrak selectivelyapplies braking pressure at anyone of the vehicle’s brakes to assistthe driver with keeping the vehicleon the intended path.

When the vehicle is started andbegins to move, the system performsseveral diagnostic checks to insurethere are no problems. The systemmay be heard or felt while it isworking. This is normal and does notmean there is a problem with thevehicle.

This light is located on theinstrument panel cluster.

It will flash when StabiliTrak is bothon and activated.

If the system fails to turn on oractivate, this light will be on solid.When the light is on solid, the systemwill not assist the driver maintaindirectional control of the vehicle.Adjust your driving accordingly.

The StabiliTrak system automaticallycomes on whenever the vehicle isstarted. To assist the driver withvehicle directional control, especiallyin slippery road conditions, thesystem should always be left on.StabiliTrak can be turned off ifneeded.

The Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak button is locatedon the instrument panel.

TCS can be turned off or turnedon by pressing and releasing theTCS/StabiliTrak button. To disableboth StabiliTrak and TCS, pressand hold the button until the TCS/StabiliTrak warning light turns onsolid.

It is recommended to leavethe system on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn the system off if the vehicle isstuck in sand, mud, ice or snow, andyou want to “rock” the vehicle toattempt to free it.

StabiliTrak may also turn offautomatically if it determines that aproblem exists with the system.


The TCS/StabiliTrak warning lightwill be on solid to warn the driver thatStabiliTrak is disabled and requiresservice. If the problem does not clearitself after restarting the vehicle, seeyour dealer/retailer for service.

If cruise control is being usedwhen StabiliTrak activates, thecruise control automaticallydisengages. The cruise control canbe re-engaged when road conditionsallow. See Cruise Control onpage 3-9.

Trailer Sway Control (TSC)The vehicle has a Trailer SwayControl (TSC) feature as part of theStabiliTrak system. If the vehicle istowing a trailer and the systemdetects that the trailer is swaying, thevehicle’s brakes are applied withoutthe driver pressing the brake pedal.The TCS/StabiliTrak warning lightwill flash on the instrument panelcluster to notify the driver to reducespeed. If the trailer continues tosway, StabiliTrak will reduce enginetorque to help slow the vehicle.

Adding non-dealer/non-retaileraccessories can affect the vehicle’sperformance. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 5-3 formore information.

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) that limits wheel spin.This is especially useful in slipperyroad conditions. The systemoperates only if it senses that anyof the drive wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction. When thishappens, TCS applies the brakes tolimit wheel spin and also reducesengine power. The system may beheard or felt while it is working, butthis is normal.

This light will flash when TCS islimiting wheel spin.

It is recommended to leave thesystem on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn the system off if the vehicle isstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow, andyou want to “rock” the vehicle toattempt to free it. See Rocking YourVehicle to Get It Out on page 4-27and If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 4-27 formore information.

The TCS/StabiliTrak® button islocated on the instrument panel.


Press and release this button to turnoff TCS. The TCS warning light willbe displayed on the instrument panelcluster. The traction control systemcan be turned back on by pressingthe TCS/StabiliTrak button.

If the system is limiting wheel spinwhen the button is pressed, thesystem will not turn off until there isno longer a current need to limitwheel spin. The system canbe turned back on at any time bypressing the button again. If the TCSlight does not come on, TCS maynot be functioning properly andthe vehicle should be serviced atyour dealer/retailer.

Adding non-dealer/non-retaileraccessories can affect the vehicle’sperformance. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 5-3 formore information.

All-Wheel Drive (AWD)SystemIf the vehicle has all-wheel drive(AWD), the AWD system operatesautomatically without any actionrequired by the driver. If the frontdrive wheels begin to slip, the rearwheels will automatically begin todrive the vehicle as required. Theremay be a slight engagement noiseduring hard use but this is normal.

This light is located on theinstrument panel cluster.

It will come on and stay on toindicate there may be a problemwith the drive system and service isrequired. If the light stays on, it mustbe reset. To reset the light, turn theignition off and then back on again.If the light stays on, see yourdealer/retailer for service.

If the vehicle is exposed to extendedheavy AWD usage, the AWD systemwill shut off to protect the systemfrom overheating. When the systemcools down, the AWD system willactivate again automatically; thiscool-down can take up to 20 minutesdepending on outside temperatureand vehicle use.

SteeringElectric Power SteeringIf the vehicle has the electric powersteering system and the enginestalls while driving, the powersteering assist system will continueto operate until you are able tostop the vehicle. If power steeringassist is lost because the electricpower steering system is notfunctioning, the vehicle can besteered but it will take more effort.


If you turn the steering wheel ineither direction several times until itstops, or hold the steering wheelin the stopped position for anextended amount of time, youmay notice a reduced amount ofpower steering assist. The normalamount of power steering assistshould return shortly after afew normal steering movements.

The electric power steeringsystem does not require regularmaintenance. If you suspect steeringsystem problems and/or the ServiceVehicle Soon light comes on, contactyour dealer/retailer for servicerepairs.

Hydraulic Power SteeringIf the vehicle has the hydraulicpower steering system and powersteering assist is lost becausethe engine stops or the powersteering system is not functioning,the vehicle can be steered but itwill take more effort.

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at areasonable speed.

Traction in a curve depends onthe condition of the tires andthe road surface, the angle at whichthe curve is banked, and vehiclespeed. While in a curve, speedis the one factor that can becontrolled.

If there is a need to reduce speed,do it before entering the curve,while the front wheels are straight.

Try to adjust the speed so youcan drive through the curve.Maintain a reasonable, steadyspeed. Wait to accelerate until outof the curve, and then accelerategently into the straightaway.

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering canbe more effective than braking. Forexample, you come over a hill andfind a truck stopped in your lane, or acar suddenly pulls out from nowhere,or a child darts out from betweenparked cars and stops right in front ofyou. These problems can be avoidedby braking — if you can stop in time.But sometimes you cannot stop intime because there is no room.That is the time for evasiveaction — steering around theproblem.

The vehicle can perform very wellin emergencies like these. Firstapply the brakes. See Braking onpage 4-5. It is better to remove asmuch speed as possible from acollision. Then steer around theproblem, to the left or rightdepending on the space available.


An emergency like this requiresclose attention and a quick decision.If holding the steering wheel at therecommended 9 and 3 o’clockpositions, it can be turned a full180 degrees very quickly withoutremoving either hand. But you haveto act fast, steer quickly, and just asquickly straighten the wheel onceyou have avoided the object.

The fact that such emergencysituations are always possible is agood reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wearsafety belts properly.

Off-Road RecoveryThe vehicle’s right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving.

If the level of the shoulder isonly slightly below the pavement,recovery should be fairly easy. Easeoff the accelerator and then, if thereis nothing in the way, steer so thatthe vehicle straddles the edge ofthe pavement. Turn the steeringwheel 3 to 5 inches, 8 to 13 cm,(about one-eighth turn) until the rightfront tire contacts the pavementedge. Then turn the steering wheel togo straight down the roadway.

PassingPassing another vehicle on atwo-lane road can be dangerous.To reduce the risk of dangerwhile passing:

• Look down the road, to the sides,and to crossroads for situationsthat might affect a successfulpass. If in doubt, wait.

• Watch for traffic signs,pavement markings, and linesthat could indicate a turn or anintersection. Never cross a solidor double-solid line on your side ofthe lane.

• Do not get too close to the vehicleyou want to pass. Doing so canreduce your visibility.

• Wait your turn to pass a slowvehicle.

• When you are being passed, easeto the right.


Loss of ControlLet us review what driving expertssay about what happens when thethree control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do nothave enough friction where the tiresmeet the road to do what the driverhas asked.

In any emergency, do not give up.Keep trying to steer and constantlyseek an escape route or area ofless danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control ofthe vehicle. Defensive drivers avoidmost skids by taking reasonable caresuited to existing conditions, and bynot overdriving those conditions.But skids are always possible.

The three types of skids correspondto the vehicle’s three controlsystems. In the braking skid, thewheels are not rolling. In the steering

or cornering skid, too much speedor steering in a curve causes tires toslip and lose cornering force. And inthe acceleration skid, too muchthrottle causes the driving wheelsto spin.

Remember: Any traction controlsystem helps avoid only theacceleration skid. If the tractioncontrol system is off, then anacceleration skid is best handled byeasing your foot off the acceleratorpedal.

If the vehicle starts to slide, easeyour foot off the accelerator pedaland quickly steer the way you wantthe vehicle to go. If you start steeringquickly enough, the vehicle maystraighten out. Always be ready fora second skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reducedwhen water, snow, ice, gravel,or other material is on the road.For safety, slow down and adjustyour driving to these conditions.

It is important to slow down onslippery surfaces because stoppingdistance will be longer andvehicle control more limited.

While driving on a surface withreduced traction, try your best toavoid sudden steering, acceleration,or braking, including reducing vehiclespeed by shifting to a lower gear.Any sudden changes could causethe tires to slide. You may not realizethe surface is slippery until thevehicle is skidding. Learn torecognize warning clues — such asenough water, ice, or packed snowon the road to make a mirroredsurface — and slow down whenyou have any doubt.

Remember: Any Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) helps avoid only thebraking skid.


Off-Road DrivingVehicles with all-wheel drive can beused for off-road driving. Vehicleswithout all-wheel drive should not bedriven off-road except on a level,solid surface.

Many of the vehicle design featuresthat help make the vehicle moreresponsive on paved roads duringpoor weather conditions also helpmake it better suited for off-roaduse than conventional passengervehicles. The vehicle does nothave features usually thought to benecessary for extended or severeoff-road use such as specialunderbody shielding and transfercase low gear range.

The airbag system is designed towork properly under a wide range ofconditions, including off-road usage.Always wear your safety belt andobserve safe driving speeds,especially on rough terrain.

Drinking and driving can be verydangerous on any road and this iscertainly true for off-road driving.At the very time you need specialalertness and driving skills, yourreflexes, perceptions, and judgmentcan be affected by even a smallamount of alcohol. You could have aserious — or even fatal — accident ifyou drink and drive or ride with adriver who has been drinking.

Off-roading can be great fun but hassome definite hazards. The greatestof these is the terrain itself. Whenoff-road driving, traffic lanes are notmarked, curves are not banked, andthere are no road signs. Surfacescan be slippery, rough, uphill, ordownhill.

Avoid sharp turns and abruptmaneuvers. Failure to operate thevehicle correctly off-road could resultin loss of vehicle control or vehiclerollover.

Off-roading involves some new skills.That is why it is very important thatyou read these driving tips andsuggestions to help make off-roaddriving safer and more enjoyable.

Before You Go Off-Roading• Have all necessary maintenance

and service work done.

• Make sure there is enough fuel,that fluid levels are where theyshould be, and that the spare tireis fully inflated.

• Be sure to read all theinformation about all-wheel-drivevehicles in this manual.

• Make sure all underbody shields,if the vehicle has them, areproperly attached.

• Know the local laws that apply tooff-roading where you will bedriving or check with lawenforcement people in the area.

• Be sure to get the necessarypermission if you will be onprivate land.


Loading Your Vehicle forOff-Road Driving

{ CAUTION

• Cargo on the load floor piledhigher than the seatbackscan be thrown forward duringa sudden stop. You or yourpassengers could be injured.Keep cargo below the top ofthe seatbacks.

• Unsecured cargo on theload floor can be tossedabout when driving overrough terrain. You or yourpassengers can be struck byflying objects. Secure thecargo properly.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

• Heavy loads on the roof raisethe vehicle’s center of gravity,making it more likely to rollover. You can be seriously orfatally injured if the vehiclerolls over. Put heavy loadsinside the cargo area, not onthe roof. Keep cargo in thecargo area as far forward andlow as possible.

There are some important things toremember about how to loadyour vehicle.

• The heaviest things should be onthe floor, forward of the rear axle.Put heavier items as far forwardas you can.

• Be sure the load is properlysecured, so things are not tossedaround.

You will find other importantinformation under Loading theVehicle on page 4-28 and Tires onpage 5-43.

Environmental ConcernsOff-road driving can providewholesome and satisfyingrecreation. However, it alsoraises environmental concerns.We recognize these concerns andurge every off-roader to follow thesebasic rules for protecting theenvironment:

• Always use established trails,roads, and areas that have beenspecially set aside for publicoff-road recreational driving andobey all posted regulations.

• Avoid any driving practicethat could damage shrubs,flowers, trees, or grasses ordisturb wildlife. This includeswheel-spinning, breaking downtrees, or unnecessary drivingthrough streams or over softground.


• Always carry a litter bag andmake sure all refuse is removedfrom any campsite before leaving.

• Take extreme care with open fires(where permitted), camp stoves,and lanterns.

• Never park your vehicle over drygrass or other combustiblematerials that could catch firefrom the heat of the vehicle’sexhaust system.

Traveling to Remote AreasIt makes sense to plan your trip,especially when going to a remotearea. Know the terrain and plan yourroute. Get accurate maps of trailsand terrain. Check to see if there areany blocked or closed roads.

It is also a good idea to travel with atleast one other vehicle in casesomething happens to one of them.

For vehicles with a winch, be sure toread the winch instructions. In aremote area, a winch can be handy ifyou get stuck but you will want toknow how to use it properly.

Getting Familiar with Off-RoadDrivingIt is a good idea to practice in anarea that is safe and close to homebefore you go into the wilderness.Off-roading requires some newand different skills.

Tune your senses to different kindsof signals. Your eyes need toconstantly sweep the terrain forunexpected obstacles. Your earsneed to listen for unusual tire orengine sounds. Use your arms,hands, feet, and body to respondto vibrations and vehicle bounce.

Controlling the vehicle is the key tosuccessful off-road driving. One ofthe best ways to control the vehicle isto control the speed. At higherspeeds:

• You approach things faster andhave less time to react.

• There is less time to scan theterrain for obstacles.

• The vehicle has more bouncewhen driving over obstacles.

• More braking distance is needed,especially on an unpaved surface.

{ CAUTION

When you are driving off-road,bouncing and quick changes indirection can easily throw youout of position. This could causeyou to lose control and crash. So,whether you are driving on or offthe road, you and your passengersshould wear safety belts.


Scanning the TerrainOff-road driving can take you overmany different kinds of terrain.Be familiar with the terrain and itsmany different features.

Surface Conditions: Off-roadingsurfaces can be hard-packed dirt,gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud,snow, or ice. Each of these surfacesaffects the vehicle’s steering,acceleration, and braking in differentways. Depending on the surface,slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,delayed acceleration, poor traction,and longer braking distances canoccur.

Surface Obstacles: Unseen orhidden obstacles can be hazardous.A rock, log, hole, rut, or bump canstartle you if you are not prepared forthem. Often these obstacles arehidden by grass, bushes, snow, oreven the rise and fall of the terrainitself.

Some things to consider:

• Is the path ahead clear?

• Will the surface texture changeabruptly up ahead?

• Does the travel take you uphill ordownhill?

• Will you have to stop suddenly orchange direction quickly?

When driving over obstacles orrough terrain, keep a firm grip on thesteering wheel. Ruts, troughs, orother surface features can jerk thewheel out of your hands.

When driving over bumps, rocks, orother obstacles, the wheels canleave the ground. If this happens,even with one or two wheels, youcannot control the vehicle as well orat all.

Because you will be on an unpavedsurface, it is especially importantto avoid sudden acceleration,sudden turns, or sudden braking.

Off-roading requires a different kindof alertness from driving on pavedroads and highways. There are noroad signs, posted speed limits, orsignal lights. Use good judgmentabout what is safe and what is not.


Driving on HillsOff-road driving often takes you up,down, or across a hill. Driving safelyon hills requires good judgment andan understanding of what the vehiclecan and cannot do. There are somehills that simply cannot be driven, nomatter how well built the vehicle.

{ CAUTION

Many hills are simply too steep forany vehicle. If you drive up them,you will stall. If you drive downthem, you cannot control yourspeed. If you drive across them,you will roll over. You could beseriously injured or killed. If youhave any doubt about thesteepness, do not drive the hill.

Approaching a HillWhen you approach a hill, decide if itis too steep to climb, descend, orcross. Steepness can be hard tojudge. On a very small hill, forexample, there may be a smooth,constant incline with only a smallchange in elevation where you caneasily see all the way to the top. On alarge hill, the incline may get steeperas you near the top, but you mightnot see this because the crest of thehill is hidden by bushes, grass, orshrubs.

Consider this as you approacha hill:

• Is there a constant incline, ordoes the hill get sharplysteeper in places?

• Is there good traction on thehillside, or will the surfacecause tire slipping?

• Is there a straight path up ordown the hill so you will not haveto make turning maneuvers?

• Are there obstructions on the hillthat can block your path, suchas boulders, trees, logs, or ruts?

• What is beyond the hill? Is therea cliff, an embankment, a drop-off,a fence? Get out and walk the hillif you do not know. It is the smartway to find out.

• Is the hill simply too rough? Steephills often have ruts, gullies,troughs, and exposed rocksbecause they are moresusceptible to the effects oferosion.


Driving UphillOnce you decide it is safe to driveup the hill:

• Use a low gear and get a firmgrip on the steering wheel.

• Get a smooth start up the hilland try to maintain speed.Not using more power thanneeded can avoid spinning thewheels or sliding.

{ CAUTION

Turning or driving across steephills can be dangerous. You couldlose traction, slide sideways, andpossibly roll over. You could beseriously injured or killed. Whendriving up hills, always try to gostraight up.

• Try to drive straight up the hill ifat all possible. If the path twistsand turns, you might want tofind another route.

• Ease up on the speed as youapproach the top of the hill.

• Attach a flag to the vehicle to bemore visible to approachingtraffic on trails or hills.

• Sound the horn as you approachthe top of the hill to let opposingtraffic know you are there.

• Use headlamps even during theday to make the vehicle morevisible to oncoming traffic.

{ CAUTION

Driving to the top (crest) of ahill at full speed can cause anaccident. There could be adrop-off, embankment, cliff, oreven another vehicle. You couldbe seriously injured or killed.As you near the top of a hill,slow down and stay alert.

If the vehicle stalls, or is about tostall, and you cannot make it upthe hill:

• Push the brake pedal to stop thevehicle and keep it from rollingbackwards and apply the parkingbrake.

• If the engine is still running, shiftthe transmission to R (Reverse),release the parking brake,and slowly back down the hill inR (Reverse).

• If the engine has stopped running,you need to restart it. With thebrake pedal pressed and theparking brake still applied, shiftthe transmission to P (Park) andrestart the engine. Then, shift toR (Reverse), release the parkingbrake, and slowly back down thehill as straight as possible inR (Reverse).


• While backing down the hill, putyour left hand on the steeringwheel at the 12 o’clock positionso you can tell if the wheels arestraight and can maneuver as youback down. It is best to back downthe hill with the wheels straightrather than in the left or rightdirection. Turning the wheel toofar to the left or right will increasethe possibility of a rollover.

Things not to do if the vehicle stalls,or is about to stall, when goingup a hill:• Never attempt to prevent a stall

by shifting into N (Neutral) torev-up the engine and regainforward momentum. This willnot work. The vehicle canroll backward very quickly andcould go out of control.

• Never try to turn around if about tostall when going up a hill. If the hillis steep enough to stall thevehicle, it is steep enough tocause it to roll over. If you cannotmake it up the hill, back straightdown the hill.

If, after stalling, you try to backdown the hill and decide you justcannot do it, set the parking brake,put your transmission in P (Park),and turn off the engine. Leavethe vehicle and go get some help.Exit on the uphill side and stay clearof the path the vehicle would takeif it rolled downhill.

Driving DownhillWhen off-roading takes youdownhill, consider:

• How steep is the downhill? Will Ibe able to maintain vehiclecontrol?

• What is the surface like? Smooth?Rough? Slippery? Hard-packeddirt? Gravel?

• Are there hidden surfaceobstacles? Ruts? Logs?Boulders?

• What is at the bottom of the hill?Is there a hidden creek bank oreven a river bottom with largerocks?

If you decide you can go down a hillsafely, try to keep the vehicle headedstraight down. Use a low gear soengine drag can help the brakes sothey do not have to do all the work.Descend slowly, keeping the vehicleunder control at all times.

{ CAUTION

Heavy braking when going downa hill can cause your brakes tooverheat and fade. This couldcause loss of control and aserious accident. Apply the brakeslightly when descending a hill anduse a low gear to keep vehiclespeed under control.


Things not to do when driving downa hill:

• When driving downhill, avoid turnsthat take you across the incline ofthe hill. A hill that is not too steepto drive down might be too steepto drive across. The vehicle couldroll over.

• Never go downhill with thetransmission in N (Neutral), calledfree-wheeling. The brakes willhave to do all the work and couldoverheat and fade.

Vehicles are much more likely tostall when going uphill, but if ithappens when going downhill:

1. Stop the vehicle by applying theregular brakes and apply theparking brake.

2. Shift to P (Park) and, while stillbraking, restart the engine.

3. Shift back to a low gear, releasethe parking brake, and drivestraight down.

4. If the engine will not start, getout and get help.

Driving Across an InclineAn off-road trail will probably goacross the incline of a hill. To decidewhether to try to drive across theincline, consider the following:

{ CAUTION

Driving across an incline that istoo steep will make your vehicleroll over. You could be seriouslyinjured or killed. If you have anydoubt about the steepness of theincline, do not drive across it. Findanother route instead.

• A hill that can be driven straightup or down might be too steep todrive across. When going straightup or down a hill, the length of thewheel base — the distance fromthe front wheels to the rearwheels — reduces the likelihoodthe vehicle will tumble end overend. But when driving acrossan incline, the narrower trackwidth — the distance between the

left and right wheels — might notprevent the vehicle from tiltingand rolling over. Driving across anincline puts more weight on thedownhill wheels which couldcause a downhill slide or arollover.

• Surface conditions can be aproblem. Loose gravel, muddyspots, or even wet grass cancause the tires to slip sideways,downhill. If the vehicle slipssideways, it can hit somethingthat will trip it — a rock, a rut,etc. — and roll over.

• Hidden obstacles can make thesteepness of the incline evenworse. If you drive across a rockwith the uphill wheels, or if thedownhill wheels drop into a rut ordepression, the vehicle can tilteven more.

For these reasons, carefully considerwhether to try to drive across anincline. Just because the trail goesacross the incline does not mean youhave to drive it. The last vehicle to tryit might have rolled over.


If you feel the vehicle starting to slidesideways, turn downhill. This shouldhelp straighten out the vehicle andprevent the side slipping. The bestway to prevent this is to “walk thecourse” first, so you know what thesurface is like before driving it.

Stalling on an Incline

{ CAUTION

Getting out on the downhill (low)side of a vehicle stopped acrossan incline is dangerous. If thevehicle rolls over, you could becrushed or killed. Always get outon the uphill (high) side of thevehicle and stay well clear of therollover path.

If the vehicle stalls when crossingan incline, be sure you, and anypassengers, get out on the uphillside, even if the door there is harderto open. If you get out on the downhillside and the vehicle starts to rollover, you will be right in its path.

If you have to walk down the slope,stay out of the path the vehiclewill take if it does roll over.

Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow,or IceWhen you drive in mud, snow, orsand, the wheels do not get goodtraction. Acceleration is not as quick,turning is more difficult, and brakingdistances are longer.

It is best to use a low gear when inmud — the deeper the mud, thelower the gear. In really deep mud,keep the vehicle moving so it doesnot get stuck.

When driving on sand, wheeltraction changes. On loosely packedsand, such as on beaches or sanddunes, the tires will tend to sinkinto the sand. This affects steering,accelerating, and braking. Drive at areduced speed and avoid sharp turnsor abrupt maneuvers.

Hard packed snow and ice offer theworst tire traction. On these surfaces,it is very easy to lose control. On wetice, for example, the traction is sopoor that you will have difficultyaccelerating. And, if the vehicle doesget moving, poor steering anddifficult braking can cause it to slideout of control.

{ CAUTION

Driving on frozen lakes, ponds,or rivers can be dangerous.Underwater springs, currentsunder the ice, or sudden thawscan weaken the ice. Your vehiclecould fall through the ice and youand your passengers coulddrown. Drive your vehicle onsafe surfaces only.


Driving in Water

{ CAUTION

Driving through rushing water canbe dangerous. Deep water cansweep your vehicle downstreamand you and your passengerscould drown. If it is only shallowwater, it can still wash away theground from under your tires, andyou could lose traction and rollthe vehicle over. Do not drivethrough rushing water.

Heavy rain can mean flash flooding,and flood waters demand extremecaution.

Find out how deep the water isbefore driving through it. Do nottry it if it is deep enough to coverthe wheel hubs, axles, or exhaustpipe — you probably will not getthrough. Deep water can damagethe axle and other vehicle parts.

If the water is not too deep, driveslowly through it. At faster speeds,water splashes on the ignitionsystem and the vehicle can stall.Stalling can also occur if you get thetailpipe under water. If the tailpipe isunder water, you will never be able tostart the engine. When going throughwater, remember that when thebrakes get wet, it might take longer tostop. See Driving in Rain and on WetRoads on page 4-23.

After Off-Road DrivingRemove any brush or debris thathas collected on the underbody,chassis, or under the hood. Theseaccumulations can be a fire hazard.

After operation in mud or sand,have the brake linings cleaned andchecked. These substances cancause glazing and uneven braking.Check the body structure, steering,suspension, wheels, tires, axles, andexhaust system for damage andcheck the fuel lines and coolingsystem for any leakage.

The vehicle requires more frequentservice due to off-road use.Refer to the Maintenance Schedulefor additional information.

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous thanday driving because some driversare likely to be impaired — by alcoholor drugs, with night vision problems,or by fatigue.

Night driving tips include:

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Reduce headlamp glare byadjusting the inside rearviewmirror.

• Slow down and keep more spacebetween you and other vehiclesbecause headlamps can onlylight up so much road ahead.

• Watch for animals.

• When tired, pull off the road.

• Do not wear sunglasses.


• Avoid staring directly intoapproaching headlamps.

• Keep the windshield and all glasson your vehicle clean — insideand out.

• Keep your eyes moving,especially during turns or curves.

No one can see as well at night asin the daytime. But, as we getolder, these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver might needat least twice as much light tosee the same thing at night asa 20-year-old.

Driving in Rain and onWet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep-standing or flowing water.

{ CAUTION

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause yourvehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under your vehicle’stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fastenough. When your vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice isto slow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather TipsBesides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:

• Allow extra following distance.

• Pass with caution.

• Keep windshield wipingequipment in good shape.

• Keep the windshield washer fluidreservoir filled.

• Have good tires with proper treaddepth. See Tires on page 5-43.

• Turn off cruise control.


Before Leaving on aLong TripTo prepare your vehicle for a longtrip, consider having it serviced byyour dealer/retailer before departing.

Things to check on your owninclude:

• Windshield Washer Fluid:Reservoir full? Windowsclean — inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: In good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Alllevels checked?

• Lamps: Do they all work and arelenses clean?

• Tires: Are treads good? Are tiresinflated to recommendedpressure?

• Weather and Maps: Safe totravel? Have up-to-date maps?

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attentionto your surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, finda safe place to park your vehicleand rest.

Other driving tips include:

• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.

• Keep interior temperature cool.

• Keep your eyes moving — scanthe road ahead and to the sides.

• Check the rearview mirror andvehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:

• Keep the vehicle servicedand in good shape.

• Check all fluid levels and brakes,tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

• Going down steep or long hills,shift to a lower gear.

{ CAUTION

If you do not shift down, thebrakes could get so hot that theywould not work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or evennone going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steepdownhill slope.


{ CAUTION

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. The brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing downand they could get so hot thatthey would not work well. Youwould then have poor brakingor even none going down a hill.You could crash. Always have theengine running and the vehicle ingear when going downhill.

• Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

• Top of hills: Be alert — somethingcould be in your lane (stalled car,accident).

• Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter DrivingDriving on Snow or IceDrive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 32°F(0°C) when freezing rain begins tofall, resulting in even less traction.Avoid driving on wet ice or infreezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)on page 4-6 improves vehiclestability during hard stops on aslippery roads, but apply the brakessooner than when on dry pavement.

Allow greater following distanceon any slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface ofa curve or an overpass can remainicy when the surrounding roadsare clear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking while on ice.

Turn off cruise control, if equipped,on slippery surfaces.


Blizzard ConditionsBeing stuck in snow can be in aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use the RoadsideAssistance Program on page 7-6.To get help and keep everyonein the vehicle safe:

• Turn on the Hazard WarningFlashers on page 3-5.

• Tie a red cloth to an outsidemirror.

{ CAUTION

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This may causeexhaust gases to get inside.Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:• Clear away snow from

around the base of yourvehicle, especially any that isblocking the exhaust pipe.

• Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

• Open a window abouttwo inches (5 cm) on the sideof the vehicle that is awayfrom the wind to bring infresh air.

• Fully open the air outlets on orunder the instrument panel.

• Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fan speedto the highest setting. SeeClimate Control System in theIndex.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)


Snow can trap exhaust gasesunder your vehicle. This cancause deadly CO (carbonmonoxide) gas to get inside. COcould overcome you and kill you.You cannot see it or smell it, soyou might not know it is in yourvehicle. Clear away snow fromaround the base of your vehicle,especially any that is blocking theexhaust.

Run the engine for short periodsonly as needed to keep warm,but be careful.

To save fuel, run the engine foronly short periods as neededto warm the vehicle and then shutthe engine off and close the windowmost of the way to save heat.


Repeat this until help arrives but onlywhen you feel really uncomfortablefrom the cold. Moving about to keepwarm also helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for help withthe headlamps. Do this as little aspossible to save fuel.

If Your Vehicle is Stuck inSand, Mud, Ice, or SnowSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get ItOut on page 4-27.

If the vehicle has a traction system,it can often help to free a stuckvehicle. Refer to the vehicle’straction system in the Index. If stucktoo severely for the traction systemto free the vehicle, turn the tractionsystem off and use the rockingmethod.

{ CAUTION

If you let your vehicle’s tires spinat high speed, they can explode,and you or others could beinjured. The vehicle can overheat,causing an engine compartmentfire or other damage. Spin thewheels as little as possible andavoid going above 35 mph(55 km/h) as shown on thespeedometer.

For information about using tirechains on the vehicle, see TireChains on page 5-62.

Rocking Your Vehicle toGet It OutTurn the steering wheel left and rightto clear the area around the frontwheels. Turn off any traction orstability system. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a forwardgear, or with a manual transmission,between 1 (First) or 2 (Second) andR (Reverse), spinning the wheelsas little as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until thewheels stop spinning before shiftinggears. Release the accelerator pedalwhile shifting, and press lightly onthe accelerator pedal when thetransmission is in gear. Slowlyspinning the wheels in the forwardand reverse directions causes arocking motion that could free thevehicle. If that does not get thevehicle out after a few tries, it mightneed to be towed out. If the vehicledoes need to be towed out, seeTowing Your Vehicle on page 4-32.


Loading the VehicleIt is very important to know howmuch weight your vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and allnonfactory-installed options.Two labels on your vehicle showhow much weight it may properlycarry, the Tire and LoadingInformation label and theCertification/Tire label.

{ CAUTION

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR), oreither the maximum front orrear Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR). If you do, parts onthe vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

vehicle handles. These couldcause you to lose control andcrash. Also, overloading canshorten the life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the center pillar(B-pillar) of your vehicle.

With the driver’s door open, youwill find the label attachedbelow the door lock post(striker). The tire and loadinginformation label shows thenumber of occupant seatingpositions (A), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (B) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and Loading Informationlabel also shows the size of theoriginal equipment tires (C) andthe recommended cold tireinflation pressures (D). For moreinformation on tires and inflationsee Tires on page 5-43 andInflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-49.

There is also important loadinginformation on the vehicleCertification/Tire label. It tellsyou the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) and theGross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) for the front and rearaxle. See “Certification/TireLabel” later in this section.

Example Label


Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit

1. Locate the statement “Thecombined weight of occupantsand cargo should neverexceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weightof the driver and passengersfrom XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. Forexample, if the “XXX” amountequals 1400 lbs and there willbe five 150 lb passengers inyour vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggageload capacity is 650 lbs(1400 − 750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs).

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage andcargo being loaded on thevehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the availablecargo and luggage loadcapacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, the load from yourtrailer will be transferredto your vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine howthis reduces the availablecargo and luggage loadcapacity for your vehicle.

See Towing a Trailer onpage 4-35 for importantinformation on towing a trailer,towing safety rules, andtrailering tips.

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 = 1,000 lbs(453 kg).

B. Subtract Occupant Weight150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 = 300 lbs(136 kg).

C. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 700 lbs(317 kg).

Example 1



B. Subtract Occupant Weight150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 = 750 lbs(340 kg).

C. Available CargoWeight = 250 lbs (113 kg).


B. Subtract Occupant Weight200 lbs (91 kg) × 5 =1,000 lbs (453 kg).

C. Available CargoWeight = 0 lbs (0 kg).

Refer to your vehicle’s tire andloading information label forspecific information about yourvehicle’s capacity weight andseating positions. The combined

weight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedyour vehicle’s capacity weight.

Certification/Tire Label

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is attached to the lowerarea of the center pillar (B-Pillar).

Example 2 Example 3

Label Example


The label shows the grossweight capacity of your vehicle.This is called the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).The GVWR includes theweight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel, cargo, andtrailer tongue weight, ifthe vehicle is pulling a trailer.

The Certification/Tire label alsotells you the maximum weightsfor the front and rear axles, calledthe Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR). To find out the actualloads on your front and rearaxles, you need to go to a weighstation and weigh your vehicle.Your dealer/retailer can help youwith this. Be sure to spread outyour load equally on both sides ofthe centerline.

Never exceed the GVWR foryour vehicle or the GAWRfor either the front or rear axle.

{ CAUTION

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR), oreither the maximum front orrear Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR). If you do, parts onthe vehicle can break, and itcan change the way yourvehicle handles. These couldcause you to lose control andcrash. Also, overloading canshorten the life of the vehicle.

Notice: Overloading yourvehicle may cause damage.Repairs would not be coveredby your warranty. Do notoverload your vehicle.

If you put things inside yourvehicle — like suitcases, tools,packages, or anything else, theywill go as fast as the vehiclegoes. If you have to stop or turnquickly, or if there is a crash,they will keep going.

{ CAUTION

Things you put inside yourvehicle can strike and injurepeople in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the cargoarea of your vehicle. Try tospread the weight evenly.

• Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

• Do not leave an unsecuredchild restraint in yourvehicle.

• When you carry somethinginside the vehicle, secure itwhenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless you need to.


Towing

Towing Your VehicleTo avoid damage, the disabledvehicle should be towed with all fourwheels off the ground. Consult yourdealer/retailer or a professionaltowing service if the disabled vehiclemust be towed. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 7-6.

To tow the vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes,such as behind a motorhome,see “Recreational Vehicle Towing”following.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle – such as behind amotorhome. The two most commontypes of recreational vehicle towingare known as dinghy towing and

dolly towing. Dinghy towing is towingthe vehicle with all four wheels on theground. Dolly towing is towing thevehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels up on adevice known as a dolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreationalvehicle towing:

• What is the towing capacity of thetowing vehicle? Be sure to readthe tow vehicle manufacturer’srecommendations.

• What is the distance that will betravelled? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

• Is the proper towing equipmentgoing to be used? See yourdealer/retailer or traileringprofessional for additional adviceand equipment recommendations.

• Is the vehicle ready to be towed?Just as preparing the vehicle for along trip, make sure the vehicle isprepared to be towed. See BeforeLeaving on a Long Trip onpage 4-24.

Dinghy TowingFront-wheel-drive and all-wheel-drivevehicles may be dinghy towed fromthe front. These vehicles can also betowed by placing them on a platformtrailer with all four wheels off of theground. For other towing options,see “Dolly Towing” following in thissection.

For vehicles being dinghy towed,the vehicle should be run at thebeginning of each day and at eachRV fuel stop for about five minutes.This will ensure proper lubrication oftransmission components.


To tow the vehicle from the frontwith all four wheels on the ground:

1. Position the vehicle that willbe towed and secure it tothe towing vehicle.

2. Turn the ignition key toACC/ACCESSORY.

3. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

4. Turn fog lamps and allaccessories off.

5. To prevent the battery fromdraining while the vehicle isbeing towed, remove the 2 ampIGN SW fuse from the instrumentpanel fuse block and store it in asafe location. See InstrumentPanel Fuse Block on page 5-80

Notice: If the vehicle is towedwithout performing each of thesteps listed under “DinghyTowing,” the automatictransmission could be damaged.Be sure to follow all steps of thedinghy towing procedure prior toand after towing the vehicle.

Notice: If the vehicle hasa four-speed automatictransmission, it can be dinghytowed from the front for unlimitedmiles at 65 mph (105 km/h).The vehicle could be damaged If65 mph (105 km/h) is exceededwhile towing the vehicle. Therepairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Neverexceed 65 mph (105 km/h) whiletowing the vehicle.

Once the destination has beenreached:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Shift the transmission toP (Park).

3. Reinstall the 2 amp IGN SW fuseto the instrument panel fuseblock.

4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF and remove the key fromthe ignition.

Notice: Too much or toolittle fluid can damage thetransmission. Be sure that thetransmission fluid is at the properlevel before towing with all fourwheels on the ground.

Notice: Do not tow a vehiclewith the front drive wheels on theground if one of the front tires is acompact spare tire. Towing withtwo different tire sizes on the frontof the vehicle can cause severedamage to the transmission.


Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-DriveVehicles)All-wheel-drive vehicles should notbe towed with two wheels onthe ground. To properly tow thesevehicles, they should be placed on aplatform trailer with all four wheelsoff of the ground or dinghy towedfrom the front.

Dolly Towing(Front-Wheel-Drive Vehicles)Front-wheel-drive VUE RedLine vehicles should not be towedwith two wheels on the ground.To properly tow these vehicles, theyshould be placed on a platform trailerwith all four wheels off of the groundor dinghy towed from the front.

To tow the vehicle from the frontwith the rear wheels on the ground,do the following:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Move the shift lever to P (Park).


4. Clamp the steering wheel in astraight-ahead position with aclamping device designedfor towing.

5. Remove the key from theignition.

6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.

7. Release the parking brake.

Towing the Vehicle Fromthe Rear


Notice: Towing the vehicle fromthe rear could damage it. Also,repairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Never havethe vehicle towed from the rear.

Towing a Trailer

{ CAUTION

The driver can lose control whenpulling a trailer if the correctequipment is not used or thevehicle is not driven properly.For example, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not workwell — or even at all. The driverand passengers could beseriously injured. The vehicle mayalso be damaged; the resultingrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Pull a traileronly if all the steps in this sectionhave been followed. Ask yourdealer/retailer for advice andinformation about towing a trailerwith the vehicle.

Notice: Pulling a trailerimproperly can damage thevehicle and result in costlyrepairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. To pull a trailercorrectly, follow the advice in thissection and see your dealer/retailer for important informationabout towing a trailer with thevehicle.

The vehicle can tow a trailer if it isequipped with the proper trailertowing equipment.

To identify the trailering capacity ofthe vehicle, read the informationin “Weight of the Trailer” thatappears later in this section.

Trailering is different than just drivingthe vehicle by itself. Trailering meanschanges in handling, acceleration,braking, durability and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering takescorrect equipment, and it has to beused properly.


The following information has manytime-tested, important trailering tipsand safety rules. Many of these areimportant for your safety and that ofyour passengers. So please read thissection carefully before pulling atrailer.

Load-pulling components such asthe engine, transmission, rear axle,wheel assemblies and tires areforced to work harder against thedrag of the added weight. The engineis required to operate at relativelyhigher speeds and under greaterloads, generating extra heat. Thetrailer also adds considerably to windresistance, increasing the pullingrequirements.

The vehicle has Trailer SwayControl (TSC). See “Trailer SwayControl (TSC)” in StabiliTrak®

System on page 4-7 for moreinformation.

Pulling A TrailerHere are some important points:

• There are many differentlaws, including speed limitrestrictions, having to do withtrailering. Make sure the rig willbe legal, not only where youlive but also where you willbe driving. A good source forthis information can be state orprovincial police.

• Do not tow a trailer at all duringthe first 500 miles (800 km)the new vehicle is driven.The engine, axle or otherparts could be damaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles(800 km) that a trailer is towed, donot drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)and do not make starts at fullthrottle. This helps the engine andother parts of the vehicle wear inat the heavier loads.

• Vehicles can tow in D (Drive).Shift the transmission to a lowergear if the transmission shifts toooften under heavy loads and/orhilly conditions.

• Obey speed limit restrictionswhen towing a trailer. Do not drivefaster than the maximum postedspeed for trailers, or no more than55 mph (90 km/h), to save wearon the vehicle’s parts.

• Do not tow a trailer when theoutside temperature is above100°F (38°C).

Three important considerations haveto do with weight:

• The weight of the trailer

• The weight of the trailer tongue

• The total weight on thevehicle’s tires


Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?

It depends on how the rig isused. For example, speed, altitude,road grades, outside temperatureand how much the vehicle is usedto pull a trailer are all important.It can depend on any special

equipment on the vehicle, and theamount of tongue weight the vehiclecan carry. See “Weight of theTrailer Tongue” later in this sectionfor more information.

Maximum trailer weight is calculatedassuming only the driver is in thetow vehicle and it has all therequired trailering equipment.

The weight of additional optionalequipment, passengers and cargo inthe tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.

Look in the following chart to findthe maximum trailer weight for thevehicle.

Vehicle Axle Ratio Max. Trailer Wt. *GCWR2WD — 2.4L L4 Engine 3.91 1,500 lbs (680 kg) 5,375 lbs (2 438 kg)2WD — 3.6L V6 Engine** 2.77 3,500 lbs (1 588 kg) 7,800 lbs (3 538 kg)AWD — 3.5L V6 Engine 2.77 3,500 lbs (1 588 kg) 8,000 lbs (3 629 kg)AWD — 3.6L V6 Engine** 2.77 3,500 lbs (1 588 kg) 8,000 lbs (3 629 kg)*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversion. The GCWR for the vehicle should not beexceeded.**The VUE Red Line should not be used to tow a trailer.

Ask your dealer/retailer for traileringinformation or advice.


Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer isan important weight to measurebecause it affects the total grossweight of the vehicle. The GrossVehicle Weight (GVW) includesthe curb weight of the vehicle, anycargo carried in it, and the peoplewho will be riding in the vehicle. Ifthere are a lot of options, equipment,passengers or cargo in the vehicle,it will reduce the tongue weight thevehicle can carry, which will alsoreduce the trailer weight the vehiclecan tow. If towing a trailer, thetongue load must be added to theGVW because the vehicle will becarrying that weight, too. SeeLoading the Vehicle on page 4-28 formore information about the vehicle’smaximum load capacity.

For a weight-carrying hitch, thetrailer tongue (A) should weigh10 percent of the total loadedtrailer weight (B).

After loading the trailer, weighthe trailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Trailering may be limited by thevehicle’s ability to carry tongueweight. Tongue weight cannot causethe vehicle to exceed the GVWR(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or theRGAWR (Rear Gross Axle WeightRating). The effect of additional

weight may reduce the traileringcapacity more than the total of theadditional weight.

Consider the following example:

A vehicle model base weight is5,500 lbs (2 495 kg); 2,800 lbs(1 270 kg) at the front axle and2,700 lbs (1 225 kg) at the rearaxle. It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs(3 266 kg), a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs(1 814 kg) and a GCWR (GrossCombination Weight Rating) of14,000 lbs (6 350 kg). The trailerrating should be:

Expect tongue weight to be atleast 10 percent of trailer weight(850 lbs (386 kg)) and because theweight is applied well behind the rearaxle, the effect on the rear axle isgreater than just the weight itself,as much as 1.5 times as much.


The weight at the rear axle could be850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs(578 kg). Since the rear axle alreadyweighs 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg), adding1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the total to3,975 lbs (1 803 kg). This is veryclose to, but within the limit forRGAWR as well. The vehicle is set totrailer up to 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).

If the vehicle has many options andthere is a front seat passenger andtwo rear seat passengers with someluggage and gear in the vehicle aswell, 300 lbs (136 kg) could beadded to the front axle weight and400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear axleweight. The vehicle now weighs:

Weight is still below 7,200 lbs(3 266 kg) and you might think700 additional pounds (318 kg)should be subtracted from the

trailering capacity to stay withinGCWR limits. The maximum trailerwould only be 7,800 lbs (3 538 kg).You may go further and think thetongue weight should be limited toless than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) to avoidexceeding GVWR. But the effect onthe rear axle must still be considered.Because the rear axle now weighs3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), 900 lbs(408 kg) can be put on the rearaxle without exceeding RGAWR.The effect of tongue weight is about1.5 times the actual weight. Dividingthe 900 lbs (408 kg) by 1.5 leavesonly 600 lbs (272 kg) of tongueweight that can be handled. Sincetongue weight is usually at least10 percent of total loaded trailerweight, expect that the largest trailerthe vehicle can properly handle is6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).

It is important that the vehicledoes not exceed any of itsratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,Maximum Trailer Rating or TongueWeight. The only way to be sure it isnot exceeding any of these ratings isto weigh the vehicle and trailer.

Total Weight on the Vehicle’sTiresBe sure the vehicle’s tires areinflated to the upper limit for coldtires. These numbers can be foundon the Certification label or seeLoading the Vehicle on page 4-28for more information. Make sure notto go over the GVW limit for thevehicle, or the GAWR, including theweight of the trailer tongue.


HitchesIt is important to have the correcthitch equipment. Crosswinds,large trucks going by and roughroads are a few reasons whythe right hitch is needed.

• The rear bumper on the vehicle isnot intended for hitches. Do notattach rental hitches or otherbumper-type hitches to it. Useonly a frame-mounted hitch thatdoes not attach to the bumper.

• Will any holes be made in thebody of the vehicle when thetrailer hitch is installed? If so,be sure to seal the holes whenthe hitch is removed. If they arenot sealed, deadly carbonmonoxide (CO) from the engine’sexhaust can get into the vehicle.See Engine Exhaust onpage 2-28. Sealing the holes willalso prevent dirt and water fromentering the vehicle.

Safety ChainsAlways attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongue ofthe trailer to help prevent the tonguefrom contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Instructions about safety chainsmay be provided by the hitchmanufacturer or by the trailermanufacturer. Follow themanufacturer’s recommendationfor attaching safety chains and donot attach them to the bumper.Always leave just enough slack sothe rig can turn. Never allow safetychains to drag on the ground.

Trailer BrakesA loaded trailer that weighs morethan 1,000 lbs (450 kg) needs tohave its own brake system that isadequate for the weight of the trailer.

Be sure to read and follow theinstructions for the trailer brakes sothey are installed, adjusted andmaintained properly. Because thevehicle has StabiliTrak®, do not tryto tap into the vehicle’s hydraulicbrake system. If you do, both brakesystems will not work well, or at all.

Driving with a Trailer

{ CAUTION

When towing a trailer, exhaustgases may collect at the rearof the vehicle and enter if theliftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow is open.

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

(Continued)


CAUTION (Continued)

To maximize safety when towinga trailer:

• Have the exhaust systeminspected for leaks and makenecessary repairs beforestarting a trip.

• Never drive with the liftgate,trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow open.

• Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

• Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See ClimateControl System in the Index.


Towing a trailer requires a certainamount of experience. Get to knowthe rig before setting out for the openroad. Get acquainted with the feel ofhandling and braking with the addedweight of the trailer. And always keepin mind that the vehicle you aredriving is now longer and not asresponsive as the vehicle is by itself.

Before starting, check all trailerhitch parts and attachments, safetychains, electrical connectors, lamps,tires and mirror adjustments. If thetrailer has electric brakes, start thevehicle and trailer moving and thenapply the trailer brake controller byhand to be sure the brakes areworking. This checks the electricalconnection at the same time.

During the trip, check occasionallyto be sure that the load is secure,and that the lamps and anytrailer brakes are still working.

Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid situations thatrequire heavy braking and suddenturns.

PassingMore passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Because therig is longer, it is necessary to gomuch farther beyond the passedvehicle before returning to the lane.

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheelwith one hand. Then, to move thetrailer to the left, move that hand tothe left. To move the trailer to theright, move your hand to the right.Always back up slowly and, ifpossible, have someone guide you.


Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turnswhile trailering could cause thetrailer to come in contact with thevehicle. The vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making verysharp turns while trailering.

When turning with a trailer,make wider turns than normal. Dothis so the trailer will not strike softshoulders, curbs, road signs, trees orother objects. Avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers. Signal well in advance.

Turn Signals When Towing aTrailerThe arrows on the instrument panelflash whenever signaling a turn orlane change. Properly hooked up,the trailer lamps also flash, tellingother drivers the vehicle is turning,changing lanes or stopping.

When towing a trailer, the arrows onthe instrument panel flash for turnseven if the bulbs on the trailer areburned out. For this reason you maythink other drivers are seeing the

signal when they are not. It isimportant to check occasionally to besure the trailer bulbs are still working.

Driving on Grades

Notice: Do not tow on steepcontinuous grades exceeding6 miles (9.6 km). Extended,higher than normal engine andtransmission temperatures mayresult and damage the vehicle.Frequent stops are very importantto allow the engine andtransmission to cool.

Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shiftthe transmission to a lower gear if thetransmission shifts too often underheavy loads and/or hilly conditions.Reduce speed and shift to a lowergear before starting down a long orsteep downgrade. If the transmissionis not shifted down, the brakesmight have to be used so much thatthey would get hot and no longerwork well.

On a long uphill grade, shift downand reduce the vehicle’s speedto around 45 mph (70 km/h)to reduce the possibility of theengine and the transmissionoverheating.

When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, consider thefollowing: Engine coolant will boil at alower temperature than at normalaltitudes. If the engine is turned offimmediately after towing at highaltitude on steep uphill grades, thevehicle may show signs similar toengine overheating. To avoid this,let the engine run while parked,preferably on level ground, with theautomatic transmission in P (Park)for a few minutes before turning theengine off. If the overheat warningcomes on, see Engine Overheatingon page 5-25.


Parking on Hills

{ CAUTION

Parking the vehicle on a hill withthe trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet.Turn the wheels into the curb iffacing downhill or into trafficif facing uphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks arein place, release the regularbrakes until the chocks absorbthe load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake andshift into P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill1. Apply and hold the brake pedal

while you:

• Start the engine

• Shift into a gear

• Release the parking brake

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.

Maintenance When TrailerTowingThe vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer. SeeScheduled Maintenance on page 6-3for more information. Things thatare especially important in traileroperation are automatic transmissionfluid, engine oil, axle lubricant, belts,cooling system and brake system.It is a good idea to inspect thesebefore and during the trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When TrailerTowingThe cooling system may temporarilyoverheat during severe operatingconditions. See Engine Overheatingon page 5-25.


✍ NOTES


Service andAppearance CareServiceService ................................5-3Accessories andModifications .......................5-3

California Proposition 65Warning .............................5-4

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements ........5-4

Doing Your OwnService Work ......................5-4

Adding Equipment to theOutside of the Vehicle ...........5-5

FuelFuel ....................................5-5Gasoline Octane ...................5-5Gasoline Specifications ..........5-6California Fuel ......................5-6Additives ..............................5-6Fuels in Foreign Countries ......5-8Filling the Tank .....................5-8Filling a Portable FuelContainer ..........................5-10

Checking Things Underthe HoodChecking Things Underthe Hood ..........................5-10

Hood Release .....................5-11Engine CompartmentOverview ..........................5-12

Engine Oil ..........................5-14Engine Oil Life System .........5-16Engine Air Cleaner/Filter .......5-17Automatic TransmissionFluid ................................5-18

Cooling System ...................5-19Engine Coolant ...................5-22Coolant Surge TankPressure Cap ....................5-25

Engine Overheating .............5-25Power Steering Fluid ............5-26Windshield Washer Fluid ......5-27Brakes ...............................5-28Battery ...............................5-30Jump Starting .....................5-31

All-Wheel DriveAll-Wheel Drive ...................5-35

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming ................5-36

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement ...............5-39Halogen Bulbs ....................5-39Headlamps .........................5-39Front Turn Signal andParking Lamps ..................5-40

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps and Back-upLamps ..............................5-40

License Plate Lamp .............5-41Replacement Bulbs ..............5-41

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield Wiper BladeReplacement .....................5-42

TiresTires ..................................5-43Tire Sidewall Labeling ..........5-44Tire Terminology andDefinitions .........................5-46

Inflation - Tire Pressure ........5-49High-Speed Operation ..........5-50Tire Pressure MonitorSystem .............................5-51

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation ..........................5-53

Service and Appearance Care 5-1

Tire Inspection andRotation ............................5-56

When It Is Time forNew Tires .........................5-57

Buying New Tires ................5-58Different Size Tires andWheels .............................5-59

Uniform Tire QualityGrading ............................5-60

Wheel Alignment andTire Balance .....................5-61

Wheel Replacement .............5-62Tire Chains .........................5-62If a Tire Goes Flat ...............5-63Changing a Flat Tire ............5-64Removing the SpareTire and Tools ...................5-65

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire .......5-66

Storing a Flat or SpareTire and Tools ...................5-70

Compact Spare Tire .............5-71

Appearance CareInterior Cleaning ..................5-72Fabric/Carpet ......................5-73Leather ..............................5-74Instrument Panel, Vinyl, andOther Plastic Surfaces .........5-74

Care of Safety Belts ............5-74Weatherstrips ......................5-75Washing Your Vehicle ..........5-75Cleaning ExteriorLamps/Lenses ...................5-75

Finish Care .........................5-76Windshield and WiperBlades ..............................5-76

Aluminum Wheels ................5-77Tires ..................................5-77Sheet Metal Damage ...........5-78Finish Damage ....................5-78Underbody Maintenance .......5-78Chemical Paint Spotting ........5-78

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) ....................5-79

Service Parts IdentificationLabel ...............................5-79

Electrical SystemAdd-On ElectricalEquipment ........................5-79

Windshield Wiper Fuses .......5-80Power Windows andOther Power Options ..........5-80

Fuses and CircuitBreakers ...........................5-80

Instrument PanelFuse Block .......................5-80

Underhood Fuse Block .........5-82

Capacities andSpecificationsCapacities andSpecifications ....................5-86

5-2 Service and Appearance Care

ServiceFor service and parts needs,visit your dealer/retailer. You willreceive genuine Saturn parts andSaturn-trained and supported servicepeople.

Genuine Saturn parts have one ofthese marks.

Accessories andModificationsWhen non-dealer/non-retaileraccessories are added to the vehicle,they can affect vehicle performanceand safety, including such thingsas airbags, braking, stability, rideand handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. Some of these accessoriescould even cause malfunction ordamage not covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from the installation or useof non-GM certified parts, includingcontrol module modifications, arenot covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. Your GMdealer/retailer can accessorize thevehicle using genuine GMAccessories. When you go to yourGM dealer/retailer and ask for GMAccessories, you will know thatGM-trained and supported servicetechnicians will perform the workusing genuine GM Accessories.

Also, see Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 1-57.


California Proposition 65WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of Californiato cause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems(including some inside the vehicle),many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, seat belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries containedin remote keyless transmitters, maycontain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ CAUTION

You can be injured and thevehicle could be damaged if youtry to do service work on a vehiclewithout knowing enough about it.

• Be sure you have sufficientknowledge, experience, theproper replacement parts, andtools before attempting anyvehicle maintenance task.

• Be sure to use the propernuts, bolts, and otherfasteners. English and metricfasteners can be easilyconfused. If the wrongfasteners are used, partscan later break or fall off.You could be hurt.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper service manual.It tells you much more about how toservice the vehicle than this manualcan. To order the proper servicemanual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 7-15.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 1-56.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the dateof any service work performed. SeeMaintenance Record on page 6-17.


Adding Equipment to theOutside of the VehicleThings added to the outside of thevehicle can affect the airflowaround it. This can cause windnoise and can affect fuel economyand windshield washer performance.Check with your dealer/retailerbefore adding equipment tothe outside of the vehicle.

FuelUse of the recommended fuelis an important part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. To helpkeep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, werecommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

The 8th digit of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) showsthe code letter or number thatidentifies the vehicle’s engine.The VIN is at the top left of theinstrument panel. See VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) onpage 5-79.

Gasoline OctaneIf the vehicle has the 2.4L L4 engine(VIN Code P) or the 3.5L V6 engine(VIN Code N), use regular unleadedgasoline with a posted octane ratingof 87 or higher. If the octane rating isless than 87, you might notice anaudible knocking noise when youdrive, commonly referred to as sparkknock. If this occurs, use a gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher as soonas possible. If you are using gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher and youhear heavy knocking, the engineneeds service.

If the vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine(VIN Code 7), use regular unleadedgasoline with a posted octanerating of 87 or higher. For bestperformance or trailer towing, youcould choose to use middle grade89 octane unleaded gasoline.


If the octane rating is less than 87,you might notice an audible knockingnoise when you drive, commonlyreferred to as spark knock. If thisoccurs, use a gasoline rated at 87octane or higher as soon as possible.If you are using gasoline rated at 87octane or higher and you hear heavyknocking, the engine needs service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline shouldmeet ASTM specification D 4814in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in Canada.Some gasolines contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See Additives onpage 5-6 for additional information.

California FuelIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California emissionsstandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission controlsystem performance might beaffected. The malfunction indicatorlamp could turn on and the vehiclemight fail a smog-check test. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 3-35. If this occurs, return toyour authorized dealer/retailer fordiagnosis. If it is determined that thecondition is caused by the type offuel used, repairs might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolinesin the United States are now requiredto contain additives that help preventengine and fuel system depositsfrom forming, allowing the emissioncontrol system to work properly.In most cases, you should nothave to add anything to the fuel.However, some gasolines containonly the minimum amount of additiverequired to meet U.S. EnvironmentalProtection Agency regulations. Tohelp keep fuel injectors and intakevalves clean, or if the vehicleexperiences problems due to dirtyinjectors or valves, look for gasolinethat is advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline.


For customers who do not use TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,one bottle of GM Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS, added to the fueltank at every engine oil change,can help clean deposits from fuelinjectors and intake valves. GM FuelSystem Treatment PLUS is the onlygasoline additive recommended byGeneral Motors.

Also, your dealer/retailer hasadditives that will help correct andprevent most deposit-relatedproblems.

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, andreformulated gasolines mightbe available in your area. Werecommend that you use thesegasolines, if they comply with thespecifications described earlier.

However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than10% ethanol must not be used invehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered underthe vehicle warranty.

Some gasolines that arenot reformulated for lowemissions can contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask theattendant where you buy gasolinewhether the fuel contains MMT.

We recommend against the use ofsuch gasolines. Fuels containingMMT can reduce the life of sparkplugs and the performance of theemission control system could beaffected. The malfunction indicatorlamp might turn on. If this occurs,return to your dealer/retailer forservice.


Fuels in ForeignCountriesIf you plan on driving in anothercountry outside the United States orCanada, the proper fuel might behard to find. Never use leadedgasoline or any other fuel notrecommended in the previous texton fuel. Costly repairs causedby use of improper fuel would notbe covered by the vehicle warranty.

To check the fuel availability, askan auto club, or contact a major oilcompany that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.

Filling the Tank

{ CAUTION

Fuel vapor burns violently and afuel fire can cause bad injuries.To help avoid injuries to you andothers, read and follow all theinstructions on the pump island.Turn off the engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you arenear fuel or refueling the vehicle.Do not use cellular phones. Keepsparks, flames, and smokingmaterials away from fuel. Do notleave the fuel pump unattendedwhen refueling the vehicle. This isagainst the law in some places.Do not re-enter the vehicle whilepumping fuel. Keep children awayfrom the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

Unlock the gas cap door by pressingthe door lock switch located on thedriver door trim.

The tethered fuel cap is locatedbehind a hinged fuel door onthe driver side of the vehicle.


To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowlycounterclockwise. The fuel cap has aspring in it; if the cap is released toosoon, it will spring back to the right.To avoid fuel contact on the paintedsurface of the vehicle when filling thefuel tank, place the tethered cap onthe fuel filler door.

{ CAUTION

Fuel can spray out on you if youopen the fuel cap too quickly. Ifyou spill fuel and then somethingignites it, you could be badlyburned. This spray can happen ifthe tank is nearly full, and is morelikely in hot weather. Open thefuel cap slowly and wait for anyhiss noise to stop. Then unscrewthe cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not topoff or overfill the tank and wait a fewseconds after you have finishedpumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces assoon as possible. See Washing YourVehicle on page 5-75.

When replacing the fuel cap, turnit clockwise until it clicks. Makesure the cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine ifthe fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. This wouldallow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 3-35.

{ CAUTION

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuelcap, be sure to get the right type.Your dealer/retailer can get one foryou. If you get the wrong type, itmight not fit properly. This cancause the malfunction indicatorlamp to light and can damage thefuel tank and emissions system.See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 3-35.


Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ CAUTION

Never fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle. Staticelectricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuel vapor.You can be badly burned and thevehicle damaged if this occurs. Tohelp avoid injury to you and others:

• Dispense fuel only intoapproved containers.

• Do not fill a container while itis inside a vehicle, in avehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, oron any surface other than theground.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

• Bring the fill nozzle in contactwith the inside of the fillopening before operating thenozzle. Contact should bemaintained until the filling iscomplete.

• Do not smoke whilepumping fuel.

• Do not use a cellular phonewhile pumping fuel.

Checking ThingsUnder the Hood

{ CAUTION

An electric fan under the hood canstart up and injure you even whenthe engine is not running. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ CAUTION

Things that burn can get on hotengine parts and start a fire.These include liquids like fuel, oil,coolant, brake fluid, windshieldwasher and other fluids, andplastic or rubber. You or otherscould be burned. Be careful not todrop or spill things that will burnonto a hot engine.


Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the handle with this symbolon it. It is located under theinstrument panel on the driverside of the vehicle. 2. Then go to the front of the

vehicle and lift up on thesecondary hood release lever.

3. Lift the hood.

Before closing the hood, be sureall the filler caps are on properly.Then pull the hood down and closeit firmly.


Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood on the 2.4L L4 engine, you will see the following:

A. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 5-17.

B. Electric Engine Cooling Fan (Outof View). See Cooling System onpage 5-19.

C. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View).See “Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 5-14.

D. Engine Oil Fill Cap (Out of View).See “When to Add Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 5-14.

E. Brake Fluid Reservoir. SeeBrakes on page 5-28.

F. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See“Checking Coolant” under EngineCoolant on page 5-22.

G. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.See Jump Starting on page 5-31.

H. See Underhood Fuse Blockon page 5-82.

I. See Battery on page 5-30.J. Windshield Washer Fluid

Reservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 5-27.


When you open the hood on the 3.5L V6 engine (3.6L V6 similar), you willsee the following:

A. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 5-17.

B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir(Out of View). See PowerSteering Fluid on page 5-26.

C. Electric Engine Cooling Fan (Outof View). See Cooling Systemon page 5-19.

D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” under EngineOil on page 5-14.

E. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View).See “Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 5-14.

F. Automatic Transmission FluidDipstick (Out of View). See“Checking the Fluid Level” underAutomatic Transmission Fluidon page 5-18.

G. Brake Fluid Reservoir (Out ofView). See Brakes on page 5-28.

H. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank.See Cooling System onpage 5-19.

I. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.See Jump Starting on page 5-31.

J. See Underhood Fuse Blockon page 5-82.

K. See Battery on page 5-30.L. Windshield Washer Fluid

Reservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 5-27.


Engine OilChecking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check theengine oil level at each fuel fill. Inorder to get an accurate reading, theoil must be warm and the vehiclemust be on level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is ayellow loop. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 5-12 for the location of theengine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give theoil several minutes to drain backinto the oil pan. If this is notdone, the oil dipstick might notshow the actual level.

2. Pull the dipstick and clean it witha paper towel or cloth, then pushit back in all the way. Removeit again, keeping the tip down andcheck the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the MIN (minimum)mark, add at least one quart/literof the recommended oil. Thissection explains what kind of oil touse. For engine oil crankcasecapacity, see Capacities andSpecifications on page 5-86.

Notice: Do not add too muchoil. If the engine has so much oilthat the oil level gets above theupper mark that shows the properoperating range, the engine couldbe damaged.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 5-12 for the location ofthe engine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all theway back in when through.


What Kind of Engine Oil to UseLook for three things:

• GM6094M

Use only an oil that meets GMStandard GM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30

SAE 5W-30 is best for thevehicle. These numbers on anoil container show its viscosity,or thickness. Do not useother viscosity oils such asSAE 20W-50.

• American Petroleum Institute(API) starburst symbol

Oils meeting these requirementsshould have the starburstsymbol on the container. Thissymbol indicates that the oil hasbeen certified by the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API).

Notice: Use only engine oilidentified as meeting GM StandardGM6094M and showing theAmerican Petroleum InstituteCertified For Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. Failure to usethe recommended oil can result inengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

Cold Temperature OperationIf in an area of extreme cold, wherethe temperature falls below −20°F(−29°C), use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30engine oil. Both provide easier coldstarting for the engine at extremelylow temperatures. Always use an oilthat meets the required specification,GM6094M. See “What Kind ofEngine Oil to Use” for moreinformation.


Engine Oil Additives / EngineOil FlushesDo not add anything to the oil.The recommended oils with thestarburst symbol that meet GMStandard GM6094M are all that isneeded for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

Engine Oil Life SystemWhen to Change Engine OilThis vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. Forthe oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change isnecessary. A change engine oil lightcomes on. See Change Engine OilLight on page 3-38. Change the oilas soon as possible within the next600 miles (1 000 km). It is possiblethat, if driving under the bestconditions, the oil life system mightnot indicate that an oil change isnecessary for over a year. However,the engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year and atthis time the system must be reset.Your dealer/retailer has trainedservice people who will perform thiswork using genuine parts and resetthe system. It is also important tocheck the oil regularly and keep it atthe proper level.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 3,000 miles (5 000 km)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife SystemThe Engine Oil Life Systemcalculates when to change theengine oil and filter based on vehicleuse. Whenever the oil is changed,reset the system so it can calculatewhen the next oil change is required.If a situation occurs where the oil ischanged prior to a change engineoil light being turned on, reset thesystem.

After changing the engine oil, resetthe system:

1. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUNwith the engine off.

2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal three timeswithin five seconds.If the change engine oil light isnot on, the system is reset.

If the light comes on again and stayson for 30 seconds at the next ignitioncycle, it did not reset. The systemneeds to be reset again.


What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer’s warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change your ownoil, be sure to drain all the oil from thefilter before disposal. Never disposeof oil by putting it in the trash, pouringit on the ground, into sewers, or intostreams or bodies of water. Recycleit by taking it to a place that collectsused oil.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterSee Engine Compartment Overviewon page 5-12 for the location of theengine air cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter at theMaintenance II intervals and replaceit at the first oil change after each50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval.See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 6-3 for more information. If youare driving in dusty/dirty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oilchange.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterTo inspect the air cleaner/filterremove the filter from the vehicleand lightly shake the filter to releaseloose dust and dirt. If the filterremains caked with dirt, a new filteris required.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter, do the following:

1. Remove the clamp on the airduct hose.

2. Disconnect the hose.

3. Remove the four bolts on theside of the air cleaner assembly.

4. Turn the cover upward todisengage the cover hinges.

5. Remove the air cleaner coverassembly and air filter element.


6. Inspect or replace the air filterelement.If the air filter element is dirty,you should replace it. If it is onlydusty, it may be cleaned byblowing compressed air throughit from the clean side.Make sure you are away fromthe engine compartment whencleaning the air filter withcompressed air.Wipe all dust from inside of thehousing and inspect the aircleaner and air outlet duct forcracks, cuts and deterioration.The air outlet duct must bereplaced if damaged.

7. Reverse Steps 1 through 5 toreinstall the engine air cleaner/filter cover and air duct hose.

{ CAUTION

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause youor others to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. If it is not there and theengine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with it off,and be careful working on theengine with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filteris off, a backfire can cause adamaging engine fire. And, dirtcan easily get into the engine,which will damage it. Always havethe air cleaner/filter in place whenyou are driving.

Automatic TransmissionFluidIt is not necessary to checkthe transmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is theonly reason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take your vehicle to thedealer/retailer and have it repairedas soon as possible.

Change the fluid and filter atthe intervals listed in AdditionalRequired Services on page 6-6, andbe sure to use the transmissionfluid listed in Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 6-13.


Notice: Use of the incorrectautomatic transmission fluidmay damage the vehicle, and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle’s warranty. Always usethe automatic transmission fluidlisted in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-13.

For the 2.4L, 3.5L and 3.6L engines,the transmission fluid will notreach the end of the dipstick unlessthe transmission is at operatingtemperature. If you need to check thetransmission fluid level, please takeyour vehicle to your dealer/retailer.

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift thehood, here is what you will see:

A. Electric Engine FanB. Coolant Surge TankC. Pressure Cap

{ CAUTION

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolantsurge tank is boiling, do not doanything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked on alevel surface.

2.4L L4 Engine shown, 3.5L V6and 3.6L V6 Engines similar


The coolant level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX lines. If it is not,you may have a leak at the radiatorhoses, heater hoses, radiator, waterpump, or somewhere else in thecooling system.

{ CAUTION

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, withthe engine on, check to see ifthe electric engine cooling fan isrunning. If the engine is overheating,the fan should be running. If it isnot, your vehicle needs service.Turn off the engine.

Notice: Engine damage fromrunning the engine withoutcoolant is not covered by thewarranty.

Notice: Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can cause prematureengine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changingsooner, at 30,000 miles(50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Anyrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolantin the vehicle.

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank

Notice: This vehicle has aspecific coolant fill procedure.Failure to follow this procedurecould cause the engine tooverheat and be severelydamaged.

If you have not found a problemyet, check to see if coolant isvisible in the surge tank. If coolant isvisible but the coolant level is not atbetween the MIN and MAX lines, adda 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL® coolant atthe coolant surge tank, but be surethe cooling system, including thecoolant surge tank pressure cap, iscool before you do it. See EngineCoolant on page 5-22 for moreinformation.


{ CAUTION

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. They areunder pressure, and if you turnthe coolant surge tank pressurecap — even a little — they cancome out at high speed. Neverturn the cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap, is hot.Wait for the cooling system andcoolant surge tank pressure capto cool if you ever have to turnthe pressure cap.

{ CAUTION

Adding only plain water to thecooling system can be dangerous.Plain water, or some other liquidsuch as alcohol, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The vehicle’s coolant warningsystem is set for the propercoolant mixture. With plain wateror the wrong mixture, the enginecould get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Theengine could catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Use a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, watercan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core and otherparts. Use the recommendedcoolant and the proper coolantmixture.

{ CAUTION

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

1. You can remove the coolantsurge tank pressure cap whenthe cooling system, including thecoolant surge tank pressure capand upper radiator hose, is nolonger hot.Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise aboutone-quarter of a turn. If you heara hiss, wait for that to stop.


This will allow any pressure stillleft to be vented out thedischarge hose.

2. Then keep turning the pressurecap slowly, and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank withthe proper DEX-COOL® coolantmixture, to between the MINand MAX lines.

4. With the coolant surge tankpressure cap off, start the engineand let it run until you can feelthe upper radiator hose gettinghot. Watch out for the enginecooling fan.By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surge tank maybe lower. If the level is lower, addmore of the proper DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture to the coolantsurge tank until the level reachesbetween the MIN and MAX lines.

5. Then replace the pressure cap.Be sure the pressure cap ishand-tight.

Check the level in the surgetank when the cooling systemhas cooled down. If the coolant isnot at the proper level, repeatSteps 1 through 3 and reinstall thepressure cap. If the coolant still is notat the proper level when the systemcools down again, see your dealer/retailer.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicleis filled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in your vehicle for five yearsor 150,000 miles (240 000 km),whichever occurs first, if you addonly DEX-COOL® extended lifecoolant.

The following explains your coolingsystem and how to add coolantwhen it is low. If you have a problemwith engine overheating, seeEngine Overheating on page 5-25.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Give freezing protection down to−34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to265°F (129°C).


• Protect against rust andcorrosion.

• Help keep the proper enginetemperature.

• Let the warning lights and gageswork as they should.

Notice: Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can cause prematureengine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changingsooner, at the first maintenanceservice after each 30,000 miles(50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Anyrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Alwaysuse DEX-COOL® (silicate-free)coolant in the vehicle.

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean,drinkable water and one-halfDEX-COOL® coolant which will notdamage aluminum parts. If youuse this coolant mixture, you do notneed to add anything else.

{ CAUTION

Adding only plain water to thecooling system can be dangerous.Plain water, or some other liquidsuch as alcohol, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The vehicle’s coolant warningsystem is set for the propercoolant mixture. With plain wateror the wrong mixture, the enginecould get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Theengine could catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Use a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: If an improper coolantmixture is used, the engine couldoverheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Too much water in the mixturecan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and otherparts.

If you have to add coolant morethan four times a year, haveyour dealer/retailer check yourcooling system.

Notice: If extra inhibitorsand/or additives are used inthe vehicle’s cooling system,the vehicle could be damaged.Use only the proper mixture ofthe engine coolant listed inthis manual for the coolingsystem. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants onpage 6-13 for more information.


Checking Coolant

The surge tank is located onthe driver side of the enginecompartment. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 5-12 for more informationon location.

{ CAUTION

Turning the surge tank pressurecap when the engine and radiatorare hot can allow steam andscalding liquids to blow out andburn you badly. Never turn thesurge tank pressure cap — evena little — when the engine andradiator are hot.

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface. When your engine is cold,the coolant level should bebetween the MIN and MAX lines.

Adding Coolant

If you need more coolant, add theproper DEX-COOL® coolant mixtureat the surge tank, but only whenthe engine is cool. See CoolingSystem on page 5-19 for instructionson “How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank”.

{ CAUTION

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycol,and it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

When replacing the pressure cap,make sure it is hand-tight andfully seated.


Coolant Surge TankPressure CapNotice: If the pressure cap is nottightly installed, coolant loss andpossible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

If you need to replace your coolantsurge tank pressure cap, seeyour retailer.

Engine OverheatingThere is a coolant temperaturewarning light on your vehicle’sinstrument panel. See EngineCoolant Temperature Warning Lighton page 3-34.

If Steam Is Coming From YourEngine

{ CAUTION

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down. Waituntil there is no sign of steam orcoolant before you open the hood.

If you keep driving when yourengine is overheated, the liquidsin it can catch fire. You or otherscould be badly burned. Stop yourengine if it overheats, and get outof the vehicle until the engineis cool.

Notice: If the engine catches firebecause of being driven withno coolant, your vehicle can bebadly damaged. The costlyrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

If No Steam Is Coming FromYour EngineIf you get an engine overheatwarning, but see or hear no steam,the problem may not be too serious.Sometimes the engine can get a littletoo hot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

• Tow a trailer.


If you get the overheat warning withno sign of steam, try this for aminute or so:

1. If you have an air conditionerand it is on, turn it off.

2. Turn on your heater to full hot atthe highest fan speed and openthe windows as necessary.

3. Try to minimize engine load. Ifyou are in a traffic jam, shift toN (Neutral); otherwise, shift to thehighest gear possible whiledriving.

If you no longer have the overheatwarning, you can drive. Just tobe safe, drive slower for aboutten minutes. If the warning doesnot come back on, you can drivenormally.

If the warning continues and youhave not stopped, pull over, stop,and park your vehicle right away.

If there is still no sign of steam, idlethe engine for three minuteswhile you are parked. If the warningcontinues, turn off the engine andget everyone out of the vehicle untilit cools down.

You may decide not to lift the hoodbut to get service help right away.

Power Steering Fluid

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 5-12 for reservoir location.

When to Check PowerSteering FluidPower steering fluid is used in allvehicles with V6 engines. Vehicleswith the 4-cylinder engine haveelectric power steering and does notuse power steering fluid.

It is not necessary to regularlycheck power steering fluid unlessyou suspect there is a leak inthe system or you hear an unusualnoise. A fluid loss in this systemcould indicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired.

How to Check Power SteeringFluidTo check the power steering fluid,do the following:

1. Turn the key off and let theengine compartment cool down.

2. Remove engine oil fill cap.

3. Slide engine cover rearward andlift to remove.


4. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

5. Unscrew the cap and wipe thedipstick with a clean rag.

6. Replace the cap and completelytighten it.

7. Remove the cap again and lookat the fluid level on the dipstick.

The fluid level should be within thearea indicated on the dipstickwhen the engine is cold.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid touse, Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-13. Alwaysuse the proper fluid.

Notice: Use of the incorrect fluidmay damage the vehicle andthe damages may not be coveredby the vehicle’s warranty.Always use the correct fluidlisted in Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 6-13.

Windshield Washer FluidWhat to UseWhen you need windshield or rearwindow washer fluid, be sure toread the manufacturer’s instructionsbefore use. If you will be operatingyour vehicle in an area wherethe temperature may fall belowfreezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection against freezing.

Adding Windshield WasherFluid

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 5-12 for reservoir location.

Notice:

• When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer’s instructions foradding water.

• Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage yourwasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean aswell as washer fluid.

• Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it isvery cold. This allows for fluidexpansion if freezing occurs,which could damage the tank ifit is completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in your windshieldwasher. It can damage thevehicle’s windshield washersystem and paint.


BrakesBrake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluid. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 5-12 for the location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:

• The brake fluid level goes downbecause of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

• A fluid leak in the brake hydraulicsystem can also cause a low fluidlevel. Have the brake hydraulicsystem fixed, since a leak meansthat sooner or later the brakes willnot work well.

Do not top off the brake fluid. Addingfluid does not correct a leak. If fluid isadded when the linings are worn,there will be too much fluid when newbrake linings are installed. Add orremove brake fluid, as necessary,only when work is done on the brakehydraulic system.

{ CAUTION

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight on page 3-31.

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brake fluidfrom a sealed container. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-13.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from enteringthe reservoir.

{ CAUTION

With the wrong kind of fluid inthe brake hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake fluid.


Notice:

• Using the wrong fluid can badlydamage brake hydraulic systemparts. For example, just a fewdrops of mineral-based oil,such as engine oil, in the brakehydraulic system can damagebrake hydraulic system parts sobadly that they will have to bereplaced. Do not let someoneput in the wrong kind of fluid.

• If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle’s painted surfaces, thepaint finish can be damaged. Becareful not to spill brake fluidon the vehicle. If you do, wash itoff immediately. See WashingYour Vehicle on page 5-75.

Brake WearThis vehicle has disc brakes. Discbrake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brakepads are worn and new pads areneeded. The sound can comeand go or be heard all the time thevehicle is moving, except whenapplying the brake pedal firmly.

{ CAUTION

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toan accident. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive withworn-out brake pads couldresult in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help preventbrake pulsation. When tires arerotated, inspect brake pads for wearand evenly tighten wheel nuts inthe proper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities andSpecifications on page 5-86.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer/retailer if the brakepedal does not return to normalheight, or if there is a rapid increasein pedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service might be required.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehicle moving,the brakes adjust for wear.


Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicleis complex. Its many parts have tobe of top quality and work welltogether if the vehicle is to havereally good braking. The vehicle wasdesigned and tested with top-qualitybrake parts. When parts of thebraking system are replaced — forexample, when the brake liningswear down and new ones areinstalled — be sure to get newapproved replacement parts. If thisis not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example, ifsomeone puts in brake liningsthat are wrong for the vehicle, thebalance between the front andrear brakes can change — for theworse. The braking performanceexpected can change in many otherways if the wrong replacementbrake parts are installed.

BatteryThis vehicle has a maintenance freebattery. When it is time for a newbattery, see your dealer/retailer forone that has the replacementnumber shown on the originalbattery’s label. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 5-12 for battery location.Warning: Battery posts, terminals,and related accessories containlead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer andreproductive harm. Wash handsafter handling.

Vehicle Storage

{ CAUTION

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Startingon page 5-31 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: If the vehicle isdriven infrequently, remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery. This helps keep the batteryfrom running down.

Extended Storage: For extendedstorage of the vehicle, remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger. This helps maintain thecharge of the battery over anextended period of time.


Jump StartingIf the vehicle battery has run down,you may want to use another vehicleand some jumper cables to start yourvehicle. Be sure to use the followingsteps to do it safely.

{ CAUTION

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

• They contain acid that canburn you.

• They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

• They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these stepscould result in costly damage tothe vehicle that would not becovered by the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle bypushing or pulling it will not work,and it could damage the vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. Itmust have a 12-volt battery witha negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’ssystem is not a 12-volt systemwith a negative ground, bothvehicles can be damaged. Onlyuse vehicles with 12-volt systemswith negative grounds to jumpstart your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables can reach,but be sure the vehicles are nottouching each other. If they are, itcould cause a ground connectionyou do not want. You would notbe able to start your vehicle, andthe bad grounding could damagethe electrical systems.

To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put the transmissionin P (Park) before setting theparking brake.

Notice: If you leave the radio orother accessories on during thejump starting procedure, theycould be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by thewarranty. Always turn off the radioand other accessories when jumpstarting the vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged into thecigarette lighter or the accessorypower outlet. Turn off the radioand all lamps that are not needed.This will avoid sparks, helpingsave both batteries and the radio.


4. Open the hood on the othervehicle and locate the positive (+)and negative (−) terminallocations on that vehicle.Open the hood on your vehicleand find the remote positive (+)and remote negative (−) jumpstarting terminals.

Your vehicle is equipped witha remote positive (+) terminal.This is located in the enginecompartment on the driver sideof the vehicle, on the underhoodfuse block. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 5-12 for more informationon location.

To uncover the remote positive(+) terminal, press the tab on thebottom of the fuse block andlift the cover up.The remote negative (−) terminalis a stud on the driver sidenear the underhood fuse block.Place the negative (−) jumpercable clamp on the negative (−)terminal on top of the battery.

{ CAUTION

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{ CAUTION

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode.People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded. Usea flashlight if you need more light.

Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You do not need to addwater to the battery installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it islow, add water to take care of thatfirst. If you do not, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.


{ CAUTION

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cablesdo not have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehiclescould also be damaged.Before you connect the cables,here are some basic things youshould know. Positive (+) will goto positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one. Negative (−) will go to aheavy, unpainted metal enginepart or to a remote negative (−)terminal if the vehicle has one.

Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will get a shortthat would damage the batteryand maybe other parts. Do notconnect the negative (−) cable tothe negative (−) terminal on thedead battery because this cancause sparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the positive (+) terminalon the vehicle with the deadbattery. Use a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other endtouch metal. Connect it to thepositive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the blacknegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal of thegood battery. Use a remotenegative (−) terminal if the vehiclehas one.Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step. Theother end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the deadbattery. It goes to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part or toa remote negative (−) terminal onthe vehicle with the dead battery.

9. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable away from thedead battery, but not near engineparts that move. The electricalconnection is just as good there,and the chance of sparks gettingback to the battery is much less.


10. Now start the vehicle with thegood battery and run theengine for a while.

11. Press the unlock symbol on theremote keyless entry transmitterto disarm your security system, ifequipped.

12. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, it probablyneeds service.

Notice: If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correct order,making sure that the cables do nottouch each other or other metal.

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal EnginePart or Remote Negative (−)Terminal

B. Good Battery or RemotePositive (+) and RemoteNegative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or RemotePositive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cablesfrom both vehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−)cable from the vehicle that hadthe dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−)cable from the vehicle with thegood battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the vehicle with thegood battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the other vehicle.

5. Return the underhood fuse blockcover to its original position, ifapplicable.

Jumper Cable Removal


All-Wheel DriveIt is recommended that the all-wheeldrive lubricants be checked andfilled by the dealer/retailer.

Transfer Case

When to Check and ChangeLubricant

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine how often to checkthe lubricant and when to change it.See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 6-3.

How to Check Lubricant

A. Fill PlugB. Drain Plug

To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a level surface.

If the level is below the bottomof the filler plug hole, located onthe transfer case, you’ll need toadd some lubricant. Add enoughlubricant to raise the level tothe bottom of the filler plug hole.

A fluid loss could indicate a problem;check and have it repaired, ifneeded.

What to Use

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine what kind of lubricantto use. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.

Carrier Assembly-Differential(Rear Drive Module)

When to Check and ChangeLubricant

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine how often to checkthe lubricant and when to change it.See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 6-3.


How to Check Lubricant

A. Fill PlugB. Drain Plug

To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a level surface.

If the level is below the bottom ofthe filler plug hole, you’ll need toadd some lubricant. Add enoughlubricant to raise the level to thebottom of the filler plug hole. A fluidloss could indicate a problem; checkand have it repaired, if needed.

What to Use

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine what kind of lubricantto use. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.

Headlamp AimingThe headlamp aiming system hasbeen preset at the factory.

If the vehicle is damaged in anaccident, the aim of the headlampsmay be affected and adjustmentmay be necessary.

It is recommended that adealer/retailer adjust the headlamps.To re-aim the headlamps yourself,use the following procedure.

The vehicle should be properlyprepared as follows:

• The vehicle should be placed sothe headlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m)from a light colored wall.

• The vehicle must have all fourtires on a level surface whichis level all the way to the wall.

• The vehicle should be placed soit is perpendicular to the wall orother flat surface.

AWD Differential Case


• The vehicle should not have anysnow, ice, or mud on it.

• The vehicle should be fullyassembled and all otherwork stopped while headlampaiming is being performed.

• The vehicle should be normallyloaded with a full tank of fuel andone person or 160 lbs (75 kg)sitting on the driver’s seat.

• Tires should be properly inflated.

Headlamp aiming is done with thevehicle’s low-beam headlamps.The high-beam headlamps will becorrectly aimed if the low-beamheadlamps are aimed properly.

To adjust the vertical aim, do thefollowing:

1. Open the hood. See HoodRelease on page 5-11 formore information.

2. Locate the aim dot on the lens ofthe low-beam headlamp.

3. Measure the distance from theground to the aim dot on thelow-beam headlamp. Record thedistance.

4. At the wall measure from theground upward (A) to therecorded distance from Step 3and mark it.

5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B)on the wall the width of thevehicle at the height of the markin Step 4.


Notice: Do not cover a headlampto improve beam cut-off whenaiming. Covering a headlamp maycause excessive heat build-upwhich may cause damage to theheadlamp.

6. Turn on the low-beam headlampsand place a piece of cardboardor equivalent in front of theheadlamp not being adjusted.This allows only the beam of lightfrom the headlamp being adjustedto be seen on the flat surface. 7. Locate the vertical headlamp

aiming screws, which areunder the hood near eachheadlamp assembly.The adjustment screw can beturned with a E8 Torx® socket.

8. Turn the vertical aiming screwuntil the headlamp beam is aimedto the horizontal tape line. Turnit clockwise or counterclockwiseto raise or lower the angle ofthe beam.

9. Make sure that the light from theheadlamp is positioned at thebottom edge of the horizontaltape line. The lamp on the left (A)shows the correct headlamp aim.The lamp on the right (B) showsthe incorrect headlamp aim.

10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 forthe opposite headlamp.


Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbson page 5-41.

For any bulb changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer/retailer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ CAUTION

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.

HeadlampsTo replace one of the headlampbulbs, use the following procedure.To replace the parking/turn signallamp bulb, see Front Turn Signaland Parking Lamps on page 5-40.

1. Open the hood. See HoodRelease on page 5-11 formore information.

2. Remove the two screws from thetop of the front fascia and grille.They are inboard of theheadlamp assembly.

3. Remove the three screwsretaining the headlamp assembly.

4. Insert a flat blade tool through theopening in the top. Make sure thetool fits through the opening in theheadlamp bracket lower arm.

5. Push the locking tab toward therear of the vehicle with the toolto lift the headlamp bracketlower arm.

6. Pull back on the front fascia andthen pull the headlamp assemblyout from the vehicle. Anotherperson might be needed to assistwith this step.

7. Disconnect the electricalconnector from the bulbassembly.

8. Turn the bulb assemblycounterclockwise to remove itfrom the housing.

9. Replace the old bulb with anew one.

10. Reverse Steps 1 through 8 toreinstall.


Front Turn Signal andParking LampsTo replace a front turn signal orparking lamp bulb:

1. Follow Steps 1 through 6 underHeadlamps on page 5-39 toaccess the front turn signal orparking lamp.

2. Turn the bulb to be replacedcounterclockwise to removeit from the headlamp assembly.

3. Pull the bulb out of the bulbsocket assembly.

4. Push the new bulb into the bulbsocket assembly.

5. Insert the bulb assembly into theheadlamp assembly.

6. Turn the bulb assemblyclockwise until seated.

7. Reverse the steps to reinstall theheadlamp assembly.

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps and Back-upLampsTo replace one of these bulbs:

A. Taillamp/StoplampB. Turn Signal LampC. Back-up Lamp


1. Open the liftgate.

2. Remove the two screws holdingin the taillamp assembly.

3. Slide the taillamp assemblyrearward and away from thevehicle.

4. Turn the bulb socket beingreplaced counterclockwiseto disconnect it.

5. Pull the bulb out of the bulbsocket.

6. Push the new bulb into the bulbsocket.

7. Reverse Steps 2 through 4 toreinstall the taillamp assembly.

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs:

1. Remove the two screws holdingeach of the license plate lampsto the fascia.

2. Turn and pull the license platelamp forward through thefascia opening.

3. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and pull thebulb straight out of the socket.

4. Push the new bulb into the bulbsocket and turn it clockwise tolock it into place.

5. Push and turn the license plateback through the fascia opening.

6. Reinstall the two screws holdingthe license plate lamps to thefascia.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamp BulbNumber

Back-up Lamp 3156Front TurnSignal/Parking 3157K

Headlamps

High-beam 9005 orHB3

Low-beam/DRL 9006 orHB4

Rear Turn Signal,Stoplamp andTaillamp

3057

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer/retailer.


Windshield WiperBlade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear and cracking.See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 6-3 for more information.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removed indifferent ways. For proper typeand length, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 6-15.

To replace the windshield wiperblade:

1. Lift the wiper arm away from thewindshield.

2. Push the release lever (B) todisengage the hook and pushthe wiper arm (A) out of theblade (C).

3. Push the new wiper bladesecurely on the wiper armuntil you hear the release leverclick into place.

To replace the rear wiper blade:

1. Lift the rear wiper arm (A) fromthe window.

2. Rotate the bottom edge of theblade assembly (B) slightlyaway from the underside of thewiper arm.

3. Apply downward pressure to theblade assembly and removefrom the wiper arm.


TiresYour new vehicle comes withhigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. If youever have questions about yourtire warranty and where to obtainservice, see your vehicleWarranty booklet for details. Foradditional information refer to thetire manufacturer.

{ CAUTION

• Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

• Overloading your tires cancause overheating as aresult of too much flexing.You could have an air-outand a serious accident.See Loading the Vehicleon page 4-28.

• Underinflated tires posethe same danger asoverloaded tires. Theresulting accident couldcause serious injury.Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressureshould be checked whenyour tires are cold. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-49.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

• Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact — such as whenyou hit a pothole. Keeptires at the recommendedpressure.

• Worn, old tires can causeaccidents. If your tread isbadly worn, or if your tireshave been damaged,replace them.

See High-Speed Operation onpage 5-50 for inflation pressureadjustment for high speeddriving.


Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into its sidewall. Theexamples below show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and acompact spare tire sidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is acombination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire’s width, height,aspect ratio, constructiontype, and service description.

See the “Tire Size” illustrationlater in this section for moredetail.

(B) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM’s specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meetor exceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(C) DOT (Departmentof Transportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with the U.S.Department of TransportationMotor Vehicle Safety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code is theTire Identification Number (TIN).

The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, anddate the tire was manufactured.The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although onlyone side may have the date ofmanufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies in thesidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 5-60.

(G) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum load thatcan be carried and the maximumpressure needed to supportthat load.

Passenger (P-Metric) TireExample


(A) Temporary Use Only: Thecompact spare tire or temporaryuse tire has a tread life ofapproximately 3,000 miles(5 000 km) and should not bedriven at speeds over 65 mph(105 km/h). The compact sparetire is for emergency use when aregular road tire has lost air andgone flat. If your vehicle has acompact spare tire, see CompactSpare Tire on page 5-71 and If aTire Goes Flat on page 5-63.

(B) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies in thesidewall and under the tread.

(C) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code is theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, anddate the tire was manufactured.The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although onlyone side may have the date ofmanufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum load thatcan be carried and the maximumpressure needed to supportthat load.

(E) Tire Inflation: Thetemporary use tire or compactspare tire should be inflatedto 60 psi (420 kPa). For moreinformation on tire pressure andinflation see Inflation - TirePressure on page 5-49.

(F) Tire Size: A combination ofletters and numbers define atire’s width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and servicedescription. The letter T as thefirst character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporaryuse only.

(G) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM’s specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meetor exceed all federal safetyguidelines.

Compact Spare Tire Example


Tire Size

The following illustration showsan example of a typicalpassenger vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown initem C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire’s sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A lettercode is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial plyconstruction; the letter D meansdiagonal or bias ply construction;and the letter B meansbelted-bias ply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of the tire.The load index represents theload carry capacity a tire iscertified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount of airinside the tire pressing outwardon each square inch of the tire.Air pressure is expressed inpounds per square inch (psi)or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This meansthe combined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examplesof optional accessories are,automatic transmission, powersteering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire’s height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords that is located between theplies and the tread. Cords maybe made from steel or otherreinforcing materials.


Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the plies are laidat alternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in pounds per squareinch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 5-49.

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standardand optional equipment includingthe maximum capacity of fuel,oil, and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A codemolded into the sidewall of atire signifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) motor vehicle safetystandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, and dateof production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Loading the Vehicleon page 4-28.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeLoading the Vehicle onpage 4-28.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeLoading the Vehicle onpage 4-28.

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tire,that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire:A tire used on light duty trucksand some multipurposepassenger vehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.


Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by150 lbs (68 kg). See Loadingthe Vehicle on page 4-28.

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bears whitelettering, or bears manufacturer,brand, and/or model namemolding that is higher or deeperthan the same moldings on theother sidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommendedtire inflation pressure asshown on the tire placard. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-49 and Loadingthe Vehicle on page 4-28.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumericcode assigned to a tire indicatingthe maximum speed at which atire can operate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tires onpage 5-57.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards): A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for atire’s traction, temperature,and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturersusing government testingprocedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of thetire. See Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 5-60.


Vehicle Capacity Weight: Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by 150 lbs(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load.See Loading the Vehicle onpage 4-28.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehicle’scapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” underLoading the Vehicle onpage 4-28.

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amountof air pressure to operateeffectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tellyou that under-inflation orover-inflation is all right. It isnot. If your tires do not haveenough air (under-inflation),you can get the following:• Too much flexing• Too much heat• Tire overloading• Premature or irregular wear• Poor handling• Reduced fuel economyIf your tires have too much air(over-inflation), you can getthe following:• Unusual wear• Poor handling• Rough ride• Needless damage from road

hazards

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to your vehicle. Thislabel shows your vehicle’soriginal equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressures foryour tires when they are cold.The recommended cold tireinflation pressure, shown on thelabel, is the minimum amount ofair pressure needed to supportyour vehicle’s maximum loadcarrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weightyour vehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see Loadingthe Vehicle on page 4-28. Howyou load your vehicle affectsvehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load your vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.


When to Check

Check your tires once a monthor more. Do not forget to checkthe compact spare tire, it shouldbe at 60 psi (420 kPa). Foradditional information regardingthe compact spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire onpage 5-71.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegage to check tire pressure.You cannot tell if your tiresare properly inflated simply bylooking at them. Radial tires maylook properly inflated even whenthey are under-inflated. Checkthe tire’s inflation pressure whenthe tires are cold. Cold meansyour vehicle has been sitting forat least three hours or driven nomore than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire and LoadingInformation label, no furtheradjustment is necessary. If theinflation pressure is low, add airuntil you reach the recommendedamount.

If you overfill the tire, release airby pushing on the metal stemin the center of the tire valve.Re-check the tire pressure withthe tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve capsback on the valve stems.They help prevent leaks bykeeping out dirt and moisture.

High-Speed Operation

{ CAUTION

Driving at high speeds, 100 mph(160 km/h) or higher, puts anadditional strain on tires. Sustainedhigh-speed driving causesexcessive heat build up and cancause sudden tire failure. Youcould have a crash and you orothers could be killed. Somehigh-speed rated tires requireinflation pressure adjustment forhigh speed operation. When speedlimits and road conditions are suchthat a vehicle can be driven at highspeeds, make sure the tires arerated for high speed operation, inexcellent condition, and set to thecorrect cold tire inflation pressurefor the vehicle load.


If your vehicle has P235/55R18 sizetires, they will require inflationpressure adjustment when drivingyour vehicle at speeds of 100 mph(160 km/h) or higher. Set the coldinflation pressure to the maximuminflation pressure shown on thetire sidewall, or 38 psi (262 kPa),whichever is lower. See the examplefollowing. When you end thishigh-speed driving, return the tires tothe cold tire inflation pressure shownon the Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Loading the Vehicle onpage 4-28 and Inflation - TirePressure on page 5-49.

Example:

You will find the maximum loadand inflation pressure molded onthe tire’s sidewall, in small letters,near the rim flange. It will readsomething like this: Maximum load690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi)Max. Press.

For this example, you would set theinflation pressure for high-speeddriving at 38 psi (262 kPa).

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your vehicle’s tiresand transmit tire pressure readings toa receiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare(if provided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated to theinflation pressure recommended bythe vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped witha tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a lowtire pressure telltale when one ormore of your tires is significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving ona significantly under-inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle’s handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS isnot a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflationhas not reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.


Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicatorto indicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combinedwith the low tire pressure telltale.When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as longas the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may notbe able to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle to

ensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allowthe TPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 5-53 foradditional information.

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) andIndustry and Science CanadaThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) operates on a radiofrequency and complies with Part 15of the FCC Rules. Operation issubject to the following twoconditions:



Vehicles with TPMS operate ona radio frequency and comply withRSS-210 of Industry and ScienceCanada. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:





Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure inthe vehicle’s tires and transmit thetire pressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning light onthe instrument panel cluster.

The low tire pressure warning lightcomes on at each ignition cycleuntil the tires are inflated tothe correct inflation pressure.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weatherwhen the vehicle is first started, andthen turn off as you start to drive.This may be an early indicatorthat the air pressure in the tire(s)are getting low and need to beinflated to the proper pressure.

A Tire and Loading Informationlabel, attached to your vehicle,shows the size of your vehicle’soriginal equipment tires andthe correct inflation pressure foryour vehicle’s tires when theyare cold. See Loading the Vehicleon page 4-28, for an example of theTire and Loading Informationlabel and its location on yourvehicle. Also see Inflation - TirePressure on page 5-49.

Your vehicle’s TPMS system canwarn you about a low tire pressurecondition but it does not replacenormal tire maintenance. See TireInspection and Rotation onpage 5-56 and Tires on page 5-43.

Notice: Liquid tire sealants coulddamage the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors. Sensordamage caused by using a tiresealant is not covered by yourwarranty. Do not use liquid tiresealants.

TPMS Malfunction LightThe TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMSsensors are missing or inoperable.When the system detects amalfunction, the low tire warninglight flashes for about one minuteand then stays on for theremainder of the ignition cycle.


The TPMS malfunction light comeson at each ignition cycle until theproblem is corrected. Some ofthe conditions that can cause themalfunction light to come on are:

• One of the road tires has beenreplaced with the spare tire. Thespare tire does not have a TPMSsensor. The TPMS malfunctionlight should go off once youre-install the road tire containingthe TPMS sensor.

• The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was started but notcompleted or not completedsuccessfully after rotating thevehicle’s tires. The TPMSmalfunction light should gooff once the TPMS sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See “TPMS SensorMatching Process” later in thissection.

• One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. The TPMSmalfunction light should gooff when the TPMS sensorsare installed and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See your dealer/retailer for service.

• Replacement tires or wheels donot match your vehicle’s originalequipment tires or wheels. Tiresand wheels other than thoserecommended for your vehiclecould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 5-58.

• Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcessEach TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. Any time youreplace one or more of the TPMSsensors or rotate the vehicle’s tires,the identification codes will need tobe matched to the new tire/wheelposition. The sensors are matched,to the tire/wheel positions, in thefollowing order: driver side front tire,passenger side front tire, passengerside rear tire, and driver side rear tireusing a TPMS diagnostic tool. Seeyour dealer/retailer for service.

The TPMS sensors can also bematched to each tire/wheel positionby increasing or decreasing thetire’s air pressure. When increasingthe tire’s pressure, do not exceedthe maximum inflation pressureindicated on the tire’s sidewall.


To decrease the tire’s air-pressureuse the pointed end of the valvecap, a pencil-style air pressuregage, or a key.

You have two minutes to matcheach tire and wheel position.If it takes longer than two minutes tomatch any tire and wheel position,the matching process stops and youwill need to start over.

The TPMS matching process isoutlined below:


2. Turn the ignition switch toON/RUN with the engine off.

3. Press and hold the RKEtransmitter’s Lock and Unlockbuttons at the same time, forabout three seconds. The hornwill sound twice to indicate thereceiver is ready for the sensormatching process to begin.

4. Start with the driver side fronttire. The driver side turn signallamp comes on.

5. Remove the valve cap from thetire’s valve stem. Activate theTPMS sensor by increasingor decreasing the tire’s airpressure for five seconds, or untila horn chirp sounds. The hornchirp, which may take up to30 seconds to sound, confirmsthat the sensor identification codehas been matched to thetire/wheel position.

6. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire. The passenger sidefront turn signal lamp comes on.Repeat the procedure in Step 5.

7. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire. The passenger siderear turn signal lamp comes on.Repeat the procedure in Step 5.

8. Proceed to the driver side reartire. The driver side rear turnsignal lamp comes on. Repeat theprocedure in Step 5. The hornsounds two times to indicate thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to the driver siderear tire, and the TPMS sensormatching process is no longeractive.

9. Turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF.

10. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressure levelas indicated on the Tire andLoading Information label.

11. Put the valve caps back on thevalve stems.


Tire Inspection andRotationWe recommend that youregularly inspect the vehicle’stires, including the spare tire, forsigns of wear or damage.See When It Is Time for NewTires on page 5-57 for moreinformation.

Tires should be rotated every5,000 to 8,000 miles (8 000to 13 000 km). See ScheduledMaintenance on page 6-3.

The purpose of a regular tirerotation is to achieve a uniformwear for all tires on thevehicle. This will ensure that thevehicle continues to performmost like it did when thetires were new.

Any time you notice unusualwear, rotate the tires as soonas possible and check wheelalignment. Also check fordamaged tires or wheels.

See When It Is Time for NewTires on page 5-57 and WheelReplacement on page 5-62.

When rotating the vehicle’s tires,always use the correct rotationpattern shown here.

Do not include the compactspare tire in the tire rotation.

After the tires have been rotated,adjust the front and rear inflationpressures as shown on the Tireand Loading Information label.

See Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-49 and Loading theVehicle on page 4-28.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 5-53.

Make certain that all wheel nutsare properly tightened. See“Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specificationson page 5-86.

{ CAUTION

Rust or dirt on a wheel, oron the parts to which it isfastened, can make wheelnuts become loose after time.The wheel could come offand cause an accident.

(Continued)


CAUTION (Continued)

When you change a wheel,remove any rust or dirt fromplaces where the wheel attachesto the vehicle. In an emergency,you can use a cloth or a papertowel to do this; but be sure touse a scraper or wire brush later,if needed, to get all the rust or dirtoff. See Changing a Flat Tire onpage 5-64.

When It Is Time for NewTiresVarious factors, such asmaintenance, temperatures, drivingspeeds, vehicle loading, androad conditions influence whenyou need new tires.

One way to tell when it is time fornew tires is to check the treadwearindicators, which will appear whenthe tires have only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining.

You need new tires if any of thefollowing statements are true:

• You can see the indicators atthree or more places aroundthe tire.

• You can see cord or fabricshowing through the tire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked,cut, or snagged deep enough toshow cord or fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge, orsplit.

• The tire has a puncture, cut, orother damage that cannot berepaired well because of the sizeor location of the damage.

The rubber in tires degrades overtime, even if they are not beingused. This is also true for the sparetire, if the vehicle has one. Multipleconditions affect how fast thisaging takes place, includingtemperatures, loading conditions,and inflation pressure maintenance.With proper care and maintenancetires typically wear out beforethey degrade due to age. If you areunsure about the need to replacethe tires as they get older, consultthe tire manufacturer for moreinformation.


Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for your vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedon your vehicle, when it was new,were designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec) systemrating. If you need replacementtires, GM strongly recommendsthat you get tires with the sameTPC Spec rating. This way, yourvehicle will continue to have tiresthat are designed to give thesame performance and vehiclesafety, during normal use, as theoriginal tires.

GM’s exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over a dozencritical specifications that impactthe overall performance of yourvehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tire pressure

monitoring performance. GM’sTPC Spec number is moldedonto the tire’s sidewall near thetire size. If the tires have anall-season tread design, the TPCSpec number will be followed byan MS for mud and snow. SeeTire Sidewall Labeling onpage 5-44 for additionalinformation.

GM recommends replacing tiresin sets of four. This is becauseuniform tread depth on all tireswill help keep your vehicleperforming most like it did whenthe tires were new. Replacingless than a full set of tires canaffect the braking and handlingperformance of your vehicle. SeeTire Inspection and Rotation onpage 5-56 for information onproper tire rotation.

{ CAUTION

Mixing tires could cause youto lose control while driving. Ifyou mix tires of different sizes,brands, or types (radial andbias-belted tires), the vehiclemay not handle properly, andyou could have a crash. Usingtires of different sizes, brands,or types may also causedamage to your vehicle. Besure to use the correct size,brand, and type of tires on allwheels. It is all right to drivewith your compact sparetemporarily, as it wasdeveloped for use on yourvehicle. See Compact SpareTire on page 5-71.


{ CAUTION

If you use bias-ply tires on thevehicle, the wheel rim flangescould develop cracks aftermany miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could failsuddenly, causing a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If you must replace your vehicle’stires with those that do not havea TPC Spec number, make surethey are the same size, loadrange, speed rating, andconstruction type (radial andbias-belted tires) as yourvehicle’s original tires.

Vehicles that have a tire pressuremonitoring system could give aninaccurate low-pressure warningif non-TPC Spec rated tiresare installed on your vehicle.

Non-TPC Spec rated tires maygive a low-pressure warning thatis higher or lower than the properwarning level you would get withTPC Spec rated tires. See TirePressure Monitor System onpage 5-51.

Your vehicle’s original equipmenttires are listed on the Tire andLoading Information Label.See Loading the Vehicle onpage 4-28, for more informationabout the Tire and LoadingInformation Label and its locationon your vehicle.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf you add wheels or tires that area different size than your originalequipment wheels and tires,this may affect the way your vehicleperforms, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollover.

Additionally, if your vehicle haselectronic systems such as, anti-lockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, and stability control, theperformance of these systems canbe affected.

{ CAUTION

If you add different sized wheels,your vehicle may not provide anacceptable level of performanceand safety if tires notrecommended for those wheelsare selected. You may increasethe chance that you will crash andsuffer serious injury. Only useSaturn specific wheel and tiresystems developed for yourvehicle, and have them properlyinstalled by a Saturn certifiedtechnician.

See Buying New Tires on page 5-58and Accessories and Modificationson page 5-3 for additionalinformation.


Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on thetire sidewall between treadshoulder and maximum sectionwidth. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tiresby treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not apply todeep tread, winter-type snowtires, space-saver, or temporary

use spare tires, tires with nominalrim diameters of 10 to 12 inches(25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may varywith respect to these grades,they must also conform tofederal safety requirements andadditional General MotorsTire Performance Criteria (TPC)standards.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based onthe wear rate of the tire whentested under controlledconditions on a specifiedgovernment test course.For example, a tire graded 150would wear one and a half (1.5)times as well on the governmentcourse as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance oftires depends upon the actualconditions of their use, however,and may depart significantly fromthe norm due to variations indriving habits, service practices,and differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highestto lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.Those grades represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavementas measured under controlledconditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.


Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature gradesare A (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire’s resistanceto the generation of heat andits ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature canlead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger

car tires must meet under theFederal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. It should benoted that the temperature gradefor this tire is established for a tirethat is properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment andTire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehiclewere aligned and balanced carefullyat the factory to give you the longesttire life and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment andtire balancing will not be necessaryon a regular basis. However, if younotice unusual tire wear or yourvehicle pulling to one side or theother, the alignment might need to bechecked. If you notice your vehiclevibrating when driving on a smoothroad, the tires and wheels mightneed to be rebalanced. See yourdealer/retailer for proper diagnosis.


Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked or badly rusted or corroded.If wheel nuts keep coming loose, thewheel, wheel bolts and wheel nutsshould be replaced. If the wheelleaks air, replace it (except somealuminum wheels, which cansometimes be repaired). See yourdealer/retailer if any of theseconditions exist.

Your dealer/retailer will know thekind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset and bemounted the same way as the oneit replaces.

If you need to replace any of yourwheels, wheel bolts or wheelnuts, replace them only with newSaturn original equipment parts.This way, you will be sure to havethe right wheel, wheel bolts andwheel nuts for your vehicle.

{ CAUTION

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts on your vehicle can bedangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of yourvehicle, make your tires lose airand make you lose control. Youcould have a collision in whichyou or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel,wheel bolts, and wheel nuts forreplacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel canalso cause problems with bearinglife, brake cooling, speedometeror odometer calibration, headlampaim, bumper height, vehicleground clearance, and tire or tirechain clearance to the body andchassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire onpage 5-64 for more information.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ CAUTION

Putting a used wheel on yourvehicle is dangerous. You cannotknow how it has been used orhow far it has been driven. Itcould fail suddenly and cause acrash. If you have to replace awheel, use a new Saturn originalequipment wheel.

Tire Chains

{ CAUTION

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension or other vehicle parts.

(Continued)


CAUTION (Continued)

The area damaged by the tirechains could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle and you orothers may be injured in a crash.

Use another type of tractiondevice only if its manufacturerrecommends it for use on thevehicle and tire size combinationand road conditions. Follow thatmanufacturer’s instructions. Tohelp avoid damage to the vehicle,drive slowly, readjust or removethe device if it is contacting thevehicle, and do not spin thevehicle’s wheels. If you do findtraction devices that will fit, installthem on the front tires.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowoutwhile you are driving, especially ifyou maintain your vehicle’s tiresproperly. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly.But if you should ever have ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire createsa drag that pulls the vehicle towardthat side. Take your foot off theaccelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop well out ofthe traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid and mayrequire the same correction youwould use in a skid. In any rearblowout remove your foot from theaccelerator pedal. Get the vehicleunder control by steering theway you want the vehicle to go.

It may be very bumpy and noisy, butyou can still steer. Gently brake to astop, well off the road if possible.

{ CAUTION

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without the appropriatesafety equipment and training. If ajack is provided with the vehicle, itis designed only for changing aflat tire. If it is used for anythingelse, you or others could be badlyinjured or killed if the vehicle slipsoff the jack. If a jack is providedwith the vehicle, only use it forchanging a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next partshows how to use the jackingequipment to change a flat tiresafely.


Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 3-5.

{ CAUTION

Changing a tire can be dangerous.The vehicle can slip off the jackand roll over or fall on you or otherpeople. You and they could bebadly injured or even killed. Finda level place to change your tire.To help prevent the vehicle frommoving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission shift lever inP (Park), or shift a manualtransmission to 1 (First) orR (Reverse).

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

To be certain the vehicle will notmove, put blocks at the front andrear of the tire farthest away fromthe one being changed. Thatwould be the tire on the otherside, at the opposite end of thevehicle.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),use the following example as aguide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks (A).

A. Wheel BlockB. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to use the jack and changea tire.


Removing the Spare Tireand ToolsTo access the spare tire:

1. Open the liftgate.

2. Push the levers on the load floor.

3. Lift the load floor and hang thehook to the tailgate opening.

4. Remove the tire protector foam.

5. Remove the wheel retainer boltholding down the spare tire byturning it counterclockwise.

6. Remove the compact spare tire.See Compact Spare Tire onpage 5-71 for more information.


The tools are located between thecompact spare tire and theliftgate. To access the tools:

A. Tool BagB. Wing-boltC. Jack

1. Remove the wing-bolt (B) fromthe jack.

2. Remove the jack (C) and toolbag (A).

3. Remove the straps holding thebag containing the wheel wrenchand extension jack handle.Remove the wheel wrench andextension jack handle fromthe bag.

The tools you will be using include:

A. Tool BagB. JackC. Wheel WrenchD. Extension Jack Handle

Removing the Flat Tireand Installing theSpare Tire1. Do a safety check before

proceeding. See Changing a FlatTire on page 5-64 for moreinformation.

2. Use the wheel wrench to loosenall the wheel nuts. Do not removethem yet.

3. Attach the wheel wrench to thejack bolt head and rotate thewheel wrench clockwise to raisethe lift head a little.


4. Position the lift head at the jacklocation nearest the flat tire. Makesure all of the jack lift head istouching the jacking flange underthe body. Do not place the jackunder a body panel. The lowerbody panel has an arrow to aid inlocating the jacking location.

5. Put the compact spare tirenear you.

6. Raise the vehicle by turningthe jack handle clockwise. Raisethe vehicle far enough off theground so there is enough roomfor the road tire to be removed.

{ CAUTION

Getting under a vehicle when it isjacked up is dangerous. If thevehicle slips off the jack, youcould be badly injured or killed.Never get under a vehicle when itis supported only by a jack.

{ CAUTION

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damagethe vehicle and even make thevehicle fall. To help avoidpersonal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.


{ CAUTION

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without the appropriatesafety equipment and training. If ajack is provided with the vehicle, itis designed only for changing aflat tire. If it is used for anythingelse, you or others could be badlyinjured or killed if the vehicle slipsoff the jack. If a jack is providedwith the vehicle, only use it forchanging a flat tire.

Notice: Make sure that the jacklift head is in the correctposition or you may damage yourvehicle. The repairs would notbe covered by your warranty.

7. Remove all of the wheel nuts.

8. Remove the flat tire.

9. Remove any rust or dirt from thewheel bolts, mounting surfacesand spare wheel.

{ CAUTION

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sureto use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rustor dirt off. See Changing a FlatTire on page 5-64.

10. Place the compact spare tire onthe wheel-mounting surface.

11. Reinstall the wheel nuts. Tighteneach nut by hand until the wheelis held against the hub.

{ CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle’s wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

12. Lower the vehicle by turning thejack handle counterclockwise.


13. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly ina crisscross sequence, asshown.

{ CAUTION

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can cause thewheels to become loose or comeoff. The wheel nuts should be

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

tightened with a torque wrench tothe proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 5-86 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

Notice: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to brakepulsation and rotor damage. Toavoid expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten the wheel nuts inthe proper sequence and tothe proper torque specification.See Capacities and Specificationson page 5-86 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

14. Lower the jack all the way andremove the jack from under thevehicle.

15. Tighten the bolts firmly with thewheel wrench.

When reinstalling full plastic coversor center caps, tighten all the plasticcaps hand snug, then tighten withthe wheel wrench an additionalone-quarter of a turn.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fiton your vehicle’s compact spare.If you try to put a wheel cover onthe compact spare, the cover orthe spare could be damaged.


Storing a Flat or SpareTire and Tools

{ CAUTION

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

To store the flat or spare tire andtools, do the following:

1. Place the wheel wrench into thebag and use the straps to securethe bag to the fully collapsed jack.

2. Install the jack between the backof the trunk and the compactspare tire and secure with thewing bolt.

3. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 underRemoving the Spare Tire andTools on page 5-65 to replacethe floor and lock in place.

4. Place the flat, or damaged tire,face down, on the bottom ofthe spare tire compartment.

Before

After


5. Remove the disk (A) from theretainer bolt. Turn the disk (A)over and place it back onthe retainer bolt.Return the disk back to its originalposition after removing the flat tirefrom the spare tire compartmentand before storing the spare tire.

6. Place the wheel retainer boltonto the wheel stow rod andtighten by turning it clockwise.

The compact spare is for temporaryuse only. Replace the compact sparetire with a full-size tire as soon aspossible.

Compact Spare Tire

{ CAUTION

Driving with more than onecompact spare tire at a time couldresult in loss of braking andhandling. This could lead to acrash and you or others could beinjured. Use only one compactspare tire at a time.

The compact spare tire was fullyinflated when the vehicle wasnew, however, it can lose air after atime. Check the inflation pressureregularly. It should be 60 psi(414 kPa).

After installing the compact spareon your vehicle, you should stop assoon as possible and make sureyour spare tire is correctly inflated.The compact spare is intended toperform well at speeds up to 50 mph(80 km/h), so you can finish your trip

and have your full-size tire repairedor replaced where you want. Replaceyour spare with a full-size tire assoon as you can.

Notice: When the compact spareis installed, do not take the vehiclethrough an automatic car washwith guide rails. The compactspare can get caught on the railswhich can damage the tire, wheeland other parts of the vehicle.

Do not use your compact spare onother vehicles.

Do not mix your compact spare tireor wheel with other wheels or tires.Keep your spare tire and its wheeltogether.

Notice: Tire chains will not fitthe compact spare. Using themcan damage the vehicle and candamage the chains too. Do not usetire chains on the compact spare.


Appearance Care

Interior CleaningThe vehicle’s interior will continueto look its best if it is cleaned often.Although not always visible, dustand dirt can accumulate on theupholstery. Dirt can damage carpet,fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces.Regular vacuuming is recommendedto remove particles from theupholstery. It is important to keepthe upholstery from becoming andremaining heavily soiled. Soilsshould be removed as quickly aspossible. The vehicle’s interior mayexperience extremes of heat thatcould cause stains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors mayrequire more frequent cleaning.Use care because newspapers andgarments that transfer color to homefurnishings may also transfer color tothe vehicle’s interior.

When cleaning the vehicle’s interior,only use cleaners specificallydesigned for the surfaces beingcleaned. Permanent damage mayresult from using cleaners onsurfaces for which they were notintended. Use glass cleaner only onglass. Remove any accidentalover-spray from other surfacesimmediately. To prevent over-spray,apply cleaner directly to the cleaningcloth.

Notice: Using abrasive cleanerswhen cleaning glass surfaceson the vehicle, could scratch theglass and/or cause damage tothe rear window defogger. Whencleaning the glass on the vehicle,use only a soft cloth and glasscleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents thatmay become concentrated in thevehicle’s breathing space. Beforeusing cleaners, read and adhere toall safety instructions on the label.While cleaning the vehicle’s interior,maintain adequate ventilation byopening the vehicle’s doors andwindows.

Dust may be removed from smallbuttons and knobs using a smallbrush with soft bristles.

Products that remove odors from thevehicle’s upholstery and clean thevehicle’s glass can be obtained fromyour dealer/retailer.


Do not clean the vehicle using:

• A knife or any other sharp objectto remove a soil from any interiorsurface.

• A stiff brush. It can cause damageto the vehicle’s interior surfaces.

• Heavy pressure or aggressiverubbing with a cleaning cloth. Useof heavy pressure can damagethe interior and does not improvethe effectiveness of soil removal.

• Laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers can leave residuethat streaks and attracts dirt. Forliquid cleaners, about 20 dropsper gallon (3.78 L) of water is agood guide. Use only mild,neutral-pH soaps.

• Too much cleaner that saturatesthe upholstery.

• Organic solvents such as naptha,alcohol, etc. that can damage thevehicle’s interior.

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a softbrush attachment frequently toremove dust and loose dirt. Acanister vacuum with a beater bar inthe nozzle may only be used on floorcarpet and carpeted floor mats. Forany soil, always try to remove it firstwith plain water or club soda. Beforecleaning, gently remove as much ofthe soil as possible using one of thefollowing techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot theremaining soil with a paper towel.Allow the soil to absorb into thepaper towel until no more can beremoved.

• For solid dry soils: remove asmuch as possible and thenvacuum.

To clean:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean whitecloth with water or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excessmoisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Continue cleaning, usinga clean area of the cloth eachtime it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiledarea until the cleaning clothremains clean.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used withplain water.

If any of the soil remains, acommercial fabric cleaner or spotlifter may be necessary. When acommercial upholstery cleaner orspot lifter is to be used, test a smallhidden area for colorfastness first.If the locally cleaned area gives anyimpression that a ring formation mayresult, clean the entire surface.

After the cleaning process has beencompleted, a paper towel can beused to blot excess moisture fromthe fabric or carpet.


LeatherA soft cloth dampened withwater can be used to remove dust.If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution can beused. Allow the leather to drynaturally. Do not use heat to dry.Never use steam to clean leather.Never use spot lifters or spotremovers on leather. Manycommercial leather cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserveand protect leather may permanentlychange the appearance andfeel of the leather and are notrecommended. Do not use siliconeor wax-based products, or thosecontaining organic solvents to cleanthe vehicle’s interior because theycan alter the appearance byincreasing the gloss in a non-uniformmanner. Never use shoe polish onleather.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl,and Other PlasticSurfacesA soft cloth dampened withwater may be used to removedust. If a more thorough cleaningis necessary, a clean soft clothdampened with a mild soap solutioncan be used to gently remove dustand dirt. Never use spot lifters orremovers on plastic surfaces. Manycommercial cleaners and coatingsthat are sold to preserve andprotect soft plastic surfaces maypermanently change the appearanceand feel of the interior and are notrecommended. Do not use siliconeor wax-based products, or thosecontaining organic solvents toclean the vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance byincreasing the gloss in a non-uniformmanner.

Some commercial products mayincrease gloss on the instrumentpanel. The increase in gloss maycause annoying reflections in thewindshield and even make it difficultto see through the windshield undercertain conditions.

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{ CAUTION

Do not bleach or dye safetybelts. It may severely weakenthem. In a crash, they mightnot be able to provide adequateprotection. Clean safety belts onlywith mild soap and lukewarmwater.


WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips willmake them last longer, seal better,and not stick or squeak. Applysilicone grease with a clean cloth.During very cold, damp weatherfrequent application may be required.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-13.

Washing Your VehicleThe best way to preserve thevehicle’s finish is to keep it cleanby washing it often.

Notice: Certain cleaners containchemicals that can damage theemblems or nameplates on thevehicle. Check the cleaningproduct label. If it states that itshould not be used on plasticparts, do not use it on the vehicleor damage may occur and it wouldnot be covered by the warranty.

Do not wash the vehicle in directsunlight. Use a car washing soap.Do not use cleaning agents that arepetroleum based or that contain acidor abrasives, as they can damagethe paint, metal or plastic on thevehicle. Approved cleaning productscan be obtained from your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers’directions regarding correct productusage, necessary safety precautionsand appropriate disposal of anyvehicle care product.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches andwater spotting.

High pressure car washes maycause water to enter the vehicle.Avoid using high pressure washescloser than 12 inches (30 cm) tothe surface of the vehicle. Use ofpower washers exceeding 1,200 psi(8 274 kPa) can result in damage orremoval of paint and decals.

Cleaning ExteriorLamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth and a car washing soap toclean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under WashingYour Vehicle on page 5-75.


Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishingof the vehicle by hand may benecessary to remove residue fromthe paint finish. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from yourdealer/retailer.

If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoatgives more depth and gloss to thecolored basecoat. Always use waxesand polishes that are non-abrasiveand made for a basecoat/clearcoatpaint finish.

Notice: Machine compoundingor aggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

Foreign materials such as calciumchloride and other salts, ice meltingagents, road oil and tar, tree sap,bird droppings, chemicals from

industrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle’s finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Exterior painted surfaces aresubject to aging, weather andchemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. Tohelp keep the paint finish lookingnew, keep the vehicle garagedor covered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior BrightMetal Parts

Bright metal parts should be cleanedregularly to keep their luster.Washing with water is all that isusually needed. However, chromepolish may be used on chrome orstainless steel trim, if necessary.

Use special care with aluminum trim.To avoid damaging protectivetrim, never use auto or chromepolish, steam or caustic soap

to clean aluminum. A coating ofwax, rubbed to high polish, isrecommended for all bright metalparts.

Windshield and WiperBladesClean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean the rubber blades using a lintfree cloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning the blades.Bugs, road grime, sap, and a buildupof vehicle wash/wax treatments maycause wiper streaking. Replace thewiper blades if they are worn ordamaged.

Wipers can be damaged by:

• Extreme dusty conditions

• Sand and salt

• Heat and sun

• Snow and ice, without properremoval


Aluminum WheelsNotice: Chrome wheels andother chrome trim may bedamaged if the vehicle is notwashed after driving on roadsthat have been sprayed withmagnesium, calcium or sodiumchloride. These chlorides areused on roads for conditionssuch as ice and dust. Alwayswash the vehicle’s chrome withsoap and water after exposure.

Notice: Using strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, coulddamage the surface of thewheel(s). The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Use only approvedcleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a softclean cloth with mild soap andwater. Rinse with clean water. Afterrinsing thoroughly, dry with a softclean towel. A wax may thenbe applied.

Notice: Using chrome polish onaluminum wheels could damagethe wheels. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Use chrome polish onchrome wheels only.

The surface of these wheels issimilar to the painted surface of thevehicle. Do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,abrasive cleaners, cleaners withacid, or abrasive cleaning brusheson them because the surfacecould be damaged. Do not usechrome polish on aluminum wheels.

Notice: Driving the vehiclethrough an automatic car washthat has silicone carbide tirecleaning brushes, could damagethe aluminum or chrome-platedwheels. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Never drive a vehicle that hasaluminum or chrome-platedwheels through an automatic carwash that uses silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes.

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brushwith tire cleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-basedtire dressing products on thevehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applyinga tire dressing, always wipe offany overspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.


Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired or replacedto restore corrosion protection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deepscratches in the finish should berepaired right away. Bare metal willcorrode quickly and may developinto major repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can berepaired with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer/retailer.Larger areas of finish damage can becorrected in your dealer’s/retailer’sbody and paint shop.

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snowremoval and dust control can collecton the underbody. If these are notremoved, corrosion and rust candevelop on the underbody parts suchas fuel lines, frame, floor pan, andexhaust system even though theyhave corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush thesematerials from the underbodywith plain water. Clean any areaswhere mud and debris can collect.Dirt packed in close areas ofthe frame should be loosened beforebeing flushed. Your dealer/retaileror an underbody car washingsystem can do this.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmosphericconditions can create a chemicalfallout. Airborne pollutants can fallupon and attack painted surfaces onthe vehicle. This damage can taketwo forms: blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface.

Although no defect in the paint jobcauses this, we will repair, at nocharge to the owner, the surfacesof new vehicles damaged by thisfallout condition within 12 monthsor 12,000 miles (20 000 km) ofpurchase, whichever occurs first.


Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for thevehicle. It appears on a plate in thefront corner of the instrument panel,on the driver side. It can be seenthrough the windshield from outsidethe vehicle. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and the certificates oftitle and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN is theengine code. This code helps identifythe vehicle’s engine, specifications,and replacement parts. See “EngineSpecifications” under Capacities andSpecifications on page 5-86 for thevehicle’s engine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label is on the inside of theglove box. It is very helpful if partsneed to be ordered. The labelhas the following information:

• Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and specialequipment

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.

Electrical System

Add-On ElectricalEquipmentNotice: Do not add anythingelectrical to the vehicle unless youcheck with your dealer/retailerfirst. Some electrical equipmentcan damage the vehicle and thedamage would not be coveredby the vehicle’s warranty. Someadd-on electrical equipment cankeep other components fromworking as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle’s battery, even if the vehicleis not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 1-56.


Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor isprotected by a circuit breaker and afuse. If the motor overheats dueto heavy snow or ice, the wiper willstop until the motor cools. If theoverload is caused by someelectrical problem, have it fixed.

Power Windows andOther Power OptionsCircuit breakers in the fuse blockprotect the power windows andother power accessories. When thecurrent load is too heavy, thecircuit breaker opens and closes,protecting the circuit until theproblem is fixed or goes away.

Fuses and CircuitBreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits byfuses. This greatly reducesthe chance of circuit overload andfire caused by electrical problems.

There are two fuse blocks — theunderhood fuse block, and theinstrument panel fuse block.

To identify and check fuses andrelays, refer to the Fuse UsageChart on the inside surface of thefuse panel door.

Instrument Panel FuseBlockThe instrument panel fuse block islocated on the passenger sideof the lower console.

Pull the latch of the fuse box coverstraight back to access the fuses.


Fuses Usage

PWR SEAT Power Seat

PASSP/WIN

Passenger SidePower Window

DRIVP/WIN

Driver Side PowerWindow

S/ROOF Sunroof Module

Fuses Usage

CIGAR Cigarette Lighter

ECM/TCM

Engine ControlModule (ECM)/TransmissionControl Module(TCM)

FSCM Fuel Storage ControlModule

Fuses Usage

ISRVM Inside RearviewMirror

CLUSTER Instrument PanelCluster

AIR BAG Airbag System

OSRVM Outside RearviewMirror

KEY CAP Key CaptureSolenoid

WHL S/W Steering WheelSwitch

F/DR LCK Front DriverDoor Lock

APO2 Accessory PowerOutlet 2

BCM (VB3) Body Control Module(BCM) (VB3)

DR LCK Door Lock

BCM (VB6) Body ControlModule (VB6)


Fuses Usage



TRL Trailer

AIRCON Air Conditioner

AUDIO Audio


IGN SW Ignition Switch

AIR BAG Air Bag System

WASHER Washer Pump

APO1 Accessory PowerOutlet 1

Fuses Usage

FSCM Fuel Storage ControlModule

RR CLR Rear Closure


DRL Daytime RunningLight


ONSTAR OnStar®

Relays Usage

RELAYACC/RAP

Accessory, RetainedAccessory Power(RAP) Relay

RELAYRUN/

CRANKRun/Crank Relay

Underhood Fuse BlockThe underhood fuse block is locatedon the driver side of the enginecompartment, near the battery.

Notice: Spilling liquid onany electrical components on thevehicle may damage it. Alwayskeep the covers on any electricalcomponent.


Fuses Usage

FAN MAIN Cooling Fan Main

REAR/WPR Rear Wiper Motor

FAN AUX Cooling FanAuxiliary

Fuses Usage

ECM/TCM/SGCM

Engine ControlModule/TransmissionControl Module/Serial Data GatewayCommunicationModule

Fuses Usage

ECM Engine ControlModule

ENG-3 Engine 3

ENG-2 Engine 2

ENG-1 Engine 1

HYBRIDBEC Not Used

RUN Run

S/ROOF Sunroof Module

HTD/SEAT Heated Seat ControlModule

BCM Body ControlModule

STRTR Starter Motor

WPR Windshield Wiper


Fuses Usage

4WD/ESCM All-Wheel DriveSystem

ABS Antilock BrakeSystem Module

A/C CLTCH Air ConditioningCompressor

BLWR MTR Blower Motor

AMP Amplifier

HORN Horn

ABS Antilock BrakeSystem Module

I/P BECInstrument PanelBussed ElectricalCenter

Fuses Usage

FRT FOG Front Fog Lamps

I/P BECInstrument PanelBussed ElectricalCenter

DRL Daytime RunningLight

T/LAMP RT Right Turn andParking Lamps

T/LAMP LT Left Turn andParking Lamps

TRLRT/LAMP

Trailer ParkingLamps

HDLP HI LTPassenger SideHigh-BeamHeadlamp

Fuses Usage

STOP LP Stoplamps

DEFOG Defroster Fog

HDLPLO RT

Driver SideLow-BeamHeadlamp

HDLPLO LT

Passenger SideLow-BeamHeadlamp

HDLPHI RT

Driver SideHigh-BeamHeadlamp

OSRVMHTR

Outside RearviewMirror Heating


Relays Usage

FAN MAINRLY

Cooling Fan MainRelay

FAN CTRLRLY

Cooling Fan ControlRelay

FAN AUXRLY

Cooling FanAuxiliary Relay

PWR/TRNRLY

Engine ControlModule/CAM,Canister, Injectors,Electronic ThrottleControl Relay

STRTRRLY Starter Relay

Relays Usage

RUN RLY Run Relay

A/C CLTCHRLY

Air ConditioningCompressor Relay

WPR SPDRLY

Windshield WiperSpeed Relay

HORN RLY Horn Relay

WPRCNTRL

RLY

Windshield WiperControl Relay

T/LAMPRLY Parking Lamp Relay

Relays Usage

HDLP HIRLY

High-BeamHeadlamp Relay

HDLP LORLY

Low-BeamHeadlamp Relay

FRT FOGRLY

Front FoglampRelay

STOP LPRLY Stoplamp Relay

DEFOGRLY Defogger Relay


Capacities and Specifications

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label locatedunder the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more

information.

Engine Cooling System

2.4L L4 Engine 9.0 qt 8.5 L

3.5L V6 Engine 11.0 qt 10.4 L

3.6L V6 Engine 11.5 qt 10.9 L

Engine Oil with Filter

2.4L L4 Engine 5.0 qt 4.7 L

3.5L V6 Engine 4.0 qt 3.8 L

3.6L V6 Engine 5.5 qt 5.2 L

Fuel Tank

All Wheel Drive 16.7 gal 63.0 L

Front Wheel Drive 19.2 gal 73.0 L


ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Transmission Fluid*

Four-Speed Automatic 6.9 qt 6.5 L

Six-Speed Automatic 9.5 qt 9.0 L

Wheel Nut Torque 100 ft lb 140 Y

*Transmission fluid capacity is approximate. See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 5-18 for information onchecking fluid level.

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

2.4L L4 (LE5) P Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm)

3.5L V6 (LZ4) N Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm)

3.6L V6 (LY7) 7 Automatic 0.044 in (1.1 mm)


✍ NOTES


MaintenanceSchedule

Maintenance ScheduleIntroduction ..........................6-1Maintenance Requirements .....6-1Your Vehicle and theEnvironment ........................6-1

Using the MaintenanceSchedule ............................6-2

Scheduled Maintenance .........6-3Additional Required Services ....6-6Maintenance Footnotes ..........6-8Owner Checks andServices ...........................6-10

At Each Fuel Fill .................6-10At Least Once a Month ........6-10At Least Once a Year ..........6-11Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants ...................6-13

Maintenance ReplacementParts ................................6-15

Engine Drive Belt Routing .....6-16Maintenance Record ............6-17

MaintenanceSchedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at theproper level and change asrecommended.

MaintenanceRequirementsNotice: Maintenance intervals,checks, inspections, replacementparts, and recommended fluidsand lubricants as prescribedin this manual are necessary tokeep this vehicle in good workingcondition. Any damage causedby failure to follow scheduledmaintenance might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Your Vehicle and theEnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not onlyhelps to keep the vehicle in goodworking condition, but also helps theenvironment. All recommendedmaintenance is important. Impropervehicle maintenance can evenaffect the quality of the air webreathe. Improper fluid levels or thewrong tire inflation can increasethe level of emissions from thevehicle. To help protect theenvironment, and to keep thevehicle in good condition, be sure tomaintain the vehicle properly.

Maintenance Schedule 6-1

Using the MaintenanceScheduleWe want to help keep this vehicle ingood working condition. But wedo not know exactly how youwill drive it. You might drive veryshort distances only a few times aweek. Or you might drive longdistances all the time in very hot,dusty weather. You might usethe vehicle in making deliveries. Oryou might drive it to work, to doerrands, or in many other ways.

Because of all the differentways people use their vehicles,maintenance needs vary. You mightneed more frequent checks andreplacements. So please read thefollowing and note how youdrive. If you have any questions onhow to keep the vehicle in goodcondition, see your dealer/retailer.

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargowithin recommended limits on theTire and Loading Informationlabel. See Loading the Vehicle onpage 4-28.

• are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

• are driven off-road in therecommended manner. SeeOff-Road Driving on page 4-13.

• use the recommended fuel. SeeGasoline Octane on page 5-5.

The services in ScheduledMaintenance on page 6-3 should beperformed when indicated. SeeAdditional Required Serviceson page 6-6 and MaintenanceFootnotes on page 6-8 for furtherinformation.

{ CAUTION

Performing maintenance work ona vehicle can be dangerous. Intrying to do some jobs, you canbe seriously injured. Do your ownmaintenance work only if youhave the required know-how andthe proper tools and equipmentfor the job. If you have any doubt,see your dealer/retailer to have aqualified technician do the work.See Doing Your Own ServiceWork on page 5-4.

Some maintenance services can becomplex. So, unless you aretechnically qualified and have thenecessary equipment, have yourdealer/retailer do these jobs.

When you go to your dealer/retailerfor service, trained and supportedservice technicians will performthe work using genuine parts.

6-2 Maintenance Schedule

To purchase service information,see Service Publications OrderingInformation on page 7-15.

Owner Checks and Services onpage 6-10 tells what shouldbe checked, when to check it, andwhat can easily be done to helpkeep the vehicle in good condition.

The proper replacement parts,fluids, and lubricants to use arelisted in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-13 andMaintenance Replacement Parts onpage 6-15. When the vehicle isserviced, make sure these are used.All parts should be replaced and allnecessary repairs done before youor anyone else drives the vehicle.We recommend the use of genuineparts from your dealer/retailer.

Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the Change Engine Oillight displays, service is required forthe vehicle. Have the vehicleserviced as soon as possible withinthe next 600 miles (1 000 km). Itis possible that, if driving under thebest conditions, the engine oillife system may not indicate thatvehicle service is necessary for overa year. However, the engine oiland filter must be changed at leastonce a year and at this time thesystem must be reset. Yourdealer/retailer has trained servicetechnicians who will performthis work using genuine parts andreset the system.

If the engine oil life system is everreset accidentally, service the vehiclewithin 3,000 miles (5 000 km) sincethe last service. Remember to resetthe oil life system whenever the oil ischanged. See Engine Oil LifeSystem on page 5-16 for informationon the Engine Oil Life System andresetting the system.

When the Change Engine Oil lightappears, certain services, checks,and inspections are required.Required services are described inthe following for “Maintenance I”and “Maintenance II.” Generally, it isrecommended that the first servicebe Maintenance I, the secondservice be Maintenance II, and thenalternate Maintenance I andMaintenance II thereafter. However,in some cases, Maintenance IImay be required more often.


Maintenance I — UseMaintenance I if the Change EngineOil light displays within 10 monthssince the vehicle was purchased orMaintenance II was performed.

Maintenance II — UseMaintenance II if the previousservice performed wasMaintenance I. Always use

Maintenance II whenever the lightdisplays 10 months or more sincethe last service or if the light has notcome on at all for one year.

Scheduled MaintenanceService Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-14. Reset oil lifesystem. See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-16. An Emission ControlService.

• •

Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j). • •Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 5-17. See footnote (l). •

Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 5-56 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month onpage 6-10.

• •

Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid asneeded. • •


Scheduled Maintenance (cont’d)Service Maintenance I Maintenance II

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” inthis section. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •Automatic Transmission Only: Check automatic transmission fluid level andadd fluid as needed. •

Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (k). •L4 engine: Inspect throttle system. See footnote (g). •


Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles(kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damage orleaks. • • • • • •

Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. • • • • • •

Replace engine air cleaner filter. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17. • • •

Change automatic transmission fluid(severe service). See footnote (h). • • •

Change automatic transmission fluid(normal service). •

Replace spark plugs. An EmissionControl Service. •


Additional Required Services (cont’d)

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Change transfer case fluid (severeservice). See footnote (h). • • •

Change transfer case fluid (normalservice). See footnote (m). •

Engine cooling system service (orevery five years, whichever occursfirst). An Emission Control Service. Seefootnote (i).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt.An Emission Control Service. Seefootnote (n).

•


Maintenance Footnotes† The U.S. Environmental ProtectionAgency or the California AirResources Board has determinedthat the failure to perform thismaintenance item will not nullify theemission warranty or limit recallliability prior to the completion of thevehicle’s useful life. We, however,urge that all recommendedmaintenance services be performedat the indicated intervals and themaintenance be recorded.

(a) Visually inspect brake lines andhoses for proper hook-up, binding,leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.Inspect disc brake pads for wearand rotors for surface condition.Inspect other brake parts, includingcalipers, parking brake, etc.

(b) Visually inspect front and rearsuspension and steering system fordamaged, loose, or missing partsor signs of wear.

(c) Visually inspect hoses and havethem replaced if they are cracked,swollen, or deteriorated. Inspectall pipes, fittings, and clamps;replace with genuine parts asneeded. To help ensure properoperation, a pressure test ofthe cooling system and pressurecap and cleaning the outside of theradiator and air conditioningcondenser is recommended at leastonce a year.

(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear,cracking, or contamination.Clean the windshield and wiperblades, if contaminated. Replacewiper blades that are worn ordamaged. See Windshield WiperBlade Replacement on page 5-42and Windshield and WiperBlades on page 5-76 for moreinformation.

(e) Make sure the safety beltreminder light and safety beltassemblies are working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system parts. Ifyou see anything that might keepa safety belt system from doingits job, have it repaired. Have anytorn or frayed safety belts replaced.Also see Checking the RestraintSystems on page 1-58.

(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders,door hinges and latches, hoodhinges and latches, glove boxhinges, sunroof (if equipped), andany folding seat hardware. Morefrequent lubrication may be requiredwhen exposed to a corrosiveenvironment. Applying siliconegrease on weatherstrips with a cleancloth will make them last longer,seal better, and not stick or squeak.


(g) Check system for interference orbinding and for damaged or missingparts. Replace parts as needed.Replace any components that havehigh effort or excessive wear.

(h) Severe service is when thevehicle is mainly driven under oneor more of these conditions:− In heavy city traffic where the

outside temperature regularlyreaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer

towing.− Uses such as found in taxi,

police, or delivery service.

(i) Drain, flush, and refill coolingsystem. This service can becomplex; you should have yourdealer/retailer perform this service.See Engine Coolant on page 5-22 forwhat to use. Inspect hoses. Cleanradiator, condenser, pressure cap,and filler neck. Pressure test thecooling system and pressure cap.

(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle systemcould indicate a problem. Havethe system inspected and repairedand the fluid level checked. Addfluid if needed.

(k) Or every 12 months, whicheveroccurs first. If you drive regularlyunder dusty conditions, the filter mayrequire replacement more often.

(l) If driving regularly under dustyconditions, inspect the filter at eachengine oil change.

(m) Change the fluid the firsttime the vehicle is serviced after100,000 miles (166 000 km) andwhen the vehicle is serviced aftereach subsequent 50,000 miles(83 000 km).

(n) Visually inspect belt for fraying,excessive cracks, or obviousdamage. Replace belt if necessary.


Owner Checks andServicesThese owner checks and servicesshould be performed at the intervalsspecified to help ensure vehiclesafety, dependability, and emissioncontrol performance. Yourdealer/retailer can assist with thesechecks and services.

Be sure any necessary repairs arecompleted at once. Wheneverany fluids or lubricants are added tothe vehicle, make sure they arethe proper ones, as shown inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-13.

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform theseunderhood checks at each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level Check

Notice: It is important to checkthe engine oil regularly andkeep it at the proper level. Failureto keep the engine oil at theproper level can cause damage tothe engine not covered by thevehicle warranty.

Check the engine oil level and addthe proper oil if necessary. SeeEngine Oil on page 5-14.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant leveland add DEX-COOL® coolantmixture if necessary. See EngineCoolant on page 5-22.

Windshield Washer FluidLevel CheckCheck the windshield washer fluidlevel in the windshield washerfluid reservoir and add the properfluid if necessary.

At Least Once a MonthTire Inflation CheckInspect the vehicle’s tires and makesure they are inflated to the correctpressures. Do not forget to check thespare tire. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 5-49. Check tomake sure the spare tire is storedsecurely. See Changing a Flat Tireon page 5-64.

Tire Wear InspectionTire rotation may be required forhigh mileage highway drivers prior tothe Engine Oil Life System servicenotification. Check the tires forwear and, if necessary, rotate thetires. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 5-56.


At Least Once a YearStarter Switch Check

{ CAUTION

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle could movesuddenly. If the vehicle moves,you or others could be injured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake.See Parking Brake on page 2-24.Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if it starts.

3. For automatic transmissionvehicles, try to start the engine ineach gear. The vehicle shouldstart only in P (Park) orN (Neutral). If the vehicle startsin any other position, contactyour dealer/retailer for service.For manual transmissionvehicles, put the shift lever inNeutral, push the clutchpedal down halfway, and try tostart the engine. The vehicleshould start only when the clutchpedal is pushed down all theway to the floor. If the vehiclestarts when the clutch pedalis not pushed all the way down,contact your dealer/retailerfor service.

Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control System Check

{ CAUTION

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle could movesuddenly. If the vehicle moves,you or others could be injured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.See Parking Brake on page 2-24.Be ready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.


3. With the engine off, turn theignition to ON/RUN, but donot start the engine. Withoutapplying the regular brake, try tomove the shift lever out ofP (Park) with normal effort. If theshift lever moves out ofP (Park), contact yourdealer/retailer for service.

Ignition Transmission LockCheckWhile parked, and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF in each shiftlever position.

• For automatic transmissionvehicles, the ignition should turnto LOCK/OFF only when theshift lever is in P (Park).The ignition key should come outonly in LOCK/OFF.

• For manual transmissionvehicles, the ignition key shouldcome out only in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer/retailer if serviceis required.

Parking Brake and AutomaticTransmission P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ CAUTION

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’sholding ability: With the enginerunning and transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular

brake pedal. Do this until thevehicle is held by the parkingbrake only.

• To check the P (Park)mechanism’s holding ability: Withthe engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer/retailer ifservice is required.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plainwater to flush any corrosivematerials from the underbody. Takecare to clean thoroughly anyareas where mud and other debriscan collect.


Recommended Fluids and LubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from yourdealer/retailer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays theAmerican Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburstsymbol. To determine the proper viscosity for your vehicle’s engine, seeEngine Oil on page 5-14.

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolant on page 5-22.

Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 12377967,in Canada 89021320).

Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Hydraulic Power Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,in Canada 89021186).

Parking Brake Cable Guides Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) orlubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.


Usage Fluid/LubricantTransfer Case and Carrier

Assembly - DifferentialSAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,in Canada 89021678) meeting GM Specification 9986115.

Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Hood Latch Assembly, SecondaryLatch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (Saturn Part No. 21038869 orGM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in Canada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood, Liftgate Door, and RearFolding Seat Hinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Sunroof TrackLubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (Saturn Part No. 21038869 orGM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in Canada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Weatherstrip ConditioningWeatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,in Canada 10953518) or Dielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in Canada 992887).


Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your retailer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part NumberEngine Air Cleaner/Filter 96815102 —Engine Oil Filter

2.4L L4 12605566 PF457G3.5L V6 89017342 PF613.6L V6 89017524 PF48

Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 19130294 —Spark Plugs

2.4L L4 12625058 41-1033.5L V6 12591131 41-1003.6L V6 12597464 41-990

Wiper BladesDriver Side – 24 in (60.0 cm) 25925618 —Passenger Side – 16 in (40.0 cm) 25925620 —Rear – 12.0 in (30.0 cm) 96624648 —


Engine Drive BeltRouting

2.4L L4 (LE5) Engine

3.5L V6 (LZ4) Engine3.6L V6 (LY7) Engine


Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-1. Any additionalinformation from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-10 can be added on the following record pages. You shouldretain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed


Maintenance Record (cont’d)




CustomerAssistanceInformation

Customer Assistance andInformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure ...........................7-1

Online Owner Center .............7-4Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)Users .................................7-5

Customer Assistance Offices ....7-5GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram .............................7-6

Roadside AssistanceProgram .............................7-6

Scheduling ServiceAppointments ......................7-8

Courtesy Transportation .........7-9Collision Damage Repair ......7-10

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernment ......................7-14

Reporting Safety Defects tothe Canadian Government ....7-14

Reporting Safety Defectsto Saturn ..........................7-14

Service PublicationsOrdering Information ...........7-15

Vehicle Data Recordingand PrivacyVehicle Data Recordingand Privacy .......................7-16

Event Data Recorders ..........7-16OnStar® .............................7-17Navigation System ...............7-17Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) ............7-17

Customer Assistanceand Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your retailer and toSaturn. Together we are committedto providing our customers withunparalleled service, before, during,and after the purchase of aSaturn vehicle, for total customersatisfaction. We call this the SaturnDifference. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle are resolvedby the retailer’s sales or servicedepartments. If, for any reason, yourownership experience falls belowyour expectations, we suggestyou take the following action:

STEP ONE: Contact the RetailCustomer Assistance Liaison. Anymember of the retail managementteam has the authority and thedesire to resolve your concerns.

Customer Assistance Information 7-1

Normally, concerns can be quicklyresolved at this level.

STEP TWO: Should you needadditional assistance, in the U.S.,contact the Saturn CustomerAssistance Center by calling1-800-553-6000. In Canada, call theSaturn Customer CommunicationCentre at 1-800-263-1999. A SaturnCustomer Assistance Center teammember will handle your call andassist in providing product andwarranty information, the nearestretailer location, roadside assistance,brochures, literature and discuss anyconcerns you may have.

We encourage you to call the toll-freenumber in order to give your inquiryprompt attention. Please have thefollowing information available togive the Customer AssistanceRepresentative:

• Vehicle Identification Number(VIN). This 17-digit number canbe found on the vehicleregistration or title, on the upperdriver side corner of theinstrument panel, or on yourroadside assistance key card.

• The name of your selling andservicing retail facility.

• Vehicle delivery date and presentmileage.

• Your daytime and evening phonenumbers.

When contacting Saturn, pleaseremember that your concernwill likely be resolved at a retailer’sfacility. That is why we suggestyou follow Step One first.

STEP THREE (U.S. Owners):Both Saturn and its retailers arecommitted to making sure you arecompletely satisfied with your Saturnvehicle. However, if you continue toremain unsatisfied after following theprocedure outlined in Steps One andTwo, Saturn and its retailers offer theadditional assistance of a neutralparty through our voluntaryparticipation in a mediation/arbitration program called BetterBusiness Bureau (BBB) Auto Line.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administered bythe Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. This program isavailable at no cost to you, ourcustomer.

7-2 Customer Assistance Information

Although you may be required toresort to this informal disputeresolution program prior to filing acourt action, use of the program isfree of charge and your case isgenerally heard within 40 days. If youdo not agree with the decision givenin your case, you can reject it andproceed with any other venue forrelief available to you.

Contact the BBB Auto Line Programby using the toll-free telephonenumber or by writing them at thefollowing address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better BusinessBureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage and otherfactors. Saturn Corporation reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.

STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):

General Motors Participation inthe Mediation/Arbitration Program

In the event that you do not feelyour concerns have been addressedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps 1 and 2, GeneralMotors of Canada Limited hascommitted to binding arbitration ofowner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involvedby an impartial third party arbiter,and may include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entiredispute settlement process, from thetime you file your complaint to the

final decision, should be completedin approximately 70 days. Webelieve our impartial program offersadvantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal,quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.Alternatively, you may call theSaturn Customer CommunicationCentre, 1-800-263-1999, or you maywrite to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer CommunicationCentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

Your inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).


Online Owner CenterOnline Owner Center (U.S.) —www.gmownercenter.com/saturnInformation and services customizedfor your specific vehicle — all inone convenient place.

• Digital owner manual, warrantyinformation, and more

• Online service and maintenancerecords

• Find Saturn retailers for servicenationwide

• Exclusive privileges and offers

• Recall notices for your specificvehicle

• OnStar® and GM CardmemberServices Earnings summaries

Other Helpful Links:

Saturn — www.saturn.com

Saturn Merchandise —www.saturncollection.com

Help Center —www.saturn.com/helpcenter

• FAQ

• Contact Us

My GM Canada (Canada) —www.gm.caMy GM Canada is apassword-protected section ofwww.gm.ca where you can saveinformation on GM vehicles, getpersonalized offers, and use handytools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable toolsand services you will have access to:

• My Showroom: Find and saveinformation on vehicles andcurrent offers in your area.

• My Dealers/Retailers: Savedetails such as address andphone number for each of yourpreferred GM dealers/retailers.

• My Driveway: Access quick linksto parts and service estimates,check trade-in values, or schedulea service appointment by addingthe vehicles you own to yourdriveway profile.

• My Preferences: Manage yourprofile and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up, visit the My GM Canadasection within www.gm.ca.


Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist owners who have hearingdifficulties, Saturn has installedspecial TDD (TelecommunicationDevices for the Deaf) equipment inits Saturn Customer AssistanceCenter.

Any hearing or speech-impairedcustomer who has access to a TDDor to a conventional Text Telephone(TTY) can communicate withSaturn by dialing 1-800-TDD-6000.TTY users in Canada may dial1-800-263-3830.

Customer AssistanceOfficesSaturn encourages customers tocall the toll-free number forassistance. If a customer wishes towrite to Saturn, the letter shouldbe addressed to:

Saturn Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33173Detroit, MI 48232-5173

1-800-553-60001-800-833-6000 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-553-6000

In Canada, write to:

Saturn Customer CommunicationCentreGeneral Motors of Canada Ltd.CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

GMcanada.com1-800-263-19991-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800


GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program, available to qualifiedapplicants, can reimburse you up to$1,000 toward eligible aftermarketdriver or passenger adaptiveequipment you may require for yourvehicle such as hand controls,wheelchair/scooter lifts, etc.

The offer is available for a limitedperiod of time from the date ofvehicle purchase/lease.

For more details, or to determineyour vehicle’s eligibility, visityour Saturn retailer or call theSaturn Customer Assistance Centerat 1-800-553-6000. Text telephone(TTY) users, call 1-800-833-6000.

In Canada, customers may callthe Saturn CustomerCommunication Centre at1-800-263-1999. TTY users inCanada may call 1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgramFor U.S. purchased vehicles, call1-800-553-6000; (Text Telephone(TTY): 1-800-889-2438).

For Canadian purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for AssistanceWhen calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:

• Your name, home address, andhome telephone number

• Telephone number of yourlocation

• Location of the vehicle

• Model, year, color, and licenseplate number of the vehicle

• Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle

• Description of the problem

CoverageServices are provided up to5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),whichever comes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner isnot covered.


Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Saturn and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tomake any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

Saturn and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tolimit services or payment to anowner or driver if they decide theclaims are made too often, orthe same type of claim is mademany times.

Services Provided• Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel forthe vehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

• Lock-Out Service: Service isprovided to unlock the vehicleif you are locked out. A remoteunlock may be available ifyou have OnStar®. For securityreasons, the driver mustpresent identification before thisservice is given.

• Emergency Tow From a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest Saturn retailer forwarranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is alsogiven when the vehicle is stuckin sand, mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: Service isprovided to change a flat tirewith the spare tire. The spare tire,if equipped, must be in goodcondition and properly inflated. Itis the owner’s responsibilityfor the repair or replacement ofthe tire if it is not covered bythe warranty.

• Battery Jump Start: Service isprovided to jump start a deadbattery.

• Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: If your trip isinterrupted due to a warrantyfailure, incidental expenses maybe reimbursed during the 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km)Powertrain warranty period. Itemsconsidered are hotel, meals, andrental car.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance• Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.

• Legal fines.

• Mounting, dismounting orchanging of snow tires, chains,or other traction devices.

• Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.


Services Specific to CanadianPurchased Vehicles• Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is

approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery maybe restricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

• Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

• Trip Routing Service: Detailedmaps of North America areprovided when requested eitherwith the most direct route orthe most scenic route. There is alimit of six requests per year.Additional travel informationis also available. Allowthree weeks for delivery.

• Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over250 kilometres from where yourtrip was started to qualify. GeneralMotors of Canada Limitedrequires pre-authorization,original detailed receipts, and acopy of the repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help you make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.

• Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor may give youpermission to get local emergencyroad service. You will receivepayment, up to $100, aftersending the original receipt toRoadside Assistance. Mechanicalfailures may be covered, howeverany cost for parts and labor forrepairs not covered by thewarranty are the ownerresponsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer/retailerand request an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising your service consultantof your transportation needs, yourdealer/retailer can help minimizeyour inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety-related. If it is, pleasecall your dealership/retailer, let themknow this, and ask for instructions.

If the dealer/retailer requestsyou to bring the vehicle for service,you are urged to do so as earlyin the work day as possible to allowfor the same day repair.


Courtesy TransportationTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingretailers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customersupport program for vehicles withthe Bumper to Bumper (BaseWarranty Coverage period inCanada), extended powertrain, andhybrid specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

Several courtesy transportationoptions are available to assistin reducing your inconveniencewhen warranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information” furnishedwith each new vehicle providesdetailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generallybe completed while you wait.However, if you are unable to wait,Saturn helps to minimize yourinconvenience by providing severaltransportation options. Depending onthe circumstances, your retailer canoffer you one of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Retailers mayprovide you with shuttle service toget you to your destination withminimal interruption of your dailyschedule. This includes one-way orround trip shuttle service withinreasonable time and distanceparameters of the retailer’s area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If your vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used instead of theretailer’s shuttle service, the expensemust be supported by originalreceipts and can only be up to themaximum amount allowed by Saturnfor shuttle service. In addition, forU.S. customers, should you arrangetransportation through a friend orrelative, limited reimbursement forreasonable fuel expenses may beavailable. Claim amounts shouldreflect actual costs and be supportedby original receipts. See your retailerfor information regarding theallowance amounts forreimbursement of fuel or othertransportation costs.


Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your retailer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicle orreimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if your vehicle is keptfor an overnight warranty repair.Rental reimbursement will be limitedand must be supported by originalreceipts. This requires that you signand complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, andrental vehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card, etc.You are responsible for fuel usagecharges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion of therepair.

It may not be possible to provide alike-vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformationAll program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery retailer. Please contact yourretailer for specific informationabout availability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements willbe administered by appropriateretailer personnel.

Saturn reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change ordiscontinue Courtesy Transportationat any time and to resolve allquestions of claim eligibility pursuantto the terms and conditionsdescribed herein at its solediscretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, havethe damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish your vehicle’sresale value, and safetyperformance can be compromisedin subsequent collisions.

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which your vehiclewas originally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are your best choiceto ensure that your vehicle’sdesigned appearance, durability,and safety are preserved. The useof Genuine GM parts can helpmaintain your GM New VehicleWarranty.


Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart, may be an acceptable choice tomaintain your vehicle’s originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance, however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by your GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM andmay not have been tested for yourvehicle. As a result, these partsmay fit poorly, exhibit prematuredurability/corrosion problems, andmay not perform properly insubsequent collisions. Aftermarketparts are not covered by your GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty, and

any vehicle failure related to suchparts are not covered by thatwarranty.

Repair FacilityWe recommend that you choose acollision repair facility that meetsyour needs before you everneed collision repairs. Yourdealer/retailer may have a collisionrepair center with GM-trainedtechnicians and state of the artequipment, or be able torecommend a collision repair centerthat has GM-trained techniciansand comparable equipment.

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage affordedby various insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to your GMvehicle by limiting compensation fordamage repairs by using

aftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will not specifyaftermarket collision parts. Whenpurchasing insurance, werecommend that you assure yourvehicle will be repaired withGM original equipment collisionparts. If such insurance coverage isnot available from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that assures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read your lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofyour lease for poor quality repairs.


If a Crash OccursHere is what to do if you areinvolved in a crash.

• Check to make sure that you areall right. If you are uninjured,make sure that no one else inyour vehicle, or the other vehicle,is injured.

• If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help.Do not leave the scene of a crashuntil all matters have beentaken care of. Move your vehicleonly if its position puts you indanger or you are instructed tomove it by a police officer.

• Give only the necessary andrequested information topolice and other parties involvedin the crash. Do not discussyour personal condition, mentalframe of mind, or anythingunrelated to the crash. This willhelp guard against post-crashlegal action.

• If you need roadside assistance,call GM Roadside Assistance.See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 7-6 for moreinformation.

• If your vehicle cannot be driven,know where the towing servicewill be taking it. Get a cardfrom the tow truck operator orwrite down the driver’s name, theservice’s name, and the phonenumber.

• Remove any valuables from yourvehicle before it is towed away.Make sure this includes yourinsurance information andregistration if you keep theseitems in your vehicle.

• Gather the important informationyou will need from the otherdriver. Things like name,address, phone number, driver’slicense number, vehicle licenseplate, vehicle make, modeland model year, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN),insurance company and policynumber, and a generaldescription of the damage to theother vehicle.

• If possible, call your insurancecompany from the scene ofthe crash. They will walkyou through the information theywill need. If they ask for apolice report, phone or go to thepolice department headquartersthe next day and you can geta copy of the report for a nominalfee. In some states/provinceswith “no fault” insurance laws, areport may not be necessary.This is especially true if there areno injuries and both vehiclesare driveable.


• Choose a reputable collisionrepair facility for your vehicle.Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a private collision repairfacility to fix the damage, makesure you are comfortable withthem. Remember, you will have tofeel comfortable with their work fora long time.

• Once you have an estimate, readit carefully and make sure youunderstand what work will beperformed on your vehicle. If youhave a question, ask for anexplanation. Reputable shopswelcome this opportunity.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair ProcessIn the event that your vehiclerequires damage repairs, GMrecommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have apre-determined repair facilityof choice, take your vehicle there, orhave it towed there. Specify to thefacility that any requiredreplacement collision parts beoriginal equipment parts, either newGenuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be coveredby your GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for therepair, but you must live with therepair. Depending on yourpolicy limits, your insurancecompany may initially value therepair using aftermarket parts.Discuss this with your repairprofessional, and insist on GenuineGM parts. Remember if yourvehicle is leased you may beobligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party’s insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accepta repair valuation based onthat insurance company’s collisionpolicy repair limits, as you haveno contractual limits with thatcompany. In such cases, you canhave control of the repair andparts choices as long as cost stayswithin reasonable limits.


Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which couldcause a crash or could causeinjury or death, you shouldimmediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) inaddition to notifying GeneralMotors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall andremedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involvedin individual problems betweenyou, your dealer/retailer, orGeneral Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tosafercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington D.C., 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that your vehicle hasa safety defect, notify TransportCanada immediately, in addition tonotifying General Motors ofCanada Limited. Call them at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defectsto SaturnIn addition to notifying NHTSA(or Transport Canada) in a situationlike this, please notify Saturn.

Call 1-800-553-6000, or write:

Saturn Corporation100 Saturn ParkwayMail Drop 371-999-S24Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500

In Canada, call 1-800-263-1999, orwrite:

Saturn Customer CommunicationCentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7


Service PublicationsOrdering InformationService ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on engines,transmission, axle suspension,brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Service BulletinsService Bulletins give additionaltechnical service information neededto knowledgeably service GeneralMotors cars and trucks. Eachbulletin contains instructions toassist in the diagnosis and serviceof your vehicle.

Owner InformationOwner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. Theowner manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyBooklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee

Without Portfolio: OwnerManual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee

Current and Past Model OrderFormsTechnical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.To request an order form, specifyyear and model name of the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday-Friday8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visitHelm, Inc. on the World WideWeb at: helminc.com

Or you can write to:


Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: Alllisted prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Canadian residents are tomake checks payable in U.S. funds.


Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyYour Saturn vehicle has a numberof sophisticated computers thatrecord information about thevehicle’s performance and how it isdriven. For example, your vehicleuses computer modules to monitorand control engine and transmissionperformance, to monitor theconditions for airbag deploymentand deploy airbags in a crash and,if so equipped, to provide antilockbraking to help the driver control thevehicle. These modules maystore data to help yourdealer/retailer technician serviceyour vehicle. Some modulesmay also store data about how youoperate the vehicle, such as rateof fuel consumption or averagespeed. These modules mayalso retain the owner’s personalpreferences, such as radio pre-sets,seat positions, and temperaturesettings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle has an EventData Recorder (EDR). The mainpurpose of an EDR is to record, incertain crash or near crash-likesituations, such as an airbagdeployment or hitting a roadobstacle, data that will assist inunderstanding how a vehicle’ssystems performed. The EDR isdesigned to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safetysystems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designedto record such data as:

• How various systems in yourvehicle were operating

• Whether or not the driver andpassenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened

• How far, if at all, the driver waspressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal

• How fast the vehicle wastraveling

This data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstancesin which crashes and injuriesoccur.Important: EDR data is recordedby your vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no datais recorded by the EDR undernormal driving conditions and nopersonal data (e.g., name, gender,age, and crash location) isrecorded. However, other parties,such as law enforcement, couldcombine the EDR data with the typeof personally identifying dataroutinely acquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required,and access to the vehicle or theEDR is needed. In addition tothe vehicle manufacturer, otherparties, such as law enforcement,that have the special equipment, canread the information if they haveaccess to the vehicle or the EDR.


Saturn will not access this data orshare it with others except: withthe consent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request of police orsimilar government office; as part ofSaturn’s defense of litigationthrough the discovery process; or,as required by law. Data that Saturncollects or receives may also beused for Saturn research needs ormay be made available to othersfor research purposes, wherea need is shown and the data is nottied to a specific vehicle or vehicleowner.

OnStar®

If your vehicle has OnStar and yousubscribe to the OnStar services,please refer to the OnStar Terms andConditions for information on datacollection and use. See also OnStar®

System on page 2-33 in this manualfor more information.

Navigation SystemIf your vehicle has a navigationsystem, use of the system mayresult in the storage of destinations,addresses, telephone numbers, andother trip information. Refer to thenavigation system operating manualfor information on stored data and fordeletion instructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such astire pressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniences suchas key fobs for remote doorlocking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology inSaturn vehicles does not useor record personal information orlink with any other Saturn systemcontaining personal information.


✍ NOTES


AAbout Driving Your Vehicle ......... iiAccessories and

Modifications ...................... 5-3Accessory Power ................. 2-17Accessory Power Outlets ...... 3-16Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .... 1-57Additional Required Services,

Scheduled Maintenance ....... 6-6Additives, Fuel ...................... 5-6Add-On Electrical

Equipment ....................... 5-79Adjustment

Chime Level .................... 3-93Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ....... 5-17Air Conditioning ................... 3-17Air Filter, Passenger

Compartment ................... 3-24Airbag

Readiness Light ................ 3-29Airbag System ..................... 1-42

Adding Equipment toYour Airbag-EquippedVehicle ........................ 1-57

How Does an AirbagRestrain? ..................... 1-49

Airbag System (cont.)Passenger Sensing

System ........................ 1-51Servicing Your

Airbag-EquippedVehicle ........................ 1-56

What Makes an AirbagInflate? ........................ 1-49

What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates? ........ 1-50

When Should an AirbagInflate? ........................ 1-47

Where Are the Airbags? ..... 1-45Airbags

Passenger StatusIndicator ....................... 3-30

All-Wheel Drive .................... 5-35All-Wheel Drive Disabled

Light ............................... 3-40All-Wheel-Drive (AWD)

System ............................. 4-9Antenna

Fixed Mast ...................... 3-93Antenna, XM™ Satellite

Radio Antenna System ...... 3-93Antilock Brake

System (ABS) .................... 4-6Warning Light ................... 3-32

Appearance CareAluminum Wheels ............. 5-77Care of Safety Belts .......... 5-74Chemical Paint Spotting ..... 5-78Cleaning Exterior Lamps/

Lenses ........................ 5-75Fabric/Carpet ................... 5-73Finish Care ...................... 5-76Finish Damage ................. 5-78Instrument Panel, Vinyl,

and Other PlasticSurfaces ...................... 5-74

Interior Cleaning ............... 5-72Leather ........................... 5-74Sheet Metal Damage ........ 5-78Tires ............................... 5-77Underbody Maintenance .... 5-78Washing Your Vehicle ........ 5-75Weatherstrips ................... 5-75Windshield and Wiper

Blades ......................... 5-76Assistance Program,

Roadside .......................... 7-6Audio System ...................... 3-64

Audio Steering WheelControls ....................... 3-92

Navigation/Radio System,see Navigation Manual ... 3-81

INDEX i-1

Audio System (cont.)Setting the Clock .............. 3-65XM™ Satellite Radio

Antenna System ............ 3-93Audio System(s) .................. 3-67Audio Systems

Radio Reception ............... 3-92Theft-Deterrent Feature ...... 3-91

Automatic Climate ControlSystem ........................... 3-20

Automatic Door Lock .............. 2-8Automatic Door Unlock ........... 2-8Automatic Headlamp

System ........................... 3-13Automatic Transmission

Fluid ............................... 5-18Operation ................ 2-19, 2-22

BBattery ............................... 5-30

Electric PowerManagement ................. 3-15

Run-Down Protection ......... 3-16Belt Routing, Engine ............. 6-16Bluetooth® .......................... 3-81Brake

Emergencies ...................... 4-6Brake Fluid ......................... 5-28

Brakes ............................... 5-28Antilock ............................. 4-6Parking ........................... 2-24System Warning Light ....... 3-31

Braking ................................ 4-5Braking in Emergencies .......... 4-6Break-In, New Vehicle .......... 2-15Bulb Replacement ................ 5-41

Fog Lamp ........................ 3-14Front Turn Signal and

Parking Lamps .............. 5-40Halogen Bulbs .................. 5-39Headlamp Aiming .............. 5-36Headlamps ...................... 5-39License Plate Lamps ......... 5-41Taillamps, Turn Signal,

Stoplamps and Back-upLamps ......................... 5-40

Buying New Tires ................. 5-58

CCalibration .......................... 3-47California

Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements ................. 5-4

California Fuel ....................... 5-6California Proposition 65

Warning ............................ 5-4

Camera, Rear Vision ............ 2-31Canadian Owners ..................... iiCapacities and

Specifications ................... 5-86Carbon Monoxide

Engine Exhaust ................ 2-28Liftgate ............................. 2-9Winter Driving .................. 4-25

Care ofSafety Belts ..................... 5-74

CargoTie Downs ....................... 2-44

Cargo Cover ....................... 2-44Cargo Management System ... 2-44CD, MP3 ............................ 3-75Center Console Storage ........ 2-42Chains, Tire ........................ 5-62Charging System Light .......... 3-31Check

Engine Lamp ................... 3-35Checking Things Under

the Hood ......................... 5-10Chemical Paint Spotting ........ 5-78Child Restraints

Infants and YoungChildren ....................... 1-26

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children ....... 1-31

i-2 INDEX

Child Restraints (cont.)Older Children .................. 1-23Securing a Child

Restraint in a RearSeat Position ................ 1-37

Securing a Child Restraintin the Right FrontSeat Position ................ 1-39

Systems .......................... 1-29Where to Put the

Restraint ...................... 1-30Chime Level Adjustment ........ 3-93Circuit Breakers ................... 5-80Cleaning

Aluminum Wheels ............. 5-77Exterior Lamps/Lenses ...... 5-75Fabric/Carpet ................... 5-73Finish Care ...................... 5-76Instrument Panel, Vinyl,

and Other PlasticSurfaces ...................... 5-74

Interior ............................ 5-72Leather ........................... 5-74Tires ............................... 5-77Underbody Maintenance .... 5-78Washing Your Vehicle ........ 5-75

Cleaning (cont.)Weatherstrips ................... 5-75Windshield and Wiper

Blades ......................... 5-76Climate Control System ......... 3-17

Outlet Adjustment ............. 3-24Climate Control Systems

Automatic ........................ 3-20Clock, Setting ...................... 3-65Collision Damage Repair ....... 7-10Compact Spare Tire ............. 5-71Compass ............................ 3-47Content Theft-Deterrent ......... 2-12Control of a Vehicle ............... 4-4Convenience Net ................. 2-44Coolant

Engine ............................ 5-22Engine Temperature

Warning Light ............... 3-34Surge Tank Pressure Cap ... 5-25

Cooling System ................... 5-19Courtesy Transportation .......... 7-9Cruise Control ....................... 3-9Cruise Control Light .............. 3-38Cupholders ......................... 2-41

Customer Assistance .............. 7-5Offices .............................. 7-5Text Telephone (TTY)

Users ............................ 7-5Customer Information

Service PublicationsOrdering Information ...... 7-15

Customer SatisfactionProcedure ......................... 7-1

DDamage Repair, Collision ...... 7-10Data Recorders

Event .............................. 7-16Daytime Running

Lamps (DRL) ................... 3-13Daytime Running Lamps

Indicator Light .................. 3-39Defensive Driving ................... 4-3Delayed Locking .................... 2-8DIC Compass ...................... 3-47Disc, MP3 ........................... 3-75Doing Your Own

Service Work ..................... 5-4Dome Lamp ........................ 3-14

INDEX i-3

DoorAjar Light ........................ 3-40Automatic Door Lock .......... 2-8Automatic Door Unlock ........ 2-8Delayed Locking ................. 2-8Locks ............................... 2-7Power Door Locks .............. 2-8Rear Door Security Locks .... 2-8

Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive ................ 5-35

DriverSeat Height Adjuster ........... 1-4

Driver Behavior ..................... 4-2Driver Information

Center (DIC) .................... 3-42DIC Operation and

Displays ....................... 3-42DIC Vehicle

Customization ............... 3-57DIC Warnings and

Messages .................... 3-49Driving

At Night .......................... 4-22Before a Long Trip ............ 4-24Defensive .......................... 4-3Drunk ............................... 4-4Environment ...................... 4-2Highway Hypnosis ............ 4-24Hill and Mountain Roads .... 4-24

Driving (cont.)In Rain and on Wet

Roads ......................... 4-23Loss of Control ................ 4-12Off-Road ......................... 4-13Off-Road Recovery ........... 4-11Rocking Your Vehicle to

Get it Out .................... 4-27Winter ............................. 4-25

Driving for Better FuelEconomy ........................... 4-3

EEDR .................................. 7-16Electrical Equipment

Add-On Equipment ............ 5-79Electrical System

Fuses and CircuitBreakers ...................... 5-80

Instrument Panel FuseBlock ........................... 5-80

Power Windows andOther Power Options ..... 5-80

Underhood Fuse Block ...... 5-82Windshield Wiper Fuses .... 5-80

Electronic ImmobilizerPASS-Key® III+ ................ 2-13

Electronic ImmobilizerOperationPASS-Key® III+ ................ 2-14

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ............... 5-17Change Engine Oil Light .... 3-38Check and Service

Engine Soon Lamp ........ 3-35Compartment Overview ...... 5-12Coolant ........................... 5-22Coolant Heater ................. 2-18Coolant Temperature

Warning Light ............... 3-34Cooling System ................ 5-19Drive Belt Routing ............. 6-16Exhaust ........................... 2-28Oil .................................. 5-14Oil Life System ................. 5-16Overheating ..................... 5-25Reduced Power Light ........ 3-39Starting ........................... 2-17

Entry Lighting ...................... 3-14Reporting Safety Defects

to the United StatesGovernment ..................... 7-14

Event Data Recorders .......... 7-16Extender, Safety Belt ............ 1-23Exterior Lamps .................... 3-12

i-4 INDEX

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ............ 5-17Finish Damage .................... 5-78Fixed Mast Antenna ............. 3-93Flashers, Hazard Warning ....... 3-5Flash-to-Pass ........................ 3-7Flat Tire .............................. 5-63Flat Tire, Changing ............... 5-64Flat Tire, Storing .................. 5-70Fluid

Automatic Transmission ..... 5-18Power Steering ................. 5-26Windshield Washer ........... 5-27

Fog LampFog ................................ 3-14

Fog Lamp Light ................... 3-38Folding Rear Seat ................. 1-9Folding Seatback, Passenger ... 1-8Front Storage Area ............... 2-42Fuel ..................................... 5-5

Additives ........................... 5-6California Fuel ................... 5-6Economy Driving ................ 4-3Filling a Portable Fuel

Container ..................... 5-10

Fuel (cont.)Filling the Tank .................. 5-8Fuels in Foreign Countries ... 5-8Gage .............................. 3-41Gasoline Octane ................ 5-5Gasoline Specifications ........ 5-6Low Fuel Warning Light ..... 3-41

FusesFuses and Circuit

Breakers ...................... 5-80Instrument Panel Fuse

Block ........................... 5-80Underhood Fuse Block ...... 5-82Windshield Wiper .............. 5-80

GGage

Speedometer ................... 3-28Tachometer ...................... 3-28

GagesFuel ................................ 3-41Trip Odometer .................. 3-28

Garage Door Opener ............ 2-37Gasoline

Octane ............................. 5-5Specifications ..................... 5-6

Gate Ajar Light .................... 3-40Glove Box ........................... 2-41GM Mobility Reimbursement

Program ............................ 7-6

HHalogen Bulbs ..................... 5-39Hazard Warning Flashers ........ 3-5Head Restraints ..................... 1-2Headlamp

Aiming ............................ 5-36Headlamps .......................... 5-39

Bulb Replacement ............. 5-39Daytime Running

Lamps (DRL) ................ 3-13Exterior Lamps ................. 3-12Flash-to-Pass ..................... 3-7High/Low Beam Changer ..... 3-7Wiper Activated ................ 3-12

Heated Seats ........................ 1-5Heater ................................ 3-17

Engine Coolant ................. 2-18Height Adjuster, Driver Seat .... 1-4Highbeam On Light .............. 3-39High-Speed Operation,

Tires ............................... 5-50

INDEX i-5

Highway Hypnosis ................ 4-24Hill and Mountain Roads ....... 4-24Hood

Checking Things Under ..... 5-10Release .......................... 5-11

Horn .................................... 3-5How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly .......................... 1-14

IIgnition Positions .................. 2-16Infants and Young Children,

Restraints ........................ 1-26Inflation - Tire Pressure ......... 5-49Instrument Panel

Brightness ....................... 3-14Cluster ............................ 3-27Overview ........................... 3-4Storage Area .................... 2-42

Introduction ........................... 6-1

JJump Starting ...................... 5-31

KKeyless Entry, Remote

Operation .......................... 2-4Keyless Entry System ............ 2-3Keys .................................... 2-2

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall .......... 5-44Lamp

Malfunction Indicator ......... 3-35Lamps

Daytime Running (DRL) ..... 3-13Dome ............................. 3-14Front Turn Signal and

Parking Lamps .............. 5-40License Plate ................... 5-41Reading .......................... 3-15

Lap-Shoulder Belt ................ 1-19LATCH System for Child

Restraints ........................ 1-31Liftgate

Carbon Monoxide ............... 2-9Lighting

Entry .............................. 3-14

LightsAirbag Readiness ............. 3-29All-Wheel Drive Disabled .... 3-40Antilock Brake System

(ABS) Warning .............. 3-32Brake System Warning ...... 3-31Change Engine Oil ........... 3-38Charging System .............. 3-31Cruise Control .................. 3-38Daytime Running Lamps

Indicator ....................... 3-39Door Ajar ......................... 3-40Engine Coolant

Temperature Warning ..... 3-34Exterior Lamps ................. 3-12Flash-to-Pass ..................... 3-7Fog Lamp ........................ 3-38Gate Ajar ......................... 3-40Highbeam On ................... 3-39High/Low Beam Changer ..... 3-7Low Fuel Warning ............. 3-41Low Washer Fluid

Warning ....................... 3-40Oil Pressure ..................... 3-37Passenger Airbag Status

Indicator ....................... 3-30

i-6 INDEX

Lights (cont.)Reduced Engine Power ..... 3-39Safety Belt Reminders ....... 3-28Security ........................... 3-38Service Vehicle Soon ........ 3-40StabiliTrak® Indicator ......... 3-33Tire Pressure ................... 3-34Traction Control System

(TCS) Warning .............. 3-33Warning, Power Steering ... 3-33

Loading Your Vehicle ............ 4-28Locks

Automatic Door Lock .......... 2-8Automatic Door Unlock ........ 2-8Delayed Locking ................. 2-8Door ................................. 2-7Lockout Protection .............. 2-8Power Door ....................... 2-8Rear Door Security Locks .... 2-8

Loss of Control .................... 4-12Low Fuel Warning Light ........ 3-41Low Washer Fluid Warning

Light ............................... 3-40Lower Anchors and Tethers

for Children ...................... 1-31Luggage Carrier ................... 2-43Lumbar

Manual Controls ................. 1-5

MMaintenance

Footnotes .......................... 6-8Maintenance Schedule

Additional RequiredServices ........................ 6-6

At Each Fuel Fill .............. 6-10At Least Once a Month ..... 6-10At Least Once a Year ....... 6-11Maintenance Record ......... 6-17Maintenance Replacement

Parts ........................... 6-15Maintenance Requirements ... 6-1Owner Checks and

Services ....................... 6-10Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants .................... 6-13Scheduled Maintenance ....... 6-3Using ............................... 6-2Your Vehicle and the

Environment ................... 6-1Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 3-35Manual Lumbar Controls ......... 1-5Manual Seats ........................ 1-3Message

DIC Warnings andMessages .................... 3-49

MirrorsAutomatic Dimming

Rearview ...................... 2-29Manual Rearview Mirror ..... 2-29Outside Convex Mirror ....... 2-30Outside Heated Mirrors ...... 2-30Outside Power Mirrors ....... 2-29

MP3 ................................... 3-75

NNavigation System, Privacy ... 7-17Navigation/Radio System,

see Navigation Manual ...... 3-81Net

Convenience .................... 2-44New Vehicle Break-In ........... 2-15

OOdometer ........................... 3-28Odometer, Trip ..................... 3-28Off-Road ............................. 4-13

Driving ............................ 4-13Recovery ......................... 4-11

INDEX i-7

OilChange Engine Oil Light .... 3-38Engine ............................ 5-14Engine Oil Life System ...... 5-16Pressure Light .................. 3-37

Older Children, Restraints ...... 1-23Online Owner Center .............. 7-4OnStar, Privacy .................... 7-17OnStar® System, see

OnStar® Manual ............... 2-33Operation, Universal Home

Remote System ................ 2-37Outlet Adjustment ................. 3-24Outlets

Accessory Power .............. 3-16Outside

Convex Mirror .................. 2-30Heated Mirrors ................. 2-30Power Mirrors .................. 2-29

Owner Checks and Services ... 6-10Owners, Canadian .................... ii

PPaint, Damage ..................... 5-78Park

Shifting Into ..................... 2-25Shifting Out of .................. 2-27

ParkingOver Things That Burn ...... 2-27

Parking Brake ...................... 2-24Passenger Airbag Status

Indicator .......................... 3-30Passenger Compartment Air

Filter ............................... 3-24Passenger Sensing System ... 1-51Passing .............................. 4-11PASS-Key® III+ Electronic

Immobilizer ...................... 2-13PASS-Key® III+ Electronic

Immobilizer Operation ........ 2-14Perchlorate Materials

Requirements, California ...... 5-4Phone

Bluetooth® ....................... 3-81Power

Door Locks ........................ 2-8Electrical System .............. 5-80Reduced Engine Light ....... 3-39Retained

Accessory (RAP) ........... 2-17Seat ................................. 1-4Steering Fluid ................... 5-26Windows ......................... 2-10

Power Steering WarningLights ............................. 3-33

Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts ............................... 1-23

Privacy ............................... 7-16Navigation System ............ 7-17OnStar ............................ 7-17Radio Frequency

Identification (RFID) ....... 7-17Proposition 65 Warning,

California .......................... 5-4

RRadio Frequency

Identification (RFID),Privacy ............................ 7-17

Radio(s) ............................. 3-67Radios

Navigation/Radio System,see Navigation Manual ... 3-81

Reception ........................ 3-92Setting the Clock .............. 3-65Theft-Deterrent ................. 3-91

Rainsense™ II Wipers ............ 3-8Reading Lamps ................... 3-15Rear Door Security Locks ....... 2-8Rear Seat Armrest ............... 2-44Rear Vision Camera (RVC) .... 2-31Rear Window Washer/Wiper .... 3-9

i-8 INDEX

Rearview Mirror, AutomaticDimming .......................... 2-29

Rearview Mirrors .................. 2-29Reclining Seatbacks ............... 1-6Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants ........................ 6-13Recreational Vehicle Towing ... 4-32Reduced Engine Power

Light ............................... 3-39Reimbursement

Program, GM Mobility ......... 7-6Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System ............................. 2-3Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System, Operation .............. 2-4Remote Vehicle Start ............. 2-5Removing the Flat Tire and

Installing the Spare Tire ..... 5-66Removing the Spare Tire

and Tools ........................ 5-65Replacement Bulbs .............. 5-41Replacement Parts,

Maintenance .................... 6-15Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government ....... 7-14Reporting Safety Defects

to Saturn ......................... 7-14

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernment ..................... 7-14

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint

Systems ....................... 1-58Replacing Restraint

System Parts After aCrash .......................... 1-59

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) .................... 2-17

Roadside AssistanceProgram ............................ 7-6

Rocking Your Vehicle toGet it Out ........................ 4-27

RoofSunroof ........................... 2-45

Running the Vehicle WhileParked ............................ 2-28

SSafety Belt Reminders .......... 3-28Safety Belts

Care of ........................... 5-74Extender ......................... 1-23How to Wear Safety

Belts Properly ............... 1-14

Safety Belts (cont.)Lap-Shoulder Belt ............. 1-19Safety Belts Are for

Everyone ..................... 1-10Use During Pregnancy ...... 1-23

Safety DefectsReporting to Saturn ........... 7-14Reporting to the United

States Government ........ 7-14Safety Warnings and Symbols .... iiiScheduled Maintenance .......... 6-3

Additional RequiredServices ........................ 6-6

Scheduling Appointments ........ 7-8Seatback, Folding Passenger ... 1-8Seats

Driver Seat HeightAdjuster ......................... 1-4

Head Restraints ................. 1-2Heated Seats ..................... 1-5Manual Lumbar .................. 1-5Passenger Folding

Seatback ....................... 1-8Power Seat ....................... 1-4Reclining Seatbacks ............ 1-6Split Folding Rear Seat ....... 1-9

INDEX i-9

Securing a Child RestraintRear Seat Position ............ 1-37Right Front Seat Position ... 1-39

Security Light ...................... 3-38Service ................................ 5-3

Accessories andModifications .................. 5-3

Adding Equipment to theOutside of the Vehicle ..... 5-5

Doing Your Own Work ........ 5-4Engine Soon Lamp ........... 3-35Publications Ordering

Information ................... 7-15Scheduling Appointments ..... 7-8Vehicle Soon Light ............ 3-40

Service Parts IdentificationLabel .............................. 5-79

Servicing YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle .... 1-56

Setting the Clock ................. 3-65Sheet Metal Damage ............ 5-78Shifting

Out of Park ..................... 2-27Shifting Into Park ................. 2-25Signals, Turn and

Lane-Change ..................... 3-6

Spare TireCompact ......................... 5-71Installing .......................... 5-66Removing ........................ 5-65Storing ............................ 5-70

Specifications andCapacities ....................... 5-86

Speedometer ....................... 3-28Split Folding Rear Seat .......... 1-9StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ..... 3-33StabiliTrak® System ............... 4-7Start Vehicle, Remote ............. 2-5Starting the Engine .............. 2-17Steering ............................... 4-9

Power, Warning Lights ....... 3-33Steering Wheel Controls,

Audio .............................. 3-92Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ...... 3-6Storage Areas

Cargo ManagementSystem ........................ 2-44

Center Console ................ 2-42Convenience Net .............. 2-44Cupholders ...................... 2-41Front Storage Area ........... 2-42Glove Box ....................... 2-41Instrument Panel .............. 2-42

Storage Areas (cont.)Luggage Carrier ............... 2-43Rear Seat Armrest ............ 2-44Sunglasses Storage

Compartment ................ 2-42Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice,

or Snow .......................... 4-27Sun Visors .......................... 2-11Sunroof .............................. 2-45

TTachometer ......................... 3-28Taillamps

Turn Signal, Stoplampsand Back-up Lamps ....... 5-40

Text Telephone (TTY) Users .... 7-5Theft-Deterrent Feature ......... 3-91Theft-Deterrent Systems ........ 2-12

Content Theft-Deterrent ..... 2-12PASS-Key® III+ Electronic

Immobilizer ................... 2-13PASS-Key® III+ Electronic

Immobilizer Operation .... 2-14Tilt Wheel ............................. 3-6Time, Setting ....................... 3-65

i-10 INDEX

TirePressure Light .................. 3-34

Tires .................................. 5-43Aluminum Wheels,

Cleaning ...................... 5-77Buying New Tires ............. 5-58Chains ............................ 5-62Changing a Flat Tire ......... 5-64Cleaning .......................... 5-77Compact Spare ................ 5-71Different Size ................... 5-59High-Speed Operation ....... 5-50If a Tire Goes Flat ............ 5-63Inflation - Tire Pressure ..... 5-49Inspection and Rotation ..... 5-56Installing the Spare Tire ..... 5-66Pressure Monitor

Operation ..................... 5-53Pressure Monitor System ... 5-51Removing the Flat Tire ...... 5-66Removing the Spare Tire

and Tools ..................... 5-65Sidewall Labeling .............. 5-44Storing a Flat or Spare

Tire and Tools ............... 5-70Terminology and

Definitions .................... 5-46

Tires (cont.)Uniform Tire Quality

Grading ....................... 5-60Wheel Alignment and

Tire Balance ................. 5-61Wheel Replacement .......... 5-62When It Is Time for

New Tires .................... 5-57Towing

Recreational Vehicle .......... 4-32Towing a Trailer ................ 4-35Your Vehicle ..................... 4-32

TractionControl System (TCS) ......... 4-8Control System Warning

Light ............................ 3-33StabiliTrak® System ............ 4-7

TransmissionFluid, Automatic ................ 5-18

Transmission Operation,Automatic ................ 2-19, 2-22

Transportation, Courtesy ......... 7-9Trip Odometer ..................... 3-28Turn and Lane-Change

Signals ............................. 3-6Turn Signal/Multifunction

Lever ................................ 3-6

UUniform Tire Quality Grading ... 5-60Universal Home Remote

System ........................... 2-37Operation ........................ 2-37

VVehicle

Control ............................. 4-4Design .............................. 4-2Loading ........................... 4-28Running While Parked ....... 2-28Service Soon Light ........... 3-40Symbols .............................. iii

Vehicle Customization, DIC .... 3-57Vehicle Data Recording and

Privacy ............................ 7-16Vehicle Data Recording,

Radio Frequency (RFID) .... 7-17Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN) ................... 5-79Service Parts

Identification Label ......... 5-79Vehicle, Remote Start ............. 2-5Ventilation Adjustment ........... 3-24Visors ................................. 2-11

INDEX i-11

WWarning Lights, Gages, and

Indicators ........................ 3-26Warnings

DIC Warnings andMessages .................... 3-49

Hazard Warning Flashers .... 3-5Safety and Symbols .............. iii

Washer Fluid, Low WarningLight ............................... 3-40

WheelsAlignment and Tire

Balance ....................... 5-61Different Size ................... 5-59Replacement .................... 5-62

When It Is Time for NewTires ............................... 5-57

Where to Put the ChildRestraint ......................... 1-30

Windows ............................. 2-10Power ............................. 2-10

WindshieldRainsense™ II Wipers ......... 3-8Washer ............................. 3-8Washer Fluid .................... 5-27

Windshield (cont.)Wiper Blade

Replacement ................ 5-42Wiper Blades, Cleaning ..... 5-76Wiper Fuses .................... 5-80Wipers .............................. 3-7

Winter Driving ...................... 4-25Wiper Activated Headlamps ... 3-12Wipers

Rear Washer ..................... 3-9

XXM Radio Messages ............ 3-79XM™ Satellite Radio

Antenna System ............... 3-93

YYour Driving, the Road and

Your Vehicle ...................... 4-1Your Vehicle and the

Environment ...................... 6-1

i-12 INDEX

2009 Saturn VUE Owner Manual M - General - Vaden GMPP · 2009 Saturn VUE Owner Manual M. SATURN,...

Documents

Transcript of 2009 Saturn VUE Owner Manual M - General - Vaden GMPP · 2009 Saturn VUE Owner Manual M. SATURN,...